THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF ILLINOIS 
 LIBRARY 
 
 796 
 


 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 in 2016 
 
 https://archive.org/details/losttentribesOOwild 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


THE 
 
 LOST TEN TRIBES: 
 
 AND 
 
 18 8 2 . 
 
 BY 
 
 REV. JOSEPH -WILD, D. D., 
 
 PAST OR OF UNION CONGREGATIONAL CHURCH, 
 
 BRO OKLYN, N. Y. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 JAMES HUGGINS, PRINTER AND PUBLISHER, 
 No. 372 Pearl Street. 
 
 1 879 . 
 
Entered according to Act of Congress in the year 18T9, 
 
 By REV. JOSEPH WILD, D. IX, 
 
 In the office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, I). C. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The following Discourses are presented to the 
 public in book form, agreeable to the request of 
 numerous friends. I have selected twenty from 
 one hundred and thirty, which I have given to 
 my own congregation, during the past three 
 years. I have tried to have them lean one against 
 another, to the end that the argument might be 
 continuous and somewhat complete. The reader 
 will remember, however, that the vast subject of 
 which they treat, cannot be fairly and com- 
 pletely presented in such a volume as this. 
 Also, it should be borne in mind that the lan- 
 guage, style and structure, are sermonic. Pulpit 
 literature, in these things, is peculiar and dis- 
 tinctively characteristic. 
 
 When I first entered the ministry, I made up 
 my mind that I would try and thoroughly un- 
 
 672390 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 derstand the Scriptures. I soon found that a 
 large portion was of a prophetic nature. I set 
 to work according to the usual method, but to 
 my sorrow, I soon discovered that the method 
 and rules in general use for scripture exegesis, 
 among what they called orthodox authors, were 
 very defective and unsatisfactory. The fact was 
 forced upon me that the true method, or key of 
 interpretation, was not in use. I was always 
 persuaded that the Bible was a unit, and that 
 the principles contained in such a unit were 
 beautifully related ; and because of such a faith, 
 I wondered more and more as I grew older, why 
 we had not a better key of interpretation. Men 
 spiritualized at random, without any kind of a 
 rule, except their own fancy In this manner 
 they expounded the material history of the Old 
 Testament. The whole arrangement w r as a Babel. 
 
 I had faintly discerned that the Scriptures 
 made a distinction between the house of Israel 
 and the house of Judah, and that the prophecies 
 belonging to one could not, in fairness, be ap- 
 plied to the other ; and that some prophecies 
 applied to both. It always seemed strange to 
 me, that the people which God said he had 
 chosen for Himself, should not be known. The 
 Jews were always known, but where was “Is- 
 rael, His inheritance % ” Again, I could see no 
 point in the Lord swearing so positively about 
 David’s seed and throne lasting to the end of 
 time. Taking them in a typical sense, they were 
 
■PREFACE. 
 
 about the poorest types that could have been 
 selected, because of the shortness of their ex- 
 istence, according to the general mode of inter- 
 pretation. Just at this point of my experience 
 I came across a book entitled “Our Israelitisli 
 Origin,” by the late John Wilson, the reading 
 of which confirmed me in my convictions, and 
 aided me to a better knowledge of the good 
 Book and Providence. 
 
 After some twenty years of experience, I be- 
 gan to teach the principles of interpretation ^ 
 embodied in these Discourses. Some three years 
 ago, I began to give a series of sermons, on the 
 Ten Lost Tribes. I soon found my own con- 
 gregation, as well as the public, were interested 
 and profited with the same, as was manifest from 
 the large and constant attendance thereon. By 
 personal interviews and letters, I have been 
 gratified to learn that many have been savingly 
 and truly converted to God through these Dis- 
 courses. Especially has this been the case with 
 those who were infidel in faith and action 
 towards God and His word. I have received 
 hundreds of letters thanking me, that the key of 
 interpretation presented, had made the Bible an 
 interesting and easily understood book. The 
 interest created gave rise to numerous requests 
 for copies of my sermons. The notice by the 
 public press now and again, intensified the in- 
 terest and increased the demand. To meet this 
 desire, I made arrangements with the editor and 
 
PREFACE . 
 
 proprietor of a weekly paper, called the Cham- 
 pion , to publish my evening Discourses. At 
 once the arrangement was found to be profitable 
 to him, agreeable to me, and admirably suited 
 to the public. So for more than a year the 
 Champion has been my faithful messenger on 
 this line, and will continue to be. It is a weekly 
 paper, published at 132 Nassau Street, New 
 York ; price one dollar per year. I am not 
 personally interested more than this. With its 
 politics and other matter I have nothing to do ; 
 but for the sermonic matter I hold myself respon- 
 sible. I feel free to express my pleasure in the 
 wonderful increase of its circulation. I am glad 
 it goes all over the States, the Dominion of Can- 
 ada, and is in goodly demand in Great Britain. 
 
 After I had been preaching on this subject for 
 some time, I made, fortunately, the acquaint- 
 ance of a name- sake of mine, Mr. Joseph 
 Wild, of Bay Ridge, near Brooklyn. On this 
 subject I found him remarkably well posted. 
 He had lots of books, pamphlets, papers and 
 maps on the matter, any or all of which he gave 
 me liberty to use. Through him my attention 
 was called to the valuable writings of our Eng- 
 lish brethren on this point, Edward Hine, Rev. 
 Mr. Glover, M. A., Rev. Mr. Grimaldi, M. A., 
 Philo-Israel and a host of others, whose writings 
 have helped me very much. Our English friends 
 have now a vast store of this kind of literature ; 
 while, so far as I know, we have no home pro- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 duction. This is one reason I feel satisfied in 
 sending forth this volume. 
 
 For years I have been greatly interested in 
 pyramidology, in the teachings of the Great 
 Pyramid, at Gizeh, in Egypt. Twenty years 
 ago I had confidence to lecture frequently on 
 the subject, and a few years since it was in my 
 mind to publish a small work on it. The necess- 
 ity of such a work was wisely and competently 
 taken out of my hands, however, by the ap- 
 pearance of a book entitled “The Stone Miracle,” 
 by Rev. Dr. Seiss, of Philadelphia. This is a 
 book admirably suited to beginners on this line 
 of study. And if one wants to go further and 
 be specially informed on pyramidology, why let 
 them get “ Our Inheritance in the Great Pyra- 
 mid,” a work by Prof. Piazzi Smyth, Astronomer- 
 Royal of Scotland. To this man God has given 
 a fine mind and a large heart, for a special place 
 and work. But what pleases me above all, is that 
 this pyramid, being the Lord' s pillar, and His 
 witness , should so finely tally with the scriptures 
 and Providence ; that the teachings of this 
 monument are in harmony with the principles 
 of interpretation, as applied to the prophecies in 
 these Discourses. I wish the reader to study 
 and become familiar with the plate of the 
 pyramid. 
 
 By several small engravings, I have sought to 
 aid the mind of the reader through the eye. In 
 the royal arms of England, there is considerable 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 of history ; the position of the lions, unicorn, 
 crown, and indeed all connected with it, is sig- 
 nificantly expressive. In these things, the ac- 
 cidental grouping, so far as man was concerned, 
 were as much under divjne supervision, as the 
 blundering of the Jews in the crucifying of 
 Jesus. So, divinely considered, they divinely 
 reveal. We know not the mind of our fathers 
 in the matter of selecting and composing the 
 items that make up the great seal, but we know 
 the mind of Providence. 
 
 The plate of the ragged old stone, called 
 Jacob’s Pillow, is not very distinct, but it is the 
 best we could do. As it is, it will aid the reader 
 in forming a better idea. The stone in shape is 
 an oblong square, about 32 inches long, 13 broad, 
 and 11 inches deep. At each end is an iron ring, 
 much worn and rusted. It is a bluish steel-like 
 color, mixed with some veins of red. It has 
 been in its present resting place 583 years. 
 
 The main idea I w T ish to convey in this book, 
 is that God is conducting His Providence 
 through His ancient chosen people, Israel, whom 
 I believe are found in the Saxon race. And His 
 throne on earth, through which flow the pur- 
 poses of Providence, is David’s throne; which I 
 believe to be at present the English throne 
 Queen Victoria (and God bless her), I believe to 
 be of David’s seed. The United States fulfills 
 the role of the tribe of Manasseh. Therefore, to 
 understand the prophecies, Providence, and the 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 present movements of nations, as well as the 
 future lot and destiny of each, we must read the 
 Scriptures in this light. God has made the 
 children of Israel and throne of David His ex- 
 ecutive, in time, on earth. They are His execu- 
 tive for civilization, evangelization, order and 
 conquest. Through them God will conquer the 
 world to a universal peace. As Moses was to 
 God, so is Israel. Moses being a divine execu- 
 tor, was to the people a god — so is Israel to all 
 mankind. Spiritual Israel will come through 
 literal Israel. 
 
 I have expressed myself freely — shall cheer- 
 fully grant reviewers, critics and readers, the 
 same privilege. I send forth this book with a 
 pure desire that it may do good. Amen, so 
 mote it be. 
 
 JOSEPH WILD. 
 
 Brooklyn, May 1st, 1879. 
 
OBVERSi. 
 
 REVERSE. 
 
 a * 
 
 A /> li. 
 
 This device of the great Seal was adopted by act of the Continental Con- 
 gress, on June 20th, 1T82, and re-adopted by the new Congress, September 
 15th, 1789. The act provided for an obverse and a reverse , as set forth in 
 this plate ; the reverse is not used. This is a plate of the first and original 
 Seal, which, by use, has been worn out. The one now in use is the second ; 
 it differs from the first that, by an accident, seven arrows were left out of 
 the eagle’s talon. 
 
 f 
 
 J Ct 
 
 V 
 
 LC 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Preface 
 
 The Great Seal 
 
 Diagram of Pyramid 
 
 Explanation of Diagram 12 
 
 DISCOURSE, 1. 
 
 KE Y DIS TINCTIONS .... 14 
 
 DISCOURSE, 2. 
 
 ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 Israel — How the gates of His enemies are to be given Him — 
 
 By this sign lost Israel may be known — The giving will 
 correspond to the multiplying— The promise, in this day, 
 is rapidly fulfilling — England, Disraeli, Tancred and 
 Russia 25 
 
 DISCOURSE, 3. 
 
 ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 Promises to Israel — Material nature — Location of the tribes 
 in Christ’s day— God’s Providence — British and American 
 rule — “Life from the dead” — Teaching the Nations 
 peaceful arbitration — England and Russia — Afghanistan 
 falls to Anglo-Israel — God’s political geography— Anglo- 
 Saxon evangelization— Russia opposing it — British and 
 Russian outposts in contact — Wail of Judah — Earth’s 
 girdle 41 
 
viii. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 DISCOURSE, 4. 
 
 ISRAEL AND POPULATION 
 Prophetic latter days — Our bearings in the ages — Unwise im- 
 patience — Israel to be always a nation —Her Empire — 
 Historic career of and future of England, America and 
 Judah — Relative increase of population — The Infidel 
 Saxon — Jewish, British and American interests one — A 
 full end of all nations but Israel — Famine henceforth only 
 for the Heathen— Arbitration to be enforced by Israel — 
 American absorption — Startling figures of future popula- 
 tion — The balance of power 56 
 
 DISCOURSE, 5. 
 
 ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 Latter day prophetic promises — Time of Israel's revival — 
 Pyramid testimony — British Island population in 1882 — 
 Affinity between the English and Hebrew—Cell of the 
 honey bee — Origin of language — Lion of languages — 
 Foreign testimony— All tongues indigenous but English 
 — The pre-millennial tokens 71 
 
 DISCOURSE, 6. 
 
 ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 Meaning of the Gentile fullness — Blessings through Judah 
 and Ephraim — Best religion — Jews outwitted — Why Ben- 
 jamin was kept at Jerusalem — French Protestantism — 
 Gentile fullness contemporary with to-day — Turkey 
 exceptional 85 
 
 DISCOURSE, 7. 
 
 DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 Future history of the world— The destruction of the Papacy 
 commenced — Ireland to be free and independent of Eng- 
 land and Rome — Future glory of Britain and the United 
 States 100 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 IX. 
 
 DISCOURSE, 8. 
 
 LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY . 
 
 The Turks the Ishmaelites — England and Russia to partition 
 the Mohammedan Empire — Why England sympathizes 
 with Turkey 112 
 
 DISCOURSE, 9. 
 
 LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 Prophetic wonders— Twenty marks of the monster — The Ber- 
 lin Congress — Anti-Christs many — Mistakes by Writers. .124 
 
 DISCOURSE, 10. 
 
 ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN . 
 
 Second Discourse on the monster — Who he will be and his 
 name — How he will obtain power — Trouble for Germany, 
 France and Russia — Communism — Romanism —Shakers 
 — Matthias, Westchester prophet 136 
 
 DISCOURSE, 11. 
 
 THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 Troublous times — Appearance of the witnesses — Who they are 
 — How they can be identified — Their mission work and 
 suffering — The time and circumstances of Christ’s coming. 148 
 
 DISCOURSE, 12. 
 
 MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 More about the two witnesses — Mormonism — God ruling 
 among the nations — Career of the two witnesses -Anti- 
 Christ — The throne and house of David 159 
 
X. 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 DISCOURSE, 13. 
 
 BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 The combatants on both sides — Who “The Kings of the 
 East” are — The great Napoleonic idea — Disraeli, Lincoln 
 and Grant — England’s policy in Turkey — Future wars 
 and intrigues — The great battle field — Gathering of the 
 nations— Earthquakes — Jerusalem as a seaport 172 
 
 DISCOURSE, 14. 
 
 ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 The forces in the battle — Time of its occurrence — Mistakes of 
 Adventists — A church “strike ” wanted — The hard times 
 after 1882 — History of the world till 1935 — Hine’s theory. 184 
 
 DISCOURSE, 15. 
 
 WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 Purpose of the flood — The Abrahamic current — Rending 
 Mount Olivet— Former earthquakes —Boundaries of Pales- 
 tine Dan and Gad to guard the “gates”— Gad the 
 Scotchman — The future Jerusalem— The Dead Sea and 
 Mediterranean to be joined — Mistake of Spiritualizing 
 everything 197 
 
 DISCOURSE, 16. 
 
 NINE TEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SE FEN 
 
 “Signs of the times” — The return to Jeiusalem — Forces of 
 Russia and England — Present locality of ancient nations 
 — Origin of American republicanism — Federation of the 
 nations coming — Evolution and Devolution 207 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 xi. 
 
 DISCOURSE, 17. 
 
 THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 The Great Pyramid— Who Job was — Who built the Pyramid 
 — What it was built for — An epitome of the earth — The 
 history of man contained in it, past and future— Science 
 and the Bible, etc., etc 220 
 
 DISCOURSE, 18. 
 
 SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 The Stone Prophet in the wilderness— No war for four years 
 — The great struggle to commence in 1882 — Prussia 
 ancient Assyria— England, Germany and Egypt, to be 
 allies — The future history of the world — The Philistines 
 the Southern Irish- -Who their great ancestor was, etc. . . 233 
 
 DISCOURSE, 19. 
 
 THE THRONE OF DAVID . 
 
 England’s prophecy fulfilled in the Berlin Congress — The 
 harp of Tara the harp of Israel — The future European 
 alliances — Royal succession of the house of Israel 243 
 
 DISCOURSE, 20. 
 
 JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 The prophet’s commission — His life — The tribes in his day — 
 Landing of Jeremiah in Ireland — What he brought with 
 him — Colonization of Ireland — Jeremiah the founder of 
 the ancient Irish government and religion — Tea Tephi 
 and Heremon — The ancient Irish flag — The harp and lion 
 — Season of Ireland’s historical prestige — Causes of her 
 decline — St. Patrick a Benjaminite— How Rome de- 
 stroyed Jeremiah’s memory among the Irish — Destruction 
 of Tara— Ulster never conquered — Irish independence — 
 
 Ark of the covenant — Ruins of Tara 263 
 
EXPLANATIONS OF THE PYRAMID PLATE. 
 
 Fig. I. Shows how the Pyramid could be built both on the bor- 
 der and the middle of Egypt. Upper and lower Egypt are in the 
 shape of a fan. The point of joining is called the Sector point. 
 At that point it stood. The river Nile empties by several mouths 
 into the Mediterranean. 
 
 Fig. 2. The Boss, i-ii real size. It is a granite stone in a 
 leaf shape, expressing the true measure used by the builders. 
 
 Fig. 3. A vertical section of the king’s chamber, with ante- 
 room and passage leading from the grand gallery ; with the 
 several chambers over the king’s chamber. 
 
 C. Points out Porphyry Coffer, which is simply a trough or 
 lidless box, cut out of a piece of porphyry stone. It is about 7 feet 
 6^ inches long, 3 feet and 3 inches broad, and 3 feet 5 inches high. 
 It is, so far, the only piece of furniture found in the whole building. 
 It was built in, for it is too large to pass through the entrance. It 
 is, no doubt, the true standard of weights and measures. 
 
 The Pyramid inch is longer than the English inch by the 
 breadth of a very fine hair. The Pyramid, as it stood, was the 
 circle squared. 
 

PYRAMID, AT GIZEH, EGYPT. 
 
 H 
 
 < 
 
 W 
 
 P4 
 
 O 
 
 PILLAR AND WITNESS TO THE LORD. 
 
Explanations of the Pyramid Plate. 
 
 The vertical section shown represents the Pyramid cut in two, 
 from north to south. The reader is supposed to be looking west- 
 ward. Twice a year the sun shines on the Pyramid, without a 
 shadow on any part of it, — the only building so peculiarly situated. 
 The falling sun’s rays are to indicate the same. 
 
 The dotted outside lines represent the Pyramid when com- 
 plete. The yellowish white marble casing, that is,' covering stones, 
 have been taken away. The square above the chambers, near the 
 top, represents a supposed room, which will typify Heaven. 
 
 A. B. Vertical height about 486^ feet. 
 
 C. The entrance passage, 978 inches to first ascending pas- 
 sage, made by the builders, which, when the building was com- 
 plete, was covered up. It was about 49 feet from the ground, and 
 300 inches east of the north centre. 
 
 D. Descending passage, continues to a well chamber, deep 
 in the natural rock. 
 
 E. First ascending passage, 1542 inches long. 
 
 F. Natural rock. 
 
 g. Grand Gallery. 1881 inches and a fraction long, gen- 
 erally called 1882 inches. 
 
 G. Horizontal passage leading into the Queen’s chamber. 
 
 H. A line pointing to the Pole star, Alpha Draconius, in 2170 
 B. C. This fixed the exact place of entrance. 
 
 I. A passage out of grand gallery, passing through the grotto 
 chamber to the subterranean well chamber. 
 
 K. A 1 Mamoun’s entrance. This Arab chief, about 820 A. 
 D., at a great cost of time and labor, forces a way into the Pyra- 
 mid, the builder’s way not being then known. This is the way 
 people enter now. 
 
 L. Rubbish made by A 1 Mamoun’s opening. 
 
 M. Rubbish and chips of the ancient builders. 
 
 V. Vents, or air flues, as they are called. 
 
KEY DISTINCTION'S. 
 
 Discourse , 1 . 
 
 Text— 2 Peter i. 19-20* 
 
 “ We have a more sure word of Prophecy ; w hereunto ye do well 
 that ye take heed , as unto a light that shineth in a dark place, 
 until the day dawn , and the day star arise in your hearts. 
 Knowing this first , that 710 prophecy of the Scripture is of 
 any private interpretation P 
 
 5TL AM about to give you a few Discourses on 
 Prophecy, and in doing so, I desire in the 
 first place, to point out to you a few very im- 
 portant distinctions included in the Prophecies. 
 Suppose the Bible to be a great palace, with its 
 royalty, royal children, servants and subjects. 
 You desire to go through it and view it intelli- 
 gently, and to understand all about its inhabit- 
 ants and laws of government; now to do so you 
 must have keys, and you must learn who is 
 who, their place, authority and work. If not so 
 qualified you could not pass from room to room, 
 and you might confound the King with some 
 
KEY DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 15 
 
 servant, and visitors might be mistaken for the 
 children of the household. Thus your ideas 
 would be considerably mixed ; you would be 
 guilty of talking about the King, when you 
 really meant some servant, and of prophesying 
 for the royal children in the name of the visitors. 
 The years would come and go, but events would 
 not happen as you had prophecied. Each gen- 
 eration would take your report and follow in 
 your footsteps, thus confusion and disappoint- 
 ment would keep pace with' the passing gen- 
 erations. 
 
 What is here made a matter of supposition, 
 has been a solemn fact on the line of human 
 experience. Men have studied the Bible and 
 Providence in this ignorant and confused way. 
 Theologians have thrown aside all restraints, and 
 well defined limitations and distinctions of the 
 bible in their assumed liberty of expounding 
 and spiritualizing the same. No matter to them 
 that there is a God-revealed distinction between 
 Judah and Israel, Manasseh and Ephraim, Sa- 
 maritans and Gentiles, and the throne of David 
 and the throne of the Heathen. Writers and 
 speakers are guilty of using the words Judah 
 and Israel in a synonymous sense, though the 
 words stand for different people, history and 
 prophecies, soon after the descendants of Jacob 
 settled Palestine. To aid you in seeing this 
 historical confusion and folly, let me call your 
 attention to them separately. 
 
16 
 
 KEY DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 JUDAH. 
 
 What does this word stand for in the bible ? 
 In the first place it is the name of the fourth son 
 of Jacob. In the second place it was the name 
 of his direct descendants or tribe. In the third 
 place it became the name of the portion of the 
 country occupied by this tribe in the Promised 
 Land. In the fourth place it became the name 
 of a kingdom and government ; this fourth name 
 included the tribe of Benjamin and their terri- 
 tory. In the fifth place it became the name of 
 the whole country of Palestine, and is now often 
 so used. To-day this word stands for those we 
 call Jews, who, as they allow among themselves, 
 represent and only include Judah and Levi. 
 
 On the death of Solomon the country and 
 tribe%finally separated into two houses, king- 
 doms and governments. Nine tribes went with 
 Jeroboam, and three with Rehoboam, namely, 
 Judah, Levi and Benjamin. The nine tribed 
 house was called Israel, the three tribed house 
 Judah. This separation was about 975 B. C. — 
 I Kings, 12. From that day to this these two 
 houses have never been united; but they are to 
 be, as scores of statements to that effect are in 
 the good book. — Hosea 1. 11. About 5S0 B. C. 
 the house of Judah was taken captive into Bab- 
 ylon, remaining 70 years, then they returned to 
 their own land and remained till the year of our 
 Lord 70, when Jerusalem was destroyed and 
 they were scattered. 
 
KEY DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 17 
 
 Prophecies referring to the Jews are numerous 
 and in striking contrast to those that refer to 
 Israel. 1. The Jews were to be a scattered 
 people. 2. A specially persecuted people. 3. 
 to be without a nationality. 4. To be without 
 government. 5. Not to be owners of landed 
 property, though they will have money, until 
 toward the latter days. 6. They were to be a 
 proverb. 7. They were to be few in number. 
 
 8. They are to retain a special type of features. 
 
 9. They were to be repeatedly robbed. 10. They 
 were to reject Christ. 11, To retain the Mosaic 
 service till returned to their own land. 12. They 
 are to keep their name, and many such distinc- 
 tions, none of which should be applied to Israel. 
 All these things have been and are fulfilled, or 
 fulfilling, and though men are wonderfully given 
 to spiritualizing, few, if any, venture to spiritu- 
 alize Judah’s curses. Men and ministers calling 
 themselves Gentiles, are rude enough to spirit- 
 ualize the blessings of Judah, and stealing them, 
 apply them to themselves. 
 
 ISRAEL. 
 
 1. A name given to Jacob after wrestling with 
 the angel. 2. A term applied sometimes to all 
 the descendants of Jacob. 3. In a spiritual 
 sense, those who believe in Christ. 4. A name 
 that covered and included the nine tribes which 
 went with Jeroboam and formed the kingdom 
 of Israel. They remained a distinct kingdom, 
 
18 
 
 KEY DISTIKCTIOltS. 
 
 and till now a nationality. From 975 to 725 B. 
 C. , they had some 19 kings. They were finally 
 carried captive into Assyria by Shalmaneser. — 
 II Kings, 17. From that captivity they have 
 never returned ; as a body they never can, only 
 representatives, as stated Jer 3. 14, “ One of a 
 city, and two of a family.” 
 
 Now prophecy points out that it was Israel 
 that was to be lost for a while, and come to light 
 in the latter day. They are known in the Scrip- 
 tures in contradistinction from others by 
 such terms as the following: “ All Israel ,” 
 
 ‘ ‘ All the House of Israel wholly , ” “ The House 
 of Israel , ’ ’ ‘ ‘Men of Israel, ’ ’ and God calls them 
 His “ Servants, Witnesses , Chosen People, In- 
 heritance and Seed.” The lot, course and Prov- 
 idential portion of this people are very marked 
 from any other, especially from the Jew, with 
 whom they are so often confounded. The his- 
 tory of the two people have been wide apart and 
 as different as they well could be, 
 
 1. They were to be lost. 2. They were to be 
 divorced from the Mosaic law. 3. They were to 
 lose their name. 4. They were to lose their 
 language. 5. They were to possess the isles of 
 the sea, coasts of the earth, waste and desolate 
 places, to inherit the portion of the Gentiles, 
 their seed, land and cities. 6. They are to be 
 great and successful colonizers. 7. Before them 
 other people are to die out. 8. They are to be 
 a head nation. 9. To be a company of nations. 
 
KEY DISTINCTIONS. 19 
 
 10. To be great in war on land or sea. 11. To 
 be lenders of money. 12. To have a monarchy . 
 13. To be keepers of the Sabbath. 14. To have 
 David’ s throne and seed ruling over them . 15. 
 
 They are to possess Palestine, and invite their 
 brethren of Judah to return. And thus I might 
 repeat some sixty positive marks and distinc- 
 tions setting forth Israel ; and yet men wilfully 
 persist in confounding them with the Jews, or 
 looking for this great and favored people of the 
 Lord among the lowest of human kind, Indians, 
 Africans, and so on. 
 
 SAMARITANS. 
 
 The Samaritans were not Jews or Israelites, 
 strictly speaking. They of course became Jew- 
 ish in their customs and worship. Originally 
 they were Assyrians. When the nine tribes 
 were carried captive they were brought and put 
 in their place. “And the King of Assyria 
 brought men from Babylon, and from Cuthah, 
 and from Ava, and from Hamah, and from Sep- 
 harvaim, and placed them in the cities of 
 Samaria, instead of the children of Israel.” — II 
 Kings, 17, 24. The Jews and the Samaritans 
 never wholly mixed ; one was always distaste- 
 ful to the other. They never were taken cap- 
 tive, and to this day they live in and about 
 Mount Scychar, numbering between three and 
 four hundreds. 
 
20 
 
 KEY DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 BENJAMIN. 
 
 The tribe of Benjamin has a singular and 
 special place in the history of Israel and Judah. 
 Neither the Old or New Testament can be well 
 understood unless one understands the place of 
 this tribe in Providence. They were always 
 counted one of the ten tribes, and reckoned wit h 
 them in the prophetic visions. They were only 
 loaned to Judah about 800 years. Read I 
 Kings, 11. They were to be a light for David in 
 Jerusalem. God, foreseeing that the Jews would 
 reject Christ, kept back this one tribe to be in 
 readiness to receive Him, and so they did. At 
 the destruction of Jerusalem they escaped, and 
 after centuries of wanderings turn up as the 
 proud and haughty Normans. Finally they 
 unite with the other tribes under William the 
 Conquerer. A proper insight into the work and 
 mission of Benjamin will greatly aid one in in- 
 terpreting the New Testament. He was set 
 apart as a missionary tribe, and at once set to 
 work to spread the Gospel of Jesus. Most of 
 the disciples were Benjaminites. Then, after 800 
 years of fellowship with Judah, they were cut 
 loose and sent after their brethren of the house 
 of Israel. It was needful that the Lion and the 
 Unicorn should unite. 
 
 MANASSEH AND EPHRAIM. 
 
 The history of these two representative char- 
 acters is worth your careful study. The whole 
 of the circumstances of Jacob blessing them 
 
KEY DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 21 
 
 must be accepted as Divinely directed. Man- 
 asseli was to be a great people, and so I believe 
 he is. In the United States I find this promise 
 literally fulfilled. This is the Key to the settle- 
 ment of this land ; to the agitations of the Pil- 
 grims and Puritans in England. The mission, 
 work and place of the United States, may be 
 found in the prophecies relating to this tribe. 
 Let any one examine the great seal of the 
 United States, and study its design, and surprise 
 will fill the mind that facts, Providence and pro- 
 phecies, do so wonderfully agree. Take the 
 obverse side : Here you have an eagle with out- 
 stretched wings ; the bird is perfect, not double 
 head and deformed, as in other cases where the 
 eagle has been or is the National bird. The 
 striped escutcheon on its breast, in its beak a 
 scroll, inscribed with a motto “ E pluribus 
 TJnum /” one out of many, as Manasseh was, 
 and as the country is building up a grand 
 nationality and oneness out of all nations nearly. 
 Over the head of the eagle there is a glory , the 
 parting of clouds by light ; in the opening ap- 
 pear 13 stars forming a constellation argent, on 
 an azure field. In the dexter or right talon is 
 an olive branch, a symbol of peace ; in the sin- 
 ster or left talon, is a bundle of 13 arrows. But 
 it is on the reverse side of the great seal that we 
 have a wonder. Here we have an unfinished 
 pyramid : a portion of the top is gone, exactly 
 the same as the great pyramid in Egypt is at 
 
22 
 
 KEY DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 this day. Anticipating this very day — Is. 19. 
 19 : “In that day shall there be an altar to the 
 Lord. And it shall be for a sign and for a wit- 
 ness unto the Lord of Hosts in the land of Egypt.” 
 Now it is somewhat singular that the Congress 
 of 1782 should have adopted so remarkable a 
 sign, one that would witness to God and tell of 
 their origin. The reverse side is the under side, 
 and shows from whence the nation came, and on 
 what it is built. In the zenith, that is, above 
 the top of the pyramid, is a triangle surrounded 
 by a glory ; and in the center is an All-seeing 
 eye. Over the eye we have Annuit Ccsptis, 
 which means, ‘ He prospers our beginning." On 
 the base of the pyramid we have in letters, 1776, 
 and underneath the following motto — ‘Hovus 
 or do sector um ,” meaning a “New era in the 
 ages. ’ ’ The suggestion of the items upon the great 
 seal were from Sir John Prestwicli,Bart., an Eng- 
 lishman. He gave the suggestions to the Amer- 
 ican Minister, John Adams, and thus the same 
 were conveyed to Congress and adopted. 
 
 We have in the facts of the great seal, a series 
 of coincidents that connect this country with the 
 tribe of Manasseh. When the tribes marched, 
 Benjamin, Ephraim and Manasseh, went to- 
 gether, on the west side of the Ark, for their 
 homes were westward. On their battalion ban- 
 ner was the figure of a youth, denoting activity, 
 with the motto, “ The Cloud of Jehovah rest on 
 them, even when they go forth out of the camp.” 
 
KEY DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 23 
 
 Here we have the origin of the clond on the seal. 
 And when we remember that Manasseh was 
 brought up at the foot of the pyramid and could 
 see it from his palace home at Memphis, then 
 we get a cue to the figure of the pyramid on the 
 seal.”'* 
 
 PYRAMID. 
 
 The pyramid is a wonderful witness for God 
 and his people. This building in Egypt has 
 stood for 4,000 years ; finished and complete, it 
 stood for about 3,000, before anybody ventured 
 to find a way into it. Then, at a great cost of 
 men, money and time, a way was forced in by 
 an Arab chief. There surely is something re- 
 markable that the only thing found in it should 
 be a stone trough, and more singular to my 
 mind, that the Ark of the Covenant and this 
 stone trough should be of equal capacity ; and 
 the Laver in which the Priest washed his feet in 
 the Temple was exactly of the same size. And 
 Solomon’s Molten Sea contained just as much 
 water as would fill the King’ s Chamber in which 
 this trough was found. Can any man know 
 these things and believe them to be accidental ? 
 Verily not. They do most assuredly pledge a 
 God and Providence. 
 
 EPHRAIM. 
 
 This word is not only the name of Joseph’s 
 son and the tribe, but it is used quite frequently 
 in a generic sense and stands for the ten tribes 
 
 * Essay on Manasseh and the United States, by the author. 
 
24 KEY DISTINCTION'S. 
 
 and Manasseh. To Reuben by birthright was 
 the lead politically, but it was taken from him 
 and given to Joseph, and so to Ephraim. From 
 Judah came the chief ruler, that is Christ ; but 
 the birthright was Joseph’s. — I Chron. 5. 1. 
 
 THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 To this throne God pledged under oath a per- 
 petuity. Also He pledged that some one of 
 David’ s seed should always be on it. The throne 
 and seed are pledged an unconditional existence. 
 This being so, it follows that they must be now 
 in existence, and that finally all thrones will be 
 swallowed up by this one. Queen Victoria is of 
 David, and the English throne is David’s. 
 Hence all the promises and prophecies referring 
 to David’s throne may be found on this line. 
 For prophecy not being of private interpretation 
 such facts may be proven. 
 
 GENTILES. 
 
 The word Gentile generally embraces all those 
 nations and people outside of the twelve tribes. 
 Keeping these few distinctions in mind, you will 
 be enabled to read the bible interestingly and 
 with the proper understanding. Prophetic evi- 
 dence is a strong kind of proof. Study the 
 word on this line and you will find Providence 
 and history lending glorious confirmation to the 
 same. 
 
ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 Discourse, 2 . 
 
 ISRAEL — HOW THE GATES OF HIS ENEMIES ARE 
 TO BE GIVEN HIM — BY THIS SIGN LOST ISRAEL 
 MAY BE KNOWN — THE GIVING WILL COR- 
 RESPOND TO THE MULTIPLYING — THE PRO- 
 MISE, IN THIS DAY, IS RAPIDLY FULFILLING 
 — ENGLAND, DISRAELI AND TANCRED AND 
 RUSSIA. 
 
 Text— Gen* 22 : 17. 
 
 “ That in blessing , I will bless thee ; and in multiplying , I will 
 multiply thy seed as the stars of the heaven , and as the sand 
 which is upon the seashore ; and thy seed shall possess the 
 gate of his enemies C 
 
 ® NDER a divine oath was this prophetic 
 promise made to Abraham. At the time it 
 was given Abraham had, by command, offered 
 his only son, Isaac, which offering, to all human 
 appearance, would leave the old patriarch again 
 childless ; but his faith staggered not, for human 
 incompetence does not circumscribe the bounds 
 of divine suflicience. The God who commanded 
 Abraham to offer, recalled the command at a 
 certain stage of the fulfillment, counting the 
 
26 
 
 ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 faith of Abraham for righteousness. In Abra- 
 ham's faith Isaac was really sacrificed ; hence 
 the divine approval : ‘ ‘ By Myself have I sworn, 
 saith the Lord ; for because thou hast done this 
 thing, and hast not withheld thy son, thine only 
 son, that in blessing I will bless thee, and in 
 multiplying I will multiply thy seed as the 
 stars of the heaven, and as the sand which is 
 upon the seashore ; and thy seed shall possess 
 the gate of his enemies.” An oath with men in 
 this day does not mean much in the way of con- 
 firmation, but not so with God’ s oath. An oath 
 ought to be sacred, and should be the end of 
 doubt and strife. God made a promise to Abra- 
 ham, and because He could swear by no greater, 
 He sware by Himself. And Abraham lived to 
 see the promise begin to fulfill, and to-day the 
 heirs of Abraham may look and see the same 
 promise fulfilling, for, as Paul says in Heb. vi. 
 17 : “Wherein God, willing more abundantly 
 to show unto the heirs of promise the immuta- 
 bility of His counsel, confirmed it by an oath.” 
 Who are the heirs of promise % For to them 
 belong many and precious promises, both spirit- 
 ual and temporal. Spiritually, they are to 
 lead and be responsible for the evangelization 
 of the world. Temporally, they are to be a 
 numerous seed, a powerful people. They are 
 to occupy the ends of the earth, the uttermost 
 parts of the earth, the coasts of the earth, the 
 waste and the desolate places of the earth, the 
 
ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 27 
 
 isles of the sea, the heathen, as an inheritance. 
 They are to inherit the Gentiles, and make the 
 desolate cities to be inhabited ; they are to be 
 the chief of nations ; they are to be a company 
 of nations ; they are to be a great people ; they 
 are to possess the gates of their enemies. 
 Snrely such a people should be found, for all 
 these things make it impossible for them to be 
 hid in a corner. One cannot help saying with 
 the psalmist: “Blessed is the nation whose 
 
 God is the Lord ; and the people whom He hath 
 chosen for His own inheritance.” 
 
 In the English court of chancery are vast sums 
 of money, large fortunes waiting for heirs. The 
 court frequently advertises for them, and many 
 in every land respond and are eager to prove 
 their claims ; they are anxious to be known and 
 accepted as the decendants and lawful heirs of 
 certain testators. It is oftentimes difficult to 
 establish their claims and prove satisfactorily 
 their identity. The court demands that the 
 evidences of heirship be very definite. In this 
 they are right. But we venture to say that 
 even the English court of chancery would not 
 turn away a claimant who had all the distinct 
 marks and abounding evidence of identity that 
 mark and characterize the children of Abraham, 
 especially so in the latter day, for then these 
 characteristics are to be clearer and fuller. 
 
 The Jews are known ; they have been known 
 all down the centuries ; they have not been able 
 
28 
 
 ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 to hide themselves. In keeping with the word 
 of God they have fulfilled up to the present time 
 the prophecies attaching to them. In all the 
 world they are estimated to number some nine 
 millions. The Jews include the children of Judah 
 and Levi ; these two tribes only. The Jews 
 themselves consent to this statement, and allow 
 that the descendants of Reuben, Simeon, Zebu- 
 lum, Issacliar, Dan, Gad, Asher, Naphtali, 
 Joseph and Benjamin, are lost, but not extinct. 
 They are in the world, for God has not cast 
 away His people forever. If the two tribes 
 give us nine millions, how many should we ex- 
 pect the ten tribes to furnish ? Most certainly 
 not less than forty-five millions. To the ten 
 tribes the special promises of fruitfulness were 
 given. To the ten tribes belong a greater por- 
 tion of prophecy ; and in the history of the 
 world more is allotted to Israel than to Judah. 
 Indeed, the world’s history pivots on the ten 
 lost tribes. 
 
 I believe you know the God-revealed distinc- 
 tion between the words Israel and Judah. You 
 know that they have a distinct history. Their 
 place and work, promises and blessings, chas- 
 tisements and rebukes, are as distinct and differ- 
 ent as silver and gold. 
 
 The spiritual heirs of Abraham are all who 
 are embraced in the saving and atoning cove- 
 nant of grace in Christ. I do not say all who 
 believe, for there will be more in heaven with- 
 
ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 29 
 
 out faith than those with ; namely, all those 
 who have died before the years of responsibility, 
 with many of the pagan world who, never having 
 heard of a Saviour, have therefore never denied 
 him. In a spiritual sense, they are children. I 
 believe in this matter with Paul, who says, when 
 writing to the Romans, second chapter : “There 
 is no respect of persons with God ; for as many 
 as have sinned without law shall also perish 
 without law, and as many as have sinned in 
 the law shall be judged by the law. For when 
 the Gentiles, which have not the law, do by 
 nature the things contained in the law, these, 
 having not the law, are a law unto themselves ; 
 which show the work of the law written in their 
 hearts, their conscience also bearing witness, and 
 their thoughts the meanwhile accusing, or else 
 excusing one another.” Thus, under the law 
 which governs the pagan, I presume many will 
 be saved and many lost, just as under the law 
 of the gospel. In Abraham all nations were to 
 be blessed, spiritually. In this sense Abraham’ s 
 seed embraces persons of every age, clime and 
 race. 
 
 But who are the seed of Abraham according 
 to the flesh ? W e answer the descendants of 
 the twelve tribes. Now to the natural seed the 
 Bible assigns a distinct work and place. This 
 natural seed are divided in the Bible, the word 
 Israel standing generally for the ten tribes, and 
 Judah for two tribes. These divisions have 
 
30 ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 separate paths appointed them to walk in 
 through the centuries. ‘ ‘All the house of Israel 
 wholly,” “ the whole house of Israel,” “all the 
 house of Israel,” have a special work. The ten 
 tribes are especially called in the scriptures the 
 seed of Abraham. Sometimes “My chosen,” 
 again “ Mine inheritance,” and “My servant.” 
 God, in referring to them in their scattered state, 
 and of His gathering them together, says, Is. 
 xli. 8: “But thon, Israel, art My servant, 
 
 Jacob, whom I have chosen ; the seed of Abra- 
 ham My friend — thou whom I have taken from 
 the ends of the earth, and called thee from the 
 chief men thereof, and said unto thee, Thou art 
 My servant; I have chosen thee and not cast thee 
 away.” The ten tribes are sometimes desig- 
 nated by the word Jacob. If we once get a clear 
 idea who the seed are, then we can search among 
 the people of the earth to find them, because in 
 the latter day they were to be so different from 
 other people, and distinctly marked, we will 
 have no great difficulty in finding them. Of the 
 special marks, one was they were to possess the 
 gates of their enemies. The multitudinous seed 
 and other characteristics we will pass by for the 
 present. 
 
 This seed were to possess the gates of their 
 enemies ; of this we are assured by the oath of 
 God. The word gate here, you will admit, is used 
 in a generic sense. It means a place of prominence, 
 a position of strength, a strategetic point, as the 
 
ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 31 
 
 entrance into a city ; remembering that in olden 
 times the cities were walled around, the gate 
 was an important point of defense ; or, as the 
 narrow entrance into a bay, like the entrance 
 into New York bay or port, the Narrows we call 
 them. Here our cities, New York and Brook- 
 lyn, could best and first be defended. Again, a 
 gate in the general vernacular means any strong- 
 hold : a tower, an island, a mountain pass. 
 
 Now, of this seed it is plainly stated that they 
 shall possess the gates of their enemies. 
 
 The text would be very finely illustrated if 
 we supposed that Mexico held Governor s island, 
 in the middle of our bay, and defiantly dictated 
 to us doctrines of trade, politics and religion. 
 As arrogant and as impudent as this would 
 seem, yet such is the case with this seed of 
 Abraham and other nations. Believing that 
 the Saxon race are the ten lost tribes, it then fol- 
 lows that the English nation is the chief repre- 
 sentative of these tribes, and that they should be 
 in possession of the gates of their enemies. Are 
 they ? We answer, yes. And every year confirms 
 and makes more clear the answer. This you say 
 is a theory. Grant it. You know that in science 
 a theory is formed and then applied. If you 
 form a theory about the tides or formation of 
 the planets, or this world, your theory with 
 others is applied to known facts to see if it will 
 fit them, to see if it will account for them, and 
 to see if it is in harmony with the same. Now 
 
1SKAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 science accepts that theory which applies best, 
 that which accounts for facts the most reason- 
 able, and harmonizes the most naturally. Such 
 theory is then the science of the day, and will 
 be so accepted and so taught until it is sup- 
 planted by a better. Try then the theory I have 
 advanced by these rules. 
 
 Take the Guernsey islands in the English 
 channel, between England and France, nearer 
 to the French shore than England ; the inhabi- 
 tants, being a majority of them French, speak- 
 ing French. Yet when France was England’s 
 greatest and most dangerous enemy, England 
 held then, as now, the gates of her enemies. 
 Properly speaking, and adjudged by any human 
 rule, they belong to France — as naturally as the 
 island of Heligoland, at the mouth of the Elbe, 
 belongs to Germany. Gibraltar, Malta, Cyprus, 
 Suez canal, island of Perim in the straits of 
 Babelmandeb in the Red sea, and Socotra in the 
 same sea ; also Aden in the Red sea, covering 
 Arabia ; Peshawur, the very entrance of or from 
 India into Afghanistan. In and around the 
 vast empire of India you have Bombay, Cal- 
 cutta, Madras, with many similar strongholds ; 
 Rangoon, on the Irawady river, commanding 
 and ever menacing Burmah. The vast empire 
 of China is carefully guarded and held in check 
 by such gates as Singapore, Malacca, Penang, 
 Hong Kong and Cowloon. Sarawak in Borneo, 
 and Labuan, off the coasts, are such gates. 
 
ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 33 _ 
 
 Africa is being gradually gobbled up ; her 
 strongholds and vast areas of country are fall- 
 ing into the hands of England ; the coasts are 
 fast coming under British rule. This past year 
 England has come into possession of three gates, 
 namely, the island of Socotra in the Red sea, 
 the island of Cyprus in the Mediterranean, and 
 the Sublime Porte, the lofty gateway, Constan- 
 tinople. And recent telegrams say that Eng- 
 land is negotiating with Portugal for Delogoa 
 bay, in south-eastern Africa ; price, three million 
 dollars. But this people are not satisfied with 
 all these gates. So now they have pretended to 
 be insulted by Shere Ali, the Emir of Cabul, 
 that they can begin negotiations of plunder and 
 conquest. They want — and they will get what 
 they want in a very short time, thank heaven, 
 not what they deserve ! — they want the famous 
 Ivhyber pass. This pass is a narrow road be- 
 tween mountain rocks that rise over two thou- 
 sand feet at the lowest point. It is some twenty- 
 eight miles long, while for twenty-two miles 
 the average width is only 150 feet. The eastern 
 end the English already hold, called the Pesha- 
 wur pass. 
 
 Afghanistan is a country in Asia, It is about 
 the size of England, 460 miles from north to 
 south, and 430 from east to west. On the north 
 it is bounded by Turkestan, east by India, south 
 by Beloochistan, and west by Persia. The popu- 
 lation numbers about 7,000,000. They are as 
 
34 
 
 ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 wild as the country is broken and irregular. 
 They are chiefly agriculturists. The country is 
 rich in minerals and timber. In time past they 
 have seldon been at peace ; being very generally 
 at war among themselves. Afghan is a Persian 
 word, and means that which is wrapped around 
 — no doubt having reference to the mountain 
 chain that hems in the whole land. The people 
 themselves, however, name their country Vila- 
 yet, which means the land of our ancestors. 
 They claim that in their country lived Adam 
 and his children, also Noali and his. They say 
 they had in their possession once the ark of the 
 covenant, but they have lost it. While it was 
 with them, if they took it into battle victory 
 was sure to be theirs. At the present time they 
 have Noah’ s ark. It is embedded in the ground, 
 with a portion protruding out, which pilgrims 
 to the top of Dera Ismael Khan — that is, the 
 sacred mountain of Israel — are permitted to see 
 and touch. Many have supposed the Afghans 
 to be the ten lost tribes. It has been the folly 
 of many of the learned, in time past, to hunt 
 for, and actually expect to find, the chosen of 
 God in some out-of-the-way place ; to find them 
 few, poor and deluded — the poorer, the fewer, 
 and the more wretched, the better. Hence, the 
 wild Indians of the continent, the bushmen 
 of Africa, the aborigines of Australia, the Lap- 
 landers of the north, and many such have been 
 chosen of men — though not of God. 
 
ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 35 
 
 The Afghan country, no doubt, once had in- 
 tercourse with Palestine. During Solomon’s 
 reign many Jews left the land as merchants. 
 Solomon built store-cities in Hamath, Tadmor 
 in the wilderness, and many others. These 
 store-cities were on the great highway which he 
 made through the desert, so as to bring the 
 trade of Dedan and Sheba to Jerusalem. That 
 Hebrew names are given to the mountains, places, 
 rivers and persons, no one can deny ; but such 
 does not prove them to be the lost tribes — it 
 shows away back Jewish influence and inter- 
 course. They do not speak the Hebrew, but 
 two languages called the Pukhtu and Pushtu. 
 In either language there are few, if any, traces 
 of the Hebrew. No doubt the lost tribes, after 
 being scattered into Central Asia, when taken 
 captive about 725 B.C., wandered, some of them, 
 into Afghan, and probably for a time settled 
 there, and gave names to the country. The 
 Afghans themselves went into the country from 
 India, and as the tribes moved westward they 
 left the Afghans in possession. 
 
 The Afghan country comes now into great 
 importance because it is on the highway of the 
 march of Israelitish civilization and progress. 
 England wants it ; and I predict she will get it. 
 Russia wants it, and at present seems to have 
 the upper hand ; but Russia or England, or the 
 world, can avail nothing against the purposes 
 of Jehovah. The gates are promised to Israel, 
 
36 
 
 ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 therefore she will get them. The English have 
 already an army of 35,000 men in the Peshawur 
 valley, under command of General Sir Frederick 
 Paul Haines. Russia is gathering a force, and 
 ere long the two countries will be brought face 
 to face. The end of the whole muddle will be 
 that England will take charge of Afghan. Thirty- 
 three years ago the crownless king, Disraeli, 
 wrote his novel called “Tancred.” In this 
 novel he makes the queen of England the em- 
 press of India, and one of her favorite officers 
 is made Earl Beaconsfield ; so far fancy has be- 
 come fact. But in that same novel the future 
 of the present strife has been set forth. It has 
 been very finely put by the London Spectator : 
 “There is a story going about, founded, we 
 believe, on good authority, that when some one 
 quoted ‘Tancred,’ two or three months ago, in 
 Lord Beaconsfield’ s presence, the prime minister 
 remarked : ‘Ah ! I perceive you have been read- 
 ing “Tancred.” That is a work to which I re- 
 fer more and more every year — not for amuse- 
 ment, but for instruction.’ And if any one will 
 take the trouble just now to refresh his memory 
 of ‘Tancred,’ he will see how much Lord Bea- 
 consfield has borrowed from it in relation to the 
 policy of the day. Turn, for instance, to this 
 passage : ‘ If I were an Arab in race as well as 
 in religion,’ said Tancred, ‘ I would not pass my 
 life in schemes to govern mere mountain tribes.’ 
 ‘I’ll tell you,’ said the Emir, springing from his 
 
ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 37 
 
 divan, and flinging the tube of his nargileh to 
 the other end of the tent, 4 the game is in our 
 hands, if we have energy. There is a combina- 
 tion which would entirely change the whole 
 face of the world and bring back empire to the 
 East. Though you are not the brother to the 
 queen of the English, you are, nevertheless, a 
 great English prince, and the queen will listen 
 to what you say, especially if you talk to her as 
 you talk to me, and say such fine things in 
 such a beautiful voice. Nobody ever opened 
 my mind like you. You will magnetize the 
 queen as you have magnetized me. Go back to 
 England and arrange this. You see, gloss over 
 as they may, one thing is clear, it is finished 
 with England. * * * * Let the queen of 
 
 the English collect a great fleet, let her stow 
 away all her treasure, bullion, gold plate and 
 precious arms ; be accompanied by all her court 
 and chief people, and transfer the seat of her 
 empire from London to Delhi. There she will 
 find an immense empire ready-made, a first-rate 
 army and a large revenue. In the meantime I 
 will arrange with Mehemet Ali. He shall have 
 Bagdad and Mesopotamia, and pour the Bedouin 
 cavalry into Persia. I will take care of Syria 
 and Asia Minor. The only way to manage the 
 Afghans is by Persia and by the Arabs. We 
 will acknowledge the empress of India as our 
 suzerain, and secure for her the Levantine coast. 
 If she like, she shall have Alexandria, as she 
 
38 
 
 ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 now lias Malta. It could be arranged. IT our 
 
 queen is young. She has an avenir. Aberdeen 
 and Sir Robert Peel will never give her this ad- 
 vice ; their habits are formed. They are too old, 
 two ruses. But you see ! the greatest empire 
 that ever existed ; besides which she gets rid of 
 the embarrassment of her chambers ! and quite 
 practicable ! For the only difficult part, the 
 conquest of India, which baffled Alexander, is 
 all done.’ Who can avoid seeing that Lord 
 Beaconsfield has been quite recently referring to 
 this passage — ‘not,’ as he said, ‘for amusement, 
 but for instruction ? ’ These are all the ideas of 
 his recent policy in germ — especially the treat- 
 ment of the British empire as having its true 
 center of gravity in the far East — the use of the 
 Indian army for conquest to be made in Western 
 Asia — the acquisition of the Levantine coast for 
 Gfreat Britian — the active alliance between the 
 British power and the Mohammedan power — - 
 and last, not least, the getting rid, to a great 
 extent at least, by the help of Indian leverage, 
 of ‘ the embarrassment of the chambers.’ For 
 the last eight months, at least, English policy 
 has evidently been borrowed from ‘Tancred.’ 
 The monarch, for anything we know, has been 
 ‘magnetized.’ The cabinet assuredly have. 
 Lord Derby and Lord Carnarvon have been 
 treated much as the Emir in ‘ Tancred ’ would 
 have treated ‘Aberdeen and Sir Robert Peel ’ — 
 thrown aside as two ‘ruses.’ ” 
 
ISRAEL ANI) THE GATES. 39 
 
 England lias indeed adopted an Oriental 
 policy, and forward slie must go to execute 
 Jehovah’s purpose. Russia is preparing on a 
 gigantic scale. In Prussia the most flourishing 
 branch of trade among the Germans at present 
 is the manufacturing of arms for Russia. Though 
 the late war be over, still Russia is buying ships, 
 and fitting them out in this country. She feels 
 bitterly her defeat through English diplomacy : 
 England taking Cyprus, assuming protection 
 over Asiatic-Turkey, and making Russia yield 
 back to Turkey 30,700 geographical miles which 
 was contained in the original treaty of San 
 Stefano. The following from the government 
 organ of Russia will give you some idea of her 
 chagrin : 
 
 The St. Petersburg Golos says that : the treaty 
 of Berlin has produced an almost crushing im- 
 pression on the Russian public. “It is felt 
 that Russia has not attained her object ; that 
 she has been deceived by her friends, and that 
 she has foolishly helped her enemies with her 
 victories. * * * What is the reason of our 
 
 failure % One-half per cent, of our population 
 have perished in the war, hundreds of millions 
 have been expended, and yet the Eastern ques- 
 tion is not solved and the treaty of Berlin is 
 merely a truce. The last war has clearly shown 
 all our national peculiarities as well as our moral 
 and material strength, * * * All the mili- 
 
 tary requirements which depended on the inbred 
 
4o 
 
 ISRAEL AND THE GATES. 
 
 qualities of the Russian soldier were brilliantly 
 carried out ; but where knowledge and prepar- 
 ation were demanded we were not equal to the 
 task. It was probably for this reason that we 
 felt so much hurt on reading of the boldness of 
 Lord Beaconsfield, who doubtless reckoned on 
 the superior culture of Englishmen to that of 
 Russians. All classes of Russian society are re- 
 sponsible for this. We do not estimate culture 
 and knowledge at their true value. Most of us 
 say that mental work does not bring money, 
 and that culture is a means of corruption. * * 
 
 In western Europe, on the other hand, people 
 have arrived by hard experience at the convic- 
 tion that intelligence, capacity, culture and 
 energy, bring men to the front, and give them 
 peace at home and power abroad. It is the 
 knowledge of how to make the best possible use 
 of their energy and abilities that has enabled 
 the English to derive success from our victories 
 and sacrifices. May this be a lesson to us.” 
 
 But enough ; one knows the end e’re they 
 begin, for the word of God is true. We do not 
 argue that the English are so much smarter 
 than other people, no, but we account for their 
 success because they are the executive nation of 
 Divine Providence. It falls to the lot of those 
 who do not believe this theory to account for 
 their success without allowing them to be 
 smarter. 
 
ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 Discourse , 3. 
 
 PROMISES TO ISRAEL — MATERIAL NATURE — LO- 
 CATION OF THE TRIBES IN CHRIST’S DAY — 
 GOD’S PROVIDENCE — BRITISH AND AMERICAN 
 RULE — “LIFE FROM THE DEAD” — TEACHING 
 THE NATIONS PEACEFUL ARBITRATION — ENG- 
 LAND AND RUSSIA — AFGHANISTAN FALLS TO 
 ANGLO-ISRAEL — GOD’S POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY 
 — ANGLO-SAXON EVANGELIZATION — RUSSIA 
 OPPOSING IT — BRITISH AND RUSSIAN OUTPOSTS 
 IN CONTACT — WAIL OF JUDAH— EARTH’S GIR- 
 DLE. 
 
 Text-Isaiah liv. 2, 3* 
 
 “ Enlarge the place of thy tent , and let them stretch forth the cur- 
 tains of thine habitations ; spare not , lengthen thy cords, and 
 strengthen thy stakes ; for thou shalt break forth on the right 
 hand and on the left; and thy seed shall inherit the Gentiles , 
 and make the desolate cities to be inhabited 
 
 S N the writings of the prophets the feminine 
 gender is often used when speaking of the 
 house of Israel, and the masculine when denoting 
 the house of J udah. Quite frequently Israel is 
 spoken of as a divorced woman, as being cast 
 off, and as being barren. Judah remaining faith- 
 
42 
 
 ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 fill to the throne of David and the temple ser- 
 vice, and abiding in the land much longer than 
 Israel, is presented as one married. So you 
 will understand Jeremiah iii. 8, when he says: 
 “And I saw, when for all the causes whereby 
 backsliding-Israel committed adultery I had put 
 her away, and given her a bill of divorce.” 
 Again, Isaiah 1.1: “ Thus saith the Lord, where 
 is the bill of your mother’s divorcement whom 
 I have put away.” Yet, though Israel was di- 
 vorced, forsaken, cast off and desolate, she was 
 to have more children than married Judah. So 
 the verse preceding the text says : “ Sing, Oh 
 
 barren, thou that didst not bear ; break forth 
 into singing, and cry aloud thou that didst not 
 travail with child ; for more are the children of 
 the desolate than the children of the married 
 wife, saith the Lord.” Then come the words of 
 the text bidding her enlarge the place of her 
 tent, or dwelling-place, to stretch forth her 
 curtains, so as to cover over the new-gotten 
 habitations. To spare not, that is, to be not 
 tardy, or slow, in lengthening out her cords, 
 that is her influence, and strengthen her stakes, 
 that is her authority ; but to break forth on 
 every hand where there is an opening, and in- 
 herit the seed of the Gentiles, and make the 
 languishing and poverty-stricken cities of the 
 nations to be inhabited ; in this conquest to go 
 on and fear not. 
 
 These exhortations are given, and promises are 
 
ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 43 
 
 made to Israel after she had left Palestine. No 
 one can say truthfully that they have yet been 
 fulfilled in no degree or sense, unless they find 
 such fulfillment in the conquests of the Saxon 
 race. These predictions cannot apply to the 
 Jews, for they are few, nationless, and without 
 a government. Touching the past history of 
 both Judah and Israel in Palestine, we shall 
 find it to be barren of victories, territory, acqui- 
 sition and number, in comparison to other na- 
 tions. They have never occupied the land given 
 to Abraham in fullness. In Solomon’s time 
 they bare rule only over a part of it. The Gen- 
 tiles and heathens have occupied it more and 
 longer than the sons of Abraham. But what 
 failed to be accomplished in the past, is held 
 grandly in reserve for this day, the next few 
 years. God will remember His promise to 
 Abraham, Isaac, Jacob and David. He will 
 remember it to fulfill it, in spite of hell or earth. 
 
 We have been blind and guilty in the past, 
 unconscious of our origin, and as a natural con- 
 sequence, ignorant of our place and special 
 work. In interpreting the word of God we 
 have been lavish in spiritualizing, and greedy in 
 materializing, overlooking the fact that nine- 
 tenths of the Old Testament is a material his- 
 tory about one people, and that through them 
 God’ s special providence was to flow to all other 
 nations ; and the New Testament plants the life 
 and prosperity of the Gentile world upon the 
 
44 ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 course and progress of Israel. God said to 
 Abraham ‘ ‘ In thee shall all the families of the 
 earth be blessed,” and more, “ and in thy seed 
 shall all the nations of the earth be blessed.” Is- 
 rael being scattered and cast off became a bless- 
 ing to the world. They gave to the surround- 
 ing nations the only true idea of God, for in 
 their lowest condition and idolatry they pre- 
 served the name and knowledge of Jehovah, 
 and Christ sent His disciples after them through 
 one of their own tribe, namely, Benjamin, tell- 
 ing them not to go into the way of the Gentiles, 
 nor into the cities of the Samaritans, “but go 
 rather to the lost sheep of the house of Israel.” 
 To these sheep Christ declares he was sent. 
 Where were these sheep ? They were scattered 
 about in Central Asia, in scriptural language in 
 Cappadocia, Galatia, Pamphylia, Lydia, Bithy- 
 nia, and round about Illyricum. From these 
 very regions came the Saxons ; from here they 
 spread abroad north and west, being the most 
 Christian of any people on the face of the earth 
 then, as well as now. Their reception of the 
 gospel gave them power over the surrounding 
 nations, to whom they were, as it had been fore- 
 told, witnesses for Jesus and providence in a 
 very special manner. What then, we say with 
 Paul, will be the blessing of Israel — recognized 
 and fully restored to God’ s favor ? If so much 
 good was carried and bestowed upon the Gen- 
 tile nations because Israel was scattered, how 
 
ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 45 
 
 much, and what are the blessings in store for 
 those nations when Israel and Judah be restored ? 
 Paul compares it to a resurrection — like as when 
 the barrenness and desolation of a winter is sup- 
 planted by the fruits aud beauties of summer. 
 “If the casting away of them be the reconciling 
 of the world, what shall the receiving of them 
 be, but life from the dead.” — Roms. xi. 15. 
 
 It is reasonable to suppose that this world is 
 subject to the providence of God. Such a sup- 
 position is grandly sustained by the laws and 
 operations of nature without, and the experience 
 and intuitions of the mind within ; and I believe 
 this providence to be all-comprehensive, bound- 
 ing, and cognizing all things past, present and 
 future, both small and great ; claiming the ages 
 for its measure, the universe for the field of its 
 operations, and the Infinite as the source of 
 power. ‘ ‘ The Lord J ehovah reigns, let the earth 
 rejoice.” Let me persuade you to thoroughly 
 believe in the precision, the intimacy and the 
 completeness of this providence. This doctrine 
 we need to fully learn and accept. “In the be- 
 ginning God created the heavens and the earth,” 
 and it is He ‘ 1 who hath measured the waters in 
 the hollow of His hand, and meted out heaven 
 with a span, and comprehended the dust of the 
 earth in a measure, and weighed the mountains 
 in scales, and the hills in a balance.” Aye, and 
 more, yes closer still does this providence ap- 
 proach us in our affairs. “By Him kings reign 
 
46 
 
 ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 and princes decree judgment. He bringetli the 
 princes to nothing ; He maketh the judges of 
 the earth as vanity.” Even closer yet, for with- 
 out His permisssion a sparrow cannot fall to the 
 ground ; and so intimate is He with us, that He 
 knoweth the number of the hairs of the head. 
 Now all this kind of Bible instruction is intended 
 to teach the nearness of God to us, and His in- 
 terest and intimacy with nations and nature. 
 Let us not think for a moment that nations can 
 rush to war and be outside of this circle of pro- 
 vidence. Let us study to know God’s mind, 
 His plans and purposes with the nations ; for 
 rest satisfied that His plan will finally be ac- 
 cepted by men and nations, and His purposes 
 will prevail. Kings may plan, diplomatists may 
 diplomatize, scientists may analyze, theologians 
 may teach and preach their isms, and politi- 
 cians may make platforms and construct rings, 
 yet none, nor all combined, can stay the hand 
 of God. “He doeth according to His will in 
 the armies of heaven and among the inhabitants 
 of the earth.” He can initiate, permit, modify 
 and destroy. Once we truly recognize the sove- 
 reignity of God over us, conceit will lie dead at 
 the feet of humility. 
 
 The church at large has but a slender hold 
 upon this great doctrine. They look upon the 
 great movement of wars and strife, rising and 
 falling of nations, as looks the country stranger 
 upon a railway engine the first time, the whirl- 
 
ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 47 
 
 ing wheels, the steam and smoke and burnished 
 boiler rivet his attention so completely, that he 
 sees not the driver in his cab. So men are dazed 
 with the show of pomp of courts and councils, 
 with the harangues of legislators and march of 
 regiments, that they discern not the master hand 
 behind that directs all. “ Verily thou art a God 
 that hidest Thyself.” No, no, friends ; English 
 bravery, nor American ingenuity will not ac- 
 count for all that England has done on the line 
 of victories, and the marvelous and rapid growth 
 of these United States. As God said long ago 
 through Moses, so He could say to-day ; for 
 heavenly counsel was given to the children of 
 Israel on entering the promised land, with a de- 
 sign of suppressing their pride and enabling 
 them to form a correct idea of their success in 
 driving the strong and greater nations of Canaan- 
 ites and Philistines. “Speak not thou in thine 
 heart, after that the Lord thy God hath cast 
 them out from before thee, saying : For my 
 righteousness the Lord hath brought me in to 
 possess this land ; but for the wickedness of 
 these nations the Lord doth drive them out from 
 before thee. Not for thy righteousness, or the 
 uprightness of thine heart, dost thou go to pos- 
 sess the land, but for the wickedness of those 
 nations the Lord thy God doth drive them out 
 from before thee, that He may perform the word 
 which the Lord sware unto thy fathers, Abra- 
 ham, Isaac and Jacob. Understand, therefore, 
 
48 
 
 ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 that the Lord thy God givetli thee not this good 
 land to possess it for thy righteousness, for thou 
 art a stiifed-necked people.” — Deut. ix. 4. 
 
 By the same rule and for the very same reason 
 that Israel conquered Palestine, does England 
 go on from conquest to conquest. And because 
 God remembered to perform his promises made 
 to the patriarchs upon their seed, America was 
 opened for the Puritans, who are without doubt 
 the descendants and representatives of Manas- 
 seh, of whom God said He should be a people, 
 a great people. 
 
 The rule of England and America over other 
 people, is to be as life from the dead. That is, 
 whatever country England conquers and rules, 
 it is better for the people, and the country, and 
 the world. They give to the people a liberty 
 that they would not have given to themselves ; 
 they develop the resources of the country as 
 never before, and by trade and commerce bless 
 the people and cause them be a blessing unto 
 others. And better still, they make known to 
 the conquered ones, in due time, the riches of 
 faith in Christ. So we have no hesitation in 
 saying a thing patent to every unprejudiced ob- 
 server, that the aborignes of the conquered colo- 
 nies of Great Britain are treated better by their 
 conquerers than they ever treated themselves. 
 The Africans, in the conquered colonies of Af- 
 rica, are better off under British rule than those 
 colonies or portions unconquered are. The 
 
ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 49 
 
 hosts of India enjoy more, fare better in every 
 grace and virtue in all that goes to adorn 
 and develop mankind, under the British gov- 
 ernment and protection than they ever did or 
 would under self-government So the French, 
 Germans, Italians, Russians, Spaniards and the 
 numerous progeny of emigrants to this country, 
 fare better in every way with Manasseli, than 
 they did in their own lands. Of course, both 
 in England’ s rule and America’ s, there are many 
 defects ; but taking all in all, the good will out- 
 weigh the bad ; and more so as the years roll on. 
 
 True, an arbitrary purpose and an individu- 
 alism is seen on the surface, yet under it all 
 there is the hand of God. The farmer is free as 
 to what he sows, but the Divine, without inter- 
 fering with his freedom, regulates the harvest 
 to plenty or famine. The Saxon people, Eng- 
 land and America, stand in a new light to the 
 world by the teachings of the Bible. Being Is- 
 rael or the ten lost tribes, they become at once 
 the chosen agents of God for the glorious pur- 
 pose of evangelizing the whole world, and finally, 
 by reducing the whole earth to the plane of uni- 
 versal liberty and peace. 
 
 It was necessary that these two nations should 
 first be taught the art of mediation, for the ends 
 of peace ; that they should learn and show to 
 the world that national disputes and grievances 
 can be settled without an appeal to the sword. 
 Hence we have, and what is much better, the 
 
50 
 
 ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 world lias, Geneva and Alabama and the fish 
 bounty treaty of Canada and the United States. 
 Not all the press did on either side, nor all the 
 carping and blustering of individuals, could 
 prevent the happy consummation of both these 
 treaties. To God be praise, for they are pro- 
 phetic harbingers of a better day coming. 
 
 No hand nor power, nor combination of 
 powers, can stop the onward march of Israel to 
 her God-ordained goal. Her future is to spread 
 on the right hand and on the left. Island after 
 island, colony after colony, will fall into her 
 hand for mutual benefit. Russia may contest 
 this march, and will, for she is as much the ap- 
 pointed agent of contest from heaven as England 
 is to advance. In a few years she will try to 
 take the place of England among the nations, as 
 she has just done in Afghan. Russia promised, 
 no doubt, Shere Ali, that they would and could 
 protect him against England, but the bargain 
 was outside of the aims of Providence, hence it 
 could not be sustained. It is ordained of heaven 
 that Afghan fall into the hands of England, if 
 England be Israel. 
 
 Against this fate-like division of the world 
 Russia is going to contend and fight whenever 
 she gets a chance. It would pay Russia and 
 many other countries to read that “ When 
 the Most High divided to the nations their in- 
 heritance, when He separated the sons of Adam, 
 He set the hounds of the people according to the 
 
ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 51 
 
 children of Israel.'’’’ — Duet, xxxii. 8. These 
 bounds God will maintain wlierever they run ; 
 whatever country they cut in two, no matter, 
 the earth must finally conform to this divine 
 geography. This purpose is strongly set forth 
 by Isaiah xliv. 7, ‘ ‘ And who, as I, shall call, 
 and shall declare it, and set it in order for Me, 
 since I appointed the ancient people ? and the 
 things that are coming and shall come A This 
 same sturdy fact is taught by Paul when speak- 
 ing to the Athenians, telling them that God 
 “hath made of one blood all nations of men to 
 dwell on the face of the earth, and hath deter- 
 mined the times before appointed, and the 
 bounds of their habitations .” National desti- 
 nies are not so much things of chance, or prizes 
 for the sword as many think. God promised to 
 David when both Israel and Judah were pros- 
 perously settled in Palestine under David’s 
 reign, that He would appoint a place for His 
 people Israel, and plant them there, and they 
 should not be moved, neither should the wicked 
 afflict them as aforetime. — 2d Sam. vii. 10. This 
 promise God has kept. He has given them the 
 British isles, where none can afflict them, as they 
 were wont to do when Israel was scattered in 
 Asia and Europe. God has found Manasseli a 
 home in this land of blessings and rich acres. 
 
 England, by a necessity, was forced to find 
 new countries to provide for her multiplying 
 population. Then she is forced to enter other 
 
52 
 
 ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 nations as a missionary. She, with Manasseh, 
 is chiefly responsible for the evangelization of 
 the world, and of course they are at work all 
 over the world, for England and the United 
 States send out more missionaries than all the 
 world beside. Russia needs no land for colo- 
 nization, for now her inhabitants number only 
 thirty-four to the square mile, while England 
 numbers 389. If we take in all the territory 
 under Russia and England, even then England 
 has more to the square mile than Russia. Russia 
 comprises about 8,000,000 square miles, and 
 England, with her late additions, leaving out 
 the United States, numbers about 9,000,000. 
 Joining Ephraim and Manasseh together, they 
 own one-fourth of the whole world, namely, 
 about 13,000,000 square miles ; the whole earth 
 numbers 51,340,800 square miles. Besides, 
 Russia is not a missionary country. She neither 
 sends any nor accepts any, being at present the 
 only nation closed to missionary operation and 
 toleration. The past few years Russia has 
 gained rapidly in territorial power. With the 
 conquest of Bokhara and portions of Turkistan, 
 or Independent Tartary, she has added some 
 800,000 square miles. 
 
 At the beginning of the last century the Rus- 
 sian advance forts were 2,500 miles distant from 
 those of England. At the close of the century 
 the distance was 2,000. Then in 1810 it was re- 
 duced to 1,000. And since 1855 it has been re- 
 
ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 53 
 
 duced to 400. And now, of course, they want 
 it reduced to nothing by getting control of 
 Afghan. 
 
 How wonderfully clear are the fulfilling events 
 of the prophecy. This king of the north is to 
 become a strong king, who, when Israel and 
 Judah are settled in Palestine, will have spirit 
 and power to attack them. So He is ripening, 
 growing and gathering power ready. Russia 
 now comprises nine crowns, eight of which are 
 crowns of conquest. Russia’ s one grand desire 
 is to possess Palestine, especially Jerusalem. 
 .The Crimean war was waged for rights and ex- 
 tended privileges in this holy city. To-day 
 Russian pilgrims swarm thither by the thou- 
 sands every year. A few years ago she built 
 outside of the Jaffa gate what she called an 
 hospice, which was designed to be nothing more 
 nor less than a fort. It is in a position com- 
 manding the whole city, and is a place of great 
 strength. Often she has tried to possess the city 
 and land. By-and-bv she will be permitted by 
 Providence to pour her troops into this “Land 
 of unwalled villages,” and when having nearly 
 achieved the ambitious plan of ages, and nearly 
 realized her one great national idea, she will 
 perish, to rise no more, “ on the mountains of 
 Israel. ’’ Her history is set forth by Ezekiel 
 xxxviii. and xxxix. chapters. 
 
 Palestine and Jerusalem have borne undeni- 
 able evidence for prophecy and Providence. The 
 
54 Israel and territory. 
 
 whole land and the book have been wonderfully 
 agreed during the past eighteen centnries. How 
 significant and telling the wailings and lamenta- 
 tions of the devout Jews, who crowd under the 
 walls of the mosque of Omar, the site of the 
 ancient temple. Here, each returning Sabbath, 
 groups of Jews may be heard dolefully crying : 
 “■AU bene, Alt bene; bene bethka ; bekarob, 
 bimheira, bimheira; beyamenu , bekarob, ’ ’ 
 which, being interpreted, means, “Lord build, 
 Lord build ; build Thy house speedily, in haste, 
 in haste ; even in our day build Thy house 
 speedily.” Yes, mourning brethren of Judah,- 
 the time is coming when the house shall be 
 built and the voice of wailing no more heard in 
 the streets. 
 
 Can any student or inquirer after the truth 
 fail to see that in our day a prophecy is being 
 fulfilled ? Can any one shut their eyes to the 
 wonderful fact that Israel is breaking forth on 
 the left and on the right ? Cod has long ago 
 said that Israel were the people of His inheri- 
 tance, and that Jacob was the lot of His inheri- 
 tance, or His girdle, or cord, as the word lot 
 means. Then, if you turn your attention to 
 Great Britain and colonies, including Manasseh, 
 you will see this girdle or measuring line around 
 the earth. Let me aid you by pointing the same 
 out for you. Look at the eastern hemisphere 
 circle, inclosing the Gentile nations. Begin with 
 Great Britain ; pass on to the channel islands, 
 
ISRAEL AND TERRITORY. 
 
 m 
 
 Gibraltar, Malta, Cyprus, West Coast African 
 colonies, St. Helena, Cape colonies, Mauritius, 
 Seychelles, Perim, Aden, Ceylon, India, Bur- 
 mah, Straits settlements, Labuan, Australian 
 colonies, Hong Kong, and the dominion of Can- 
 ada. In the western hemisphere commence the 
 circle with Canada and United States, Fiji 
 islands, New Zealand, Falkland islands, British 
 Guiana, British Honduras, West India islands 
 and Newfoundland. Ho we not plainly see 
 that Israel is possessing “the isles of the sea,” 
 “coasts of the earth,” “waste and desolate 
 places?” These things are not hid in a corner ; 
 they proclaim the intentions of God, an Over- 
 ruling Providence ; and who and where the lost 
 ti’ibes are. A miracle and prophecy are fulfill- 
 ing before our eyes. 
 
ISPAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 Discourse, 4. 
 
 PROPHETIC LATTER DAYS — OUR BEARINGS IN 
 THE AGES — UNWISE IMPATIENCE — ISRAEL TO 
 BE ALWAYS A NATION — HER EMPIRE — HIS- 
 TORIC CAREER OF AND FUTURE OF ENGLAND, 
 AMERICA AND JUDAH — RELATIVE INCREASE 
 OF POPULATION — THE INFIDEL SAXON— JEW- 
 . ISH, BRITISH AND AMERICAN INTERESTS ONE 
 — A FULL END OF ALL NATIONS BUT ISRAEL 
 — FAMINE HENCEFORTH ONLY FOR THE IIEA 
 THEN — ARBITRATION TO BE ENFORCED BY" 
 ISRAEL — AMERICAN ABSORPTION — STARTLING 
 FIGURES OF FUTURE POPULATION — THE BAL- 
 ANCE OF POWER. 
 
 Yet the number of the children of Israel shall be as the sand 
 of the sea, which cannot be measured or 7iumbered ; and it 
 shall come to pass that in the place where it was said unto 
 them. Ye are not my people, there it shall be said unto them. 
 Ye are the sons of the living God.” 
 
 PERIOD of time is frequently referred to 
 
 in the scriptures as being the “latter 
 
 days.” It is, therefore, very important for the 
 prophetic student, and the church of Christ at 
 large, that the time of days spoken of should be 
 
 Text-Hosea i* 10, 
 
ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 57 
 
 known. For connected with these days are a 
 number of prophecies waiting fulfillment, and 
 they are of such a nature that their fulfillment 
 may easily be discerned. In breadth and scope 
 they cover much territory and include many 
 people. They cannot be hid in a corner, for the 
 parts are so numerous and the interests so great. 
 The fulfillment of these prophecies will make a 
 radical and fundamental change in Church and 
 State. 
 
 I take it for granted we are now entering into 
 the time of the latter days — a time that precedes 
 by a natural consequence the millennium. It 
 is, therefore, unwise on the part of any person 
 to claim that Christ may come any day, and 
 that His millennial reign may be begun at any 
 moment. It is but fair that we should carefully 
 consider our bearings in the circle of Providence 
 and our position in the ages. The story and 
 work of redemption are grand, full of interest 
 and thrilling incidents, still we must take things 
 in their order. Some stories we read are very 
 fascinating. The plot culminates, the charac- 
 ters and incidents converge toward and center 
 in the hero. At such a point we are often car- 
 ried away with our sympathy for the hero ; we 
 become anxious for him, and desirous to know 
 the issues, and so are tempted to skip a few 
 pages and get at the end unwisely and unlaw- 
 fully. Thus I think many are carried away by 
 a loving desire for the millennium; they become 
 
58 
 
 ISRAEL AND POPULATION 
 
 anxious for the return of the Hero of Redemp- 
 tion ; they skip a few pages of Providence, and 
 come to the end too soon. 
 
 These days are preparative, and in such a pre- 
 parative stage we are warranted to look for the 
 fulfillment of certain prophecies; for prophecies, 
 indeed, of such a nature and character that no 
 Bible student need be mistaken as to the time, 
 place and conditions of fulfillment. We have 
 called your attention to one of these prophecies, 
 and pointed out to you how the same was liter- 
 ally fulfilling before the eyes of all. God, in 
 olden times, made promises to Abraham, the 
 patriarchs and their seed. These promises were 
 nothing more nor less than prophecies. He at- 
 tested the same by His own oath. He called to 
 witness the sun, moon, stars, sea, night, day, 
 the seasons, seedtime and harvest. These He 
 called His ordinances. These ordinances may 
 depart from before Him, but the seed of Israel 
 should not cease to be a nation. They were not 
 only to be a nation, but a company of nations. 
 To this end, in the latter days, they were to 
 come in possession of the isles of the sea, the 
 coasts of the earth, waste and desolate places ; 
 to inherit the seed of the Gentiles, and cause 
 their desolate cities to be filled. They were to 
 possess and rule over the heathen. In the latter 
 days they were to possess Edom and Esau, that 
 is Turkey, and so come in possession of their 
 own land, Palestine. Now I call you to wit- 
 
ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 no 
 
 ness, and ask you if these tilings are so ? Be- 
 fore your eyes, before mine, before the eyes of 
 all the world, God is fulfilling His promises 
 made to the fathers. 
 
 The very exceptions to the sweeping and com- 
 prehensive possessions of the seed of Jacob are 
 pyramidal witnesses to the same. The house of 
 Judah was to become homeless, without a na- 
 tion and without a government, after they left 
 Palestine ; but to be a people known by the 
 race feature and by their unwavering adherence, 
 attachment and fidelity to the Mosaic worship. 
 This exception all can see, and none can truth- 
 fully deny. They have had money and men 
 enough to buy and rule a nation, but as yet they 
 have none. Their talent, their ability and their 
 money, have been the chief factor in the rule, 
 prosperity and greatness of many nations in the 
 past as well as now. And the second concep- 
 tion is not less grand and conclusive. Let any 
 one inquire what was to be the portion of the 
 tribe of Manasseh, and they will find that Man- 
 asseh was to be a distinct people, a great people ; 
 for so said the dying patriarch Jacob. Now 
 such a people, a«great people, we hold Manasseh 
 to be at this day in the people of the United 
 States. Some sixty colonies England has over- 
 run, established or conquered, and she is busy 
 at work yet conquering and gathering in. But 
 is it not remarkable that she has never lost one 
 of the many save the United States ? Will any 
 
60 
 
 ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 one give an earthly reason for this marvelous 
 exception ? I presume no one can. There is, 
 however, a divine reason. Moses, when giving 
 his prophetic benediction to the tribes of Israel, 
 gives us an insight into this question. Speaking 
 of Joseph and the wonderful blessing in store 
 for his sons Ephraim and Masasseh, he says : 
 “His glory is like the firstling of his bullock, 
 and his horns are like the horns of unicorns ; 
 and with them he shall push the people together 
 to the ends of the earth ; and they are the ten 
 thousands of Ephraim , and they are the thou- 
 sands of Manasseh .” — Deut. xxxiii. 17. And 
 further light is thrown on this subject when we 
 notice what Isaiah says in the forty -ninth chap- 
 ter. The children of Israel, when settled in 
 some isles, would lose a portion of themselves, 
 and still the “children which thou shalt have 
 after thou has lost the other , shall say again in 
 thine ears, the place is too strait for me, give 
 place to me that I may dwell.” The simple and 
 natural interpretation of such a passage, is that 
 the isles referred to were the British isles. The 
 children lost refer to Manasseh, the Pilgrims and 
 Puritans who came from England. And the cry 
 for more room after they have left, shall lead 
 England to look for lands in which to colonize 
 her surplus population, all of which she has 
 done and is doing. 
 
 Surely in these things there is something more 
 than chance. Yes, there is a divine purpose 
 
ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 61 
 
 fulfilled. Seeing, then, that Gfod will put the 
 land into Israel’s hand, there will run another 
 blessing parallel with this — namely, a pecu- 
 liar increase of the seed, or children of 
 Israel, so that they may occupy and control 
 these lands. These two prophecies are to be 
 fulfilling on a parallel line at the same time. 
 Are they so fulfilling ? We answer yes ; and 
 the answer all the world may verify, for the 
 facts are of such a nature that if they are not 
 so fulfilling it can be very easily disproved. 
 
 The prophet tells us in the text that the 
 children of Israel are to be numerous — to be 
 numerous in an extraordinary degree — so much 
 so that it shall appear partly miraculous when 
 such increase is compared to other people or 
 judged by the common methods of reasoning. 
 Hosea had three children ; the first a son. He 
 called him Jezreel. This son was set for a wit- 
 ness that God would cause to cease the house of 
 Israel in Palestine — that Israel should cease to 
 be a nation for a time. This idea Isaiah points 
 out under the type of an abandoned wife. God 
 styles Himself the Husband of Israel, and that 
 He had given the wife a bill of divorcement. 
 Thus the two prophets agree, and history rati- 
 fies both. 
 
 Hosea’ s second child he calls Lo-ruliamah. 
 She was set for a witness that God would take 
 away His mercy from the house of Israel for a 
 time, and that God would utterly take them 
 
62 
 
 ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 away out of the land. So he did ; for a few 
 years after this we find the children of Israel 
 were carried captive into Assyria by Shalman- 
 eser, and the Assyrians were brought and put 
 in their place. And from these Assyrians, who 
 were planted in the cities and country left by 
 the children of Israel, we get the Samaritans, 
 who were, as you see, not Jews nor Israelites by 
 generation — they were manufactured Jews only. 
 “And the Lord removed Israel out of His sight, 
 as He had said by all His servants the prophets. 
 So was Israel carried away out of their own 
 land to Assyria unto this day” — 2 Kings xvii. 23. 
 During this captivity, which is even in force till 
 now, barren Israel, the divorced one, was to 
 have more children than the married one — 
 namely, Judah. 
 
 We find that the third child born to Hosea 
 is called Lo-ammi, meaning ye are not my 
 people. This child pre-figured the casting out 
 of the Jews ; that they would refuse to accept 
 God in Christ, and He therefore would reject 
 them. Thus the Jews became wanderers from 
 their own land. And the land rests in desola- 
 tion, enjoying her Sabbath of rest, while her 
 sons and daughters are being chastised and 
 trained for their return. 
 
 The time will come when God will call Israel 
 to Him, and have mercy upon her, when the di- 
 vorced one shall be restored to her husband. 
 “And it shall be at that day, saith the Lord, 
 
ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 63 
 
 that thou shall call me Ishi, and shall call me 
 no more Baali.” — Hos. ii. 16. Now Ishi means 
 husband, and Baali stands for Lord. Saxons 
 have been looked upon as being infidels by the 
 rest of the world. The Mohammedans and Budd- 
 hists never reckoned the Saxons as being the 
 sons of God ; and Catholic Europe and Greek 
 Russia have looked upon England as infidel and 
 heretical. And the Saxons themselves never 
 went so far in their knowledge as to know who 
 they were, their origin and work. But the 
 prophet says : “It shall come lo pass that in 
 the place where it was said unto them , Ye are 
 not my people , there it shall be said unto them , 
 Ye are the sons of the living God.” And the 
 time will come when Lo-ruhamali shall become 
 Ru-hamah, which means to have obtained mercy. 
 And Lo-ammi shall become Ammi, which means 
 that this is my people. And Jezreel, which was 
 a sign of dispersion, shall be the sign of gather- 
 ing. “Then shall the children of Judah and 
 the children of Israel be gathered together, and 
 appoint themselves one head, and they shall 
 come up out of the land ; for great shall be the 
 day of Jezreel.” Then the Jews (Ammi) will 
 call the Saxons their sister, long lost but found 
 at last. The Saxons (Ru-hamah) will call the 
 Jews their brother, those whom in past they 
 have hated and persecuted ; and thought them- 
 selves far removed from Jewish blood. Now 
 they both will acknowledge a common genera- 
 
64 
 
 ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 tion, and Abraham their father. And one with 
 his eyes half open can see this part of the 
 prophecy fulfilling. The Jews, England and 
 United States, from this and henceforth, are one 
 in interest, policy and destiny. 
 
 These being the latter days, let us look for the 
 signs of the multiplying of the seed so that they 
 be as the sea sands God promised to Abraham, 
 saying : “That in blessing I will bless thee, and 
 in multiplying I will multiply thy seed as the 
 stars of heaven and as the sand which is upon 
 the seashore ; and thy seed shall possess the 
 gate of his enemies.” — Gen. xxii. 17. Old Jacob 
 foretold that Joseph would be a fruitful bough, 
 whose branches would run over the wall — that 
 is, colonize. This increase is to be seen in two 
 ways. Let me direct your attention to one of 
 these way^s, in a special manner, because it is so 
 singular and unique, so distinct and discernable. 
 In Jeremiah — xxx. 10, 11 — we find a remarkable 
 statement: 11 Fear not , 0 Israel , for I am 
 
 with tliee ! saith the Lord , to save thee. Though 
 I make a full end of all nations whither I have 
 scattered thee , yet will I not make a full end of 
 thee ; but I will correct thee in measare , and 
 will not leave thee altogether unpunished.''' 1 
 That Israel has been punished and corrected no 
 one will deny who is acquainted with her his- 
 tory and sojourn from the time she was carried 
 captive to this day. But has the other part of 
 the saying been fulfilled! We answer yes ; as 
 
IS K A EL AND POPULATION. 05 
 
 the law of colonization has progressed. The an- 
 cient Britons are no more ; Saxon Israel has 
 entirely supplanted them ; just as Manasseh in 
 the United States is supplanting the aborigines 
 or Indians. They perish and disappear like 
 snow before the rising sun. Not all we can do 
 on the line of legislation, philanthropy and re- 
 ligion, is sufficient to stay the ravages of this 
 long-ago declared decree of heaven. Go to Can- 
 ada, and you find they are perishing ; in New r - 
 foundland they are entirely gone, and in every 
 other province they are fast disappearing, save 
 such as are saved by incorporation, by marriage, 
 and salt- stayed by the power of Christianity ; 
 but both these remedies are only temporal — they 
 perish in spite of all in the heated atmosphere 
 of Israel’s civilization. Some few tribes may 
 hold their own and seem to increase, but such 
 does not invalidate the evidence of the decree. 
 For they have perished in such numbers, and 
 so uniformly, when in contact with Israel, that 
 history proclaims the decree fulfilled. 
 
 The native inhabitants of Van Dieman, called 
 Tasmanians, have entirely become extinct. The 
 Maoris of New Zealand are rapidly diminishing. 
 Fifty years ago they were 200,000 strong ; now 
 only about 50,000. In a few more years they 
 will be gone. The same is true in all the other 
 Australian provinces. The same is true of many 
 isles of the sea, also of the African colonies. In 
 these things, so exceptional, we can surely say, 
 
66 
 
 ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 with the magicians of old, who contended against 
 Moses, “This is the finger of God.” Thus we 
 see Israel increasing, by the law of diminution 
 going on among the Gentiles. Israel in the lat- 
 ter day was to be blessed with plenty in the 
 orchard, stall and field, “For I will lay no more 
 famine upon you, saith the Lord.” The past 
 year we learn that some 10,000,000 of Chinese 
 jierished in famine. India, in one part, has been 
 greatly reduced in number by the same scourge. 
 This country will be partly protected from the 
 operation of this law — for no doubt a large por- 
 tion are from Abraham. ‘ ‘ But unto the sons of 
 the concubines, which Abraham had, Abraham 
 gave gifts, and sent them away from Isaac, his 
 son, while he yet lived, eastward, unto the 
 east country.” — Gen. xxv. 6. This same scourge 
 does not follow the colonizing of other nations. 
 It did not follow Spain, nor the Dutch, nor 
 France. 
 
 If you turn to the prophets you will soon 
 learn how they are to increase in the latter days ; 
 not by a comparison on the line of diminution 
 only, but in and from themselves. “Behold, 
 the days come, saith the Lord, that I will sow' 
 the house of Israel and the house of Judah with 
 the seed of man and beast. ”-Jer. xxxi. 27. Have 
 these days come ? We again say yes ; and these 
 kind of prophecies are being fulfilled in this day, 
 in so special a manner as to make certain the 
 times w r e live in. Through Israel, Judah and 
 
ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 67 
 
 Manasseh, the earth is to find the equilibrium of 
 peace. The Jews will furnish the money, for 
 in the increasing ascendancy and multiplying 
 power and authority of England and America, 
 the J ews will draw closer to them and invest 
 more and more their money with them, because 
 of greater security and profit. The balance of 
 power and even compulsion will be in the hands 
 of England and America, to force arbitration on 
 disputing nations, and they will do so, having 
 set the precedents themselves in the Alabama 
 and fish treaties. At present, many will refuse 
 this idea, and point to the famous Monroe doc- 
 trine. Now that doctrine has had its time, 
 nearly , and it has served a good purpose for 
 the country. The mercantile growth, and gen- 
 eral producing power of this country will cause 
 us to abandon our selfish protection policy ; for 
 of all other people on the face of the earth, we 
 will want free trade ; for we will have the great- 
 est surplus of mercantile and agricultural pro- 
 ductions, and in a short time our very position 
 and ability will push away all competitors. 
 Once our mercantile and agricultural interests 
 are cast in other nations, we will then have an 
 interest in their wars and peace, and will be led 
 to interfere. 
 
 The chief way in which the balance of power 
 will fall into English and American hands is in 
 the fulfilling of the blessings of the text : the 
 multiplying of this people, first by natural in- 
 
68 
 
 ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 crease, and second by incorporation and absorp- 
 tion. Look at this law of absorption ; liow vigor- 
 ous and sure. If you turn into a field of grass 
 fowls, pigs, horses and cows, you get chicken 
 meat, pork, horseflesh and beef. The individu- 
 alism in each creature absorbs and converts the 
 same field of grass into themselves. So into 
 this country are coming people of every nation 
 and race, but the individualism of Manasseli 
 will in due time make them all Manassites. The 
 children of the Russians, Poles, Spanish and so 
 on, become American in taste, manners and 
 sympathies. They are been grafted into the 
 tree of Manasseh. 
 
 But look at the law of increase naturally. 
 Take the population of several countries as 
 given in the last census, and carefully note the 
 relative increase, and how long it takes each 
 nation to double its number. Russia, eiglity-six 
 millions, doubles every 100 years ; Germany, 
 forty-two millions, doubles every 100 years ; 
 Turkey, forty-seven millions, doubles every 550 
 years ; Austria, thirty- seven millions, doubles 
 every 100 years ; France, thirty-six millions, 
 doubles every 140 years : Great Britain, thirty- 
 three millions, doubles every 55 years ; United 
 States, forty millions, doubles every 25 years ; 
 Italy, twenty-seven millions, doubles every 125 
 years ; Egypt, seventeen millions, doubles every 
 150 years; Spain, sixteen millions, doubles every 
 112 years ; English colonies, ten millions, dou- 
 
ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 09 
 
 bles every 25 years. Now make a calculation 
 for 100 years, from 1878 to 1978, and see how 
 these countries stand in population and tlieir 
 relative position. Russia will have one hundred 
 and seventy-two millions, Germany eighty-four, 
 Turkey fifty-six, Austria seventy four, France 
 fifty-nine, Great Britain one hundred and thirty- 
 seven, Italy forty-one, Egypt twenty-nine, Spain 
 twenty-eight, United States six hundred and 
 forty, and the English colonies one hundred 
 and sixty — and that is not reckoning the na- 
 tives in the colonies, only the decendants of the 
 English. Of course in a country like India, the 
 natives will be a considerable number, and they 
 might properly be reckoned in with the colonial 
 items, and so swell the number of Israel’s 
 power. 
 
 Now these figures show a wonderful conclu- 
 sion. In simple language we find that in 1978, 
 the English-speaking race, or Israelites, will 
 number 937 millions, while all of Russia, Ger- 
 many, Turkey, Austria, France, Italy, Egypt 
 and Spain, will only number 543 millions. Where 
 then, we ask, will be the balance of power ? And 
 why should this certain law come into opera- 
 tion at this time, if it be not the blessing fore- 
 told by the prophets? And can we not see that 
 these are the latter days, and that God is fulfill- 
 ing his promises to Israel ? 
 
 The blood of Abraham and the faith of Abra- 
 ham have been wonderfully preserved and pro- 
 
70 
 
 ISRAEL AND POPULATION. 
 
 jected down through the centuries with telling 
 effect. And on this line the Darwinian theory 
 ; of election is very true, for the survival of the 
 fittist is the proclaimed law of heaven. There 
 is power in land possession, and there is power 
 in number, and if these two factors maintain 
 their force for one hundred years, then we infer 
 of certainty that the scepter of rule and destiny 
 of the world will be in the hands of Israel, unless 
 the laws of nature are reversed, and the promi- 
 ses of God fail. The word of God cannot fail 
 or return unto Him void ; it must accomplish 
 that wliereunto He sent it and prosper in things 
 designed, or as Jeremiah — xxiii. 20 — says, “The 
 anger of the Lord shall not return until He lias 
 executed and till He has performed the thoughts 
 of His heart ; in the latter days ye shall consider 
 it perfectly.” 
 
ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 Discourse, 5. 
 
 LATTER DAY PROPHETIC PROMISES — TIME OF 
 ISRAEL’S REVIVAL — PYRAMID TESTIMONY — 
 BRITISH ISLAND POPULATION IN 1882 — AFFI- 
 NITY BETWEEN ENGLISH AND HEBREW — CELL 
 OF THE HONEY BEE — ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE — 
 LION OF LANGUAGES — FOREIGN TESTIMONY — 
 ALL TONGUES INDIGENOUS BUT ENGLISH — THE 
 PRE- MILLENNIAL TOKENS. 
 
 Text— Zeplianiali iii* 9. 
 
 “ For then will / turn to the people a pure language , that they may 
 all call upon the name of the Lord, to serve Him with one 
 consent 
 
 I N the last two discourses we called your at- 
 tention to two prophecies that are now ful- 
 filling ; they are on parellel lines of time and 
 territory. The first had reference to the rapid 
 accumulation of the lands of the earth by Israel. 
 Accepting the Anglo-Saxons as being the child- 
 ren and descendants of Jacob, it naturally fol- 
 lows that the prophetic blessings and promises 
 made to Abraham, Isaac, Jacob and their heirs, 
 should find a fulfillment in these, the latter 
 
72 
 
 ISRAEL ASD LANGUAGE. 
 
 days, and that such fulfillment should be found 
 in the English nation, among the Jews and in 
 the United States. It is easy to see and believe 
 that the curses prophetically pronounced on 
 Judah and Israel have been fulfilled, especially 
 on the house of J udali. The promises to the 
 house of Israel are now being grandly realized. 
 England is in possession of the isles of the 
 sea, the coasts of the earth, the waste and deso- 
 late places, the heathen is her inheritance, and 
 she is inheriting the seed of the Gentiles, and 
 causing their desolate cities to be inhabited. 
 From the taking of Jamaica, by General Penn, 
 in 1655, to the peaceful cession of Cyprus, the 
 course of this little island nation has been on- 
 ward and upward. And if her conquests and 
 progress are not amenable to prophecy, for an 
 interpretation, then the wonder is still greater. 
 The facts are with us, and must be accounted 
 for some way. The second had reference to the 
 multitudinous seed of Israel in the latter days. 
 Till two hundred years ago the Anglo-Saxons 
 were not in this respect distinct from other 
 races ; indeed, for centuries they were distinct 
 rather for their weakness in multiplying power 
 and number. Many other races have exceeded 
 them in this particular. But, no sooner do we 
 come abreast of the latter day time than we find 
 the laws of centuries changed. In thermal 
 science it is an axiom that heat expands all 
 bodies, and of course that cold contracts them. 
 
ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 73 
 
 But to this general rule there is one beautiful 
 and benevolent exception : it is in water ; for if 
 we start with water at thirty-two degrees, we 
 find the remarkable phenomenon of cold ex- 
 panding all below thirty-two, and heat expand- 
 ing all above. If we take water at 212 degrees 
 and withdraw from it the heat, it will continue 
 to contract till we reach tliirty-two ; then the 
 law is reversed, and the water expands. Now 
 the reversion of this law, at this particular point, 
 is wonderfully expressive of divine forethought 
 and benevolence. By such a change ice is made 
 to float in water, and so save our lakes, streams 
 and wells, from being frozen solid. As this ex- 
 ception is to thermal science, so is the law of 
 reproduction to Israel in this day. This people, 
 who have been behind other races, now, at an 
 appointed time, step to the front. The law 
 seems to be reversed, and that too for a benevo- 
 lent purpose — for the very purpose that they 
 might be able to fulfill the mission assigned 
 them in these last days to occupy the new lands 
 and evangelize the world. One prophecy seems 
 to call for the other, for what would be the use 
 of the lands without the people, or the people 
 without the lands ? It is an amazing fact that 
 Queen Victoria should bear rule over one-third 
 of the population of the whole earth, and that 
 Israel, including Manasseh, should own one- 
 fourth of the land. 
 
 But this amazing fact is made reasonable when 
 
74 
 
 ISKAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 we accept the Queen as being of the seed of 
 David, and an heir to the promises attaching to 
 David’ s throne, and when we accept the Anglo- 
 Saxons as being the ten lost tribes of Israel. 
 Then prophecy, Providence and facts, are a 
 trinity — they are one sublime whole. God, 
 speaking through Moses, said He would punish 
 to reform Israel for seven times — and seven 
 times, prophetically understood, means 2,520 
 years. If we allow that Israel were carried 
 captive in the year 725 before Christ, then Is- 
 rael would come into freedom or be reformed 
 about 1795, because if we add 725 to 1795, we 
 get 2520. Up to this point they were to be robbed 
 of their children and to be few in number. (See 
 Lev. xxvi. 22. ) In the year 1795 Israel were to 
 be relieved from these curses ; and about this 
 time this special law of reproduction came into 
 operation. Or, if we take the lamentations of 
 Hosea vi. 1-3 : “Come and let us return unto 
 the Lord, for He hath torn, and He will heal us ; 
 He hath smitten, and He will bind us up ; after 
 two days will He revive us ; in the third day He 
 will raise us up, and we shall live in His sight. 
 Then shall we know if we follow on to know the 
 Lord. His going forth is prepared as the morn- 
 ing, and He shall come unto us as the rain, as 
 the latter and former rain unto the earth.” By 
 this passage, our day and the special providences 
 of this period are mournfully and graphically 
 referred to. Here a day stands for a thousand 
 
ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 75 
 
 years, “for a day with the Lord is as a thousand 
 years so that when two thousand years should 
 
 have passed by, Ephraim, who stands for Israel, 
 was to be revived and blessed with fruitful- 
 ness sometime during the third day, or thousand 
 years. In ancient time a day was counted when 
 it had a majority, that is when it had passed 
 the half. The prophet here says we were to be 
 revived, or raised up, on the third day. So, if 
 you again take these three thousand year- days, ' 
 you will find that two of them are to be com- 
 pletely passed, and during the third we were to 
 be raised. The number we have given, 2520, 
 exactly meets the interpretation — 2000 complete, 
 and 520 make a majority for the third day by the 
 twenty over the half. These prophetic figures 
 tally well with the existing state of things. About 
 the beginning of this century England assumed 
 to lead the world. It is a remarkable coinci- 
 dence that, in the last century, the question of 
 how to multiply the population was a subject 
 of debate and legislation in the British parlia- 
 ment. But what legislation failed to do, God 
 in His providence did at the appointed time. 
 
 It is a curious fact, and well worth noticing, 
 that the famous witness of the Lord of Hosts in 
 Egypt, the great pyramid, forecasts what the 
 number of Israel and Judah would be in the 
 year 1882. As Israel is symbolized in the grand 
 gallery, it is found that the cubic contents of the 
 same, in inches, is about 36,000,000 ; thus by 
 
76 
 
 ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 some this is interpreted to mean that inches 
 stand for individuals, and if so, then England 
 proper will have this number in 1880. Whether 
 this is a true interpretation or not, we all know 
 that these figures will be about right. The 
 queen’s chamber of the pyramid symbolizes the 
 number and condition of the Jews. 
 
 From these two prophecies, so sublimely ful- 
 filling, let me invite your attention to another 
 that is now maturing. It, too, is parallel with 
 the other two. W e refer to the peculiar growth, 
 power and progress of the English language 
 After Israel went into captivity they were to 
 lose their language and take or form another. 
 “ For with stammering lips and another ton- 
 gue will He speak to this peopled — Is. xxviii. 
 11 . We will all agree that the English language 
 is not the Hebrew ; and if we are Israelites, then 
 indeed God is speaking to us in another tongue, 
 for few of us read His word in Hebrew. It is 
 read to the millions in the English ; hence the 
 millions hear God speak to them in another 
 tongue than that of Hebrew. Between the Eng- 
 glish and Hebrew languages there is an intimate 
 relation, especially back a few years, before the 
 English had grown so much. The Hebrew was 
 a very limited language ; not numbering more 
 than 7,000 words. The English is now said to 
 number about 80,000. The most lavish writer 
 does not use over 10,000 ; the common average 
 is about 3,000’. In the English we have not less 
 
ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 77 
 
 than 1,000 Hebrew roots. This, comparing the 
 languages a few years back, is a large percent- 
 age. In names of persons and places the He- 
 brew is very prominent in England 
 
 I take it for a fact that language is of divine 
 origin. Men have written on the origin of lan- 
 guage from every standpoint ; the majority of 
 them trying to account for its existence without 
 allowing so noble a source. The first man, Adam, 
 I believe, could talk as easy and naturally as he 
 could see and hear and taste. Speech was a 
 part of his endowment. There is nothing more 
 wonderful in a man talking than a bird singing, 
 save that speech is a higher order of utterance. 
 Dumb nature performs marvels every day as 
 mighty and wonderful as man’ s talking. The 
 honey-bee builds its cells, ignorant of the fact 
 that such construction is the solution of a prob- 
 lem which had troubled men for centuries to 
 solve. At what point shall certain lines meet 
 so as to give the most room with the least ma- 
 terial and have the greatest strength in a build- 
 ing % This problem is said to have been worked 
 out by a Mr. McLaughland, a noted Scotch 
 mathematician, who arrived at his conclusion by 
 laborious and careful fluxionary calculation. To 
 his surprise, and the surprise of the world, such 
 lines and such a building were found in the com- 
 mon bee cell. Now I hold that the same Creator 
 who gave to the bee the mathematical instinct 
 could endow man with the instinct of speech. 
 
78 ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 Even to animal instinct we find a cer- 
 tain variation and permitted latitude in what 
 is called adaptive instinct. So in man we 
 find this same instinct of adaptation in a higher 
 sense. The instinct comes into play when we 
 suppose a number of persons separated from 
 others, each living in different quarters of the 
 globe. In such a condition, though of the same 
 language when first separated, they would not 
 remain so long — that is, in the primitive state of 
 societies. Thus, among the tribes of Africa, at 
 this day, languages are widening and varying 
 from a once common center. So Israel in cap- 
 tivity would lose the Hebrew gradually. The 
 language of the people among whom they set- 
 tled was the Sanskrit, from which a score of 
 languages have come — the German, French and 
 Italian, Saxon and others. The Saxon of to-day, 
 compared with the Saxon of 2,000 years ago, is 
 very different ; so much so that for us to learn 
 and speak it would be equal to learning a new 
 language. Thus the English language is a thing 
 of growth. In the year 1362 the Saxon was 
 made the court language of England. From 
 that time onward its growth has been wonderful. 
 
 The prophetic outlines and divine place of 
 this language may be seen in the germal foun- 
 dations, which give unto it such vigor, tenacity 
 and capabilities of expansion. All the features 
 of this language g*o to show that it is destined 
 to be the medium of a world’ s intercourse, and 
 
ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 79 
 
 that it very suitably belongs to Israel, in whose 
 hand will be the destiny of the world. It is the 
 lion of languages. It will grow anywhere, and 
 by reason of its tenacity when once it gets a 
 foothold it abides. It is peculiarly suited to 
 the humanities of every race, clime and con- 
 dition ; there is no limit to its expansive adapt- 
 ability. It is in a special manner voracious in 
 the destruction of other languages ; wherever 
 it goes, it sounds the death-knell of all the rest. 
 
 Soon as this language entered Britain, it be- 
 gan its work of destruction. Before it has dis- 
 appeared the real British, the Cymric or Welsh, 
 Erse or Irish, the Gaelic of Scotland, and the 
 Manx of the isle of Man. The British Keltic is 
 entirely gone ; the rest are only local. Besides 
 these it ousted from the island the Norse, the 
 Norman-French and several other tongues that 
 tried to transplant themselves on English soil. 
 It is at work in every part of the globe planting 
 itself and displacing others. A few years 
 ago French was the language best suited for a 
 traveler on the continent. But this has changed. 
 Now the English is by far superior. And why 
 is it that the English is supplanting all others 1 
 To answer such a question in a scientific way, 
 one cannot do better than quote from the great 
 and learned German philologist, Prof. Grimm, 
 of Berlin. He says of it : “It has a thorough 
 
 power of expression, such as no other language 
 ever possessed. It may truly be called a world- 
 
80 
 
 ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE, 
 
 language, for no other can compare with it in 
 richness, reasonableness and solidity of texture.” 
 But, perhaps the most definite and distinct tes- 
 timony given by a foreigner touching the future 
 ubiquity of the Anglo-Saxon race and language, 
 is that put forward by Prevost Paradol, a 
 learned Frenchman. He says “that neither 
 Russia nor united Germany, supposing that they 
 should attain the highest fortune, can pretend 
 to impede that current of things, nor prevent 
 that solution, relatively near at hand, of the 
 long rivalry of European races for the ultimate 
 colonization and domination of the universe. 
 The world will not be Russian, nor German, nor 
 French, alas! nor • Spanish.” He concludes 
 that it will be Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 A British poet has presented in poetry the 
 special features of several of the European 
 languages, which we give : 
 
 “Greek’s a harp we love to hear; 
 
 Latin is a trumpet clear ; 
 
 Spanish like an organ swells ; 
 
 Italian rings its bridal bells ; 
 
 France, with many a frolic mien. 
 
 Tunes her sprightly violin ; 
 
 Loud the German rolls his drum 
 When Russia’s clashing cymbals come ; 
 
 But Britain’s sons may well rejoice, 
 
 For English is the human voice.” 
 
 There are eight languages in the bounds of 
 Christian civilization that may be accounted 
 powerful, because they are the tongues of vig- 
 
ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 81 
 
 * 
 
 orous people ; they are the English, Russian, 
 German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese 
 and Scandinavian. But of these all are indige- 
 nous, except the English, so that they die if 
 transplanted. Look at this country and behold 
 what a cemetery it is for languages. Once the 
 French had strong hold and promised to abide 
 here ; but it is now nearly gone, even from the 
 State of Louisiana and Canada, the last places 
 of retreat. 
 
 If we take note of the population according to 
 these several languages, we shall see the pro- 
 phetic future of the English. It is spoken by 
 about ninety millions, Russian seventy-five, 
 German fifty six, French forty, Spanish thirty- 
 eight, Italian twenty-nine, Portuguese fourteen, 
 and Scandinavian nine. Within the control of 
 the governments of these languages we find Eng- 
 land to have rule over 255,000,000 people, who 
 do not, as yet speak English, and we find that 
 the other seven have only seventy -five millions 
 outside of themselves ; here is an important 
 difference. If we look at them by territorial 
 limits, leaving out Russia, we find the English 
 language to own 13,382,686 square miles, Ger- 
 many 449,684, French 571,578, Spanish 4,694,- 
 811, Italian 114,466, Portuguese 4,028,311, and 
 Scandinavian 1,308,830. The aggregate number 
 of square miles possessed by these six lan- 
 guages, is 11,167,620, which altogether, you see, 
 own 2,215,066 miles square less than the Eng- 
 
82 
 
 ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 lish. The balance itself is more than Germany, 
 France and Spain put together. The English 
 language is divided only into two governments, 
 but the other six are divided into twenty-six, all 
 of which governments are bitter one toward the 
 other ; each trying to supplant one another, 
 while England and the United States are at 
 peace, and will ever remain so. In one hundred 
 years from now the English language will be 
 spoken by a thousand million people. Thus we 
 need no stretch of fancy to see that what the 
 prophet speaks of in the text will be accom- 
 plished in due time. 
 
 This language will soon be universal ; by 
 common consent it will become the language of 
 the world. All the changes going on among 
 nations forecast its ubiquity. China, by an im- 
 perial decree, has just added to her language 
 700 English words. Her sons by the thousand 
 are with us, and by the thousand they are learn- 
 ing our mother tongue. The Japanese, till a 
 few years ago, carried on their foreign corres- 
 pondence through the Dutch, but now they 
 have changed to the English. Besides, in the 
 50,000 schools in Japan English is being taught. 
 If science has an answer for this strange phe- 
 nomenon, so have we. Ours is, that it is the 
 will of heaven. Confusion of tongues came at 
 Babel as a punishment. By this means Heaven 
 scattered the unwilling descendants of Noah. 
 When Noah came forth from the ark God bade 
 
ISBAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 83 
 
 him multiply and replenish the earth ; that is, 
 fill it up. Babel, however, was built as a monu- 
 ment of centralization, for the builders gave as 
 a reason for building it, “Lest we be scattered 
 abroad upon the face of the earth.” By a con- 
 fusion of tongues they were scattered. Since 
 then we have had some 1,500 distinct languages 
 and some 3,500 colloquials, or say 5,000 different 
 forms of speech. At the present time 600 of 
 the primary are dead, so that there are about 
 900 languages now spoken on all the earth, with 
 about 2,500 colloquials. 
 
 When these means have answered their end, 
 namely, to make us occupy all parts of the 
 earth, then they will die out. It then follows 
 that as the world fills languages must disappear. 
 So they do. The English and German were the 
 last languages to come into existence. No new 
 ones are now being made. Alphabets are in- 
 creasing, because missionaries are reducing 
 spoken languages among the heathen into a 
 written form. The Bible is translated into two 
 hundred different tongues. This itself will only 
 lead the millions back to English. All ship 
 papers are now made out in English excepting 
 the French, and no doubt they will soon have to 
 follow in the wake. 
 
 The day of pentecost foreshadowed the univer- 
 sality of some language. Pentecost was a type, 
 and the English is the ante-type. The strangers 
 from Phrygia, Pamphylia, Libya, Pontus and 
 
84 
 
 ISRAEL AND LANGUAGE. 
 
 Cappadocia, mingled with the Partliians, Medes, 
 Elamites, Cretes and Arabians. They all heard 
 the gospel in their own tongue. The different 
 tongues made a wall of division, making them 
 strangers one with another; but the Holy Ghost 
 took away this wall and they were all face to 
 face, able to understand one another. The same 
 power that here multiplied the gift of tongues 
 — giving to some several — surely could give to 
 Adam one. Away with a faith that cannot give 
 God credit with being the author of language. 
 
 No sooner do we see England in guardian 
 possession of Syria than the idea enters into the 
 scheme of reform of extending the English lan- 
 guage. The board of directors of the Syrian 
 Protestant college at Beyrout have shown their 
 appreciation of the new era of British influence 
 by a recent vote, which is to the effect that on 
 the first of January, 1879, all instruction in the 
 college shall be through the English language. 
 The Arabic will only be taught as any other 
 dead language. This remarkable action shows 
 that British influence in Syria is hereafter to be 
 more than simply diplomatic ; it is to be an all- 
 pervading and controlling power, affecting every 
 interest of society. Truly another pentecostal 
 day is drawing nigh — a day when all the world 
 shall hear the gospel in the language of Israel. 
 In all these things we see the lively tokens, and 
 pre- millennial agencies hastening on the day of 
 the Lord. 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 Discourse , 6 . 
 
 MEANING OF GENTILE FULLNESS — BLESSINGS 
 THROUGH JUDAH AND EPHRAIM — BEST RE- 
 LIGION — JEWS OUTWITTED — WHY BENJAMIN 
 WAS KEPT AT JERUSALEM — FRENCH PROTES- 
 TANTISM— GENTILE FULLNESS CONTEMPOR- 
 ARY WITH TO-DAY — WHAT IT IS — EXCEP- 
 TIONAL TURKEY. 
 
 Text— Romans ii* 12 Z 
 
 “ Now if the fall of them be the riches of the world , and the 
 diminishing of them the riches of the Gentiles , how much 
 more their fullness D 
 
 AUL,. the author of this epistle to the 
 Romans, tells us that he was an Israelite 
 of the seed of Abraham and of the tribe of Ben- 
 jamin. The fact so conveyed it is necessary 
 that we keep in mind, if we would interpret 
 aright this epistle. He introduces to our notice 
 three parties : the Jews, who include at this 
 time the tribes of Judah and Levi ; the Israel- 
 ites, who embraced the tribe of Benjamin ; and 
 
86 
 
 ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 the other nine tribes that had been in cap- 
 tivity for about eight hundred years — the whole 
 together are generally known as the ten lost 
 tribes. In the third party we have the Gentiles. 
 This word gentile usually denotes and includes 
 the non- Jewish nations and people. The Hebrew 
 word goyim, in early Bible history, was equiv- 
 alent to our word nation. It finally began to 
 denote any people who • were not of the sacred 
 seed of Abraham. The Greek word so rendered 
 is ethnos , which means a multitude or nation. 
 In the New Testament another word is some- 
 times used in a more limited sense, namely, 
 hellenes , which is translated Greeks. Ignorance 
 of these three parties, their place in Providence, 
 and relation one to the other, has given rise to 
 much needless controversy and division in the 
 domain of theology. Men have argued for an 
 election and a reprobation, laying great stress on 
 * the ninth, tenth and eleventh chapters of Rom 
 ans, that is in no wise taught. The election 
 Paul deals with is a literal one, having reference 
 to a distinct people, whom God had elected for 
 a special work in this world. This people God 
 calls “His people,” “His inheritance,” “His 
 chosen,” “His witnesses,” “His servants.” 
 “This people have I formed for myself ; they 
 shall shew forth my praise.” — Isa. xliii. 21. 
 Hence exclaims the psalmist, “Blessed is the 
 nation whose God is the Lord ; and the people 
 whom he hath chosen for His own inheritance.” 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 87 
 
 It will be evident to any careful Bible reader 
 that God called Abraham from Ur, in Chaldea, 
 from His own kindred, for a special design. 
 Through Abraham’s seed Jehovah designed that 
 blessings, temporal and spiritual, should flow to 
 all nations. He selected this seed for His own 
 training, instruction and culture, to the end that 
 they might train, instruct and evangelize the 
 rest of mankind. Through Judah was to come 
 spiritual blessings, because from him was the 
 Messiah ; and through Ephraim, as representa- 
 tive of the ten tribes, was to come temporal 
 blessings. And this in the past has been the 
 order of providential procedure ; it is the pres- 
 ent order, and it is to be the future. Look and 
 verify this statement and order, by an exami- 
 nation of the nations of the earth at this time, 
 by asking yourselves the question : What form 
 of religion among the many on earth is best 
 suited to develop man, to conserve his truest 
 interest and crown him with the greatest meas- 
 ure of peace, plenty, liberty and security. 
 Surely to this question there can be but one 
 answer — it is the religion of our Lord Jesus 
 Christ. And it is evident that Christ came of 
 the tribe of Judah. If we seek among the 
 nations for the best form of civilization and the 
 best government, we shall find the same to be in 
 the bounds of Israel and Manasseh — England 
 and America. Here we shall find individualism 
 the best developed, and liberty the fullest 
 
88 
 
 ISKAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 grown. In this conclusion the intelligent of 
 every other nation will concur. ■ W e assume no 
 risk in making this statement. Thus without 
 doubt the world at large is greatly indebted to 
 the religion of Jesus, who was of Judah ; and 
 to the Anglo-Saxons for the best and purest 
 forms of political organizations or governments. 
 The Anglo-Saxons being the ten lost tribes, it 
 therefore follows that God has carried out the 
 design included in Abraham’s call, and the 
 promise made that in his seed should all the na- 
 tions of the earth be blessed. To us it seems to 
 have been in a roundabout way. Had Israel 
 been obedient to God in Palestine, and had 
 Judah received Jesus as the true Messiah, the 
 state of the nations most certainly would have 
 been very different to what it is now. Still, 
 through all, and for all, the purpose of Heaven 
 has been carried forward. 
 
 In studying Providence it is well always to 
 remember that God is not dependent upon the 
 harmonious co-operation of His creatures for 
 the accomplishment of His purpose. He can 
 gain His ends either through our hate or love, 
 resistance or co-operation. When the Jews 
 had crucified Christ they naturally thought they 
 had cut short His career and cut off His influ- 
 ence ; for so it would appear by all human 
 reasoning. Even the disciples did not see how 
 He could be the Messiali and Deliverer of Is- 
 rael when He allowed Himself to be crucified. 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE DULLNESS. 80 
 
 The hope of Israel was buried with the dead 
 Christ. They had hoped that it had been He 
 who should have redeemed Israel ; but this 
 hope was then dead. But by His resurrection 
 they saw through the secret of Providence, and 
 they saw that God was fruitful in devising a 
 way of escape, and able to bring to pass His 
 own glorious purpose. So Peter voices their 
 experience when he says, “Blessed be the God 
 and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, which, ac- 
 cording to His abundant mercy, hath begotten 
 us again unto a living hope by the resurrection 
 of Jesus Christ from the dead.” The Jews 
 soon found out they had made a mistake in 
 crucifying Jesus, for the risen Christ was 
 mightier than the teaching Jesus. They had 
 crushed a seed to the earth which sprang forth 
 in renewed beauty and grace ; whose death was 
 life and whose loss was gain. In common par- 
 lance they had been outwitted. They slew a 
 man and He rose a God. They in wrath offered 
 a sacrifice once and for all, even for the very sin 
 in which they were then indulging. They un- 
 knowingly abolished death, and brought life 
 and immortality to light. The critical and un- 
 believing Sadducees, who denied another life 
 than this, gave aid in proving another and a 
 better ; for Christ risen condemned their unbe- 
 lief. The proud and ritualistic Pliarasee, who 
 loved the temple and its gorgeous ceremony, 
 destroyed one and made the other of none avail, 
 
90 
 
 ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 for in the planted death of Jesns they laid the 
 foundation of another and grander temple — one 
 composed of living stones — and made the temple 
 service meaningless ; for the anti- type had swal- 
 lowed up the tpye, the real, the ideal. In all 
 this they had reasoned on a human plane, which 
 is not high enough to wholly overlook and ex- 
 plore the kingdom of God. Paul in 1 Cor. ii. 
 7, makes this matter plain: “But we speak 
 
 the wisdom of God in a mystery ; even the hid- 
 den wisdom which God ordained before the 
 world unto our glory, which none of the 'princes 
 of this world Jcnew; for had they Tcnown it they 
 would not have crucified the Lord of Glory.” 
 Jesus committed His life to the wave-tide of 
 their rage, and was floated to death and victory. 
 On the man side there was purpose and hate, 
 and for this they were responsible ; and on the 
 Divine side we have wisdom and love working 
 out the salvation of a lost race. 
 
 Jesus came to His own and they did not re- 
 ceive him. Who were Iris own ? We answer, 
 the Jews ; for he was of Judah. But if His own 
 did not receive Him, we ask who did ? The an- 
 swer is, that Israel received him. The Israelites 
 in the land at that time were the tribe of Ben- 
 jamin. They had been providentially selected 
 for this work, nearly a thousand years before. 
 This one tribe of Benjamin has a very peculiar 
 history ; and if you will study it over it will 
 greatly serve to confirm your faith in the divine 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 91 
 
 inspiration of tlie Bible and the unity and fore- 
 thought of Providence. The original theocracy 
 of Israel consisted of twelve tribes. This the- 
 ocracy was divided under Rehoboam, Solomon’s 
 son and successor. Ten tribes seceded, and 
 formed a kingdom, which is ever after called the 
 Kingdom of Israel ; their first king was Jero- 
 boam. But it is very singular to notice that 
 one of these ten tribes is lent to the kingdom of 
 Judah, and this one tribe is Benjamin. In this 
 was the divine provision for the time of Christ. 
 We find in the first book of Kings, eleventh 
 chapter, that Solomon displeased the Lord by 
 his wicked ways, and the Lord said: “For as 
 
 much as this is done of thee, and thou hast not 
 kept My covenant and My statutes which I 
 have commanded thee, I will surely rend the 
 kingdom from thee, and I will give it to thy 
 servant (Jeroboam was Solomon’s servant at 
 this time) ; notwithstanding in thy days I will 
 not do it, for David thy father’s sake; but I will 
 rend it out of the hands of thy son. Howbeit I 
 will not rend away all the Jcingdom , but will 
 give one tribe to thy son, for David My ser- 
 vant' s sake, and for Jerusalem' s sake, which I 
 have chosen." All the kingdom evidently 
 meant the ten tribes. The same truth Ahijah, 
 the Shilonite, taught when he rent his new gar- 
 ment into twelve pieces, and gave to Jeroboam 
 ten. “And he said to Jeroboam, Take thee ten 
 pieces, for thus saith the Lord, the God of 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 yy 
 
 Israel : Behold, I will rend the kingdom out of 
 
 the hands of Solomon and will give ten tribes to 
 thee.” Then comes in the reserve clause again : 
 “But he shall have one tribe for My servant 
 David’s sake, and for Jerusalem’s sake, the city 
 which I have chosen out of all the tribes of Is- 
 rael.” And the reason for the reservation of 
 this tribe is clearly expressed in verse thirty- 
 six : “ And unto his son will I give one tribe, 
 
 that David My servant may have a light always 
 before Me in Jerusalem.” Now it is plain why 
 this tribe was an exception. The city of Jeru- 
 salem, God says, He had chosen out of all the 
 cities of Israel ; -because to this city would the 
 Messiah come. And beautifully agreeing with 
 the forethought is the fact that when the tribes 
 had their lots assigned them in Palestine, the 
 city of Jerusalem fell in the portion of Benjamin. 
 
 The tribe then were owners of the city, and 
 they received Christ. The disciples and first 
 followers and converts, were chiefly from this 
 tribe of Benjamin. After this tribe received 
 Christ, then their work was done in Jerusalem. 
 So they were to separate from the kingdom of 
 Judah, and seek out their own brethren and 
 unite with them. The time of their separation 
 had been foretold by the prophet, and pointed 
 out by the Saviour. The time of their depart- 
 ure would be coincident with the siege and de- 
 struction of their beloved city. So cried Jere- 
 miah down through the centuries, “Oh, ye 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 93 
 
 children of Benjamin, gather yourselves to liee 
 out of the midst of Jerusalem, and blow the 
 trumpet in Tekoa, and set up a sign of lire in 
 Betli-haccerem, for evil appeareth out of the 
 north and great destruction.” — Jer. vi. 1. If 
 any of you are mindful to examine history, you 
 will find that war came, that the destruction was 
 terrible, and more, you will find that the Ben- 
 jaminites escaped. These points profane his- 
 torians thoroughly confirm. Having fulfilled 
 their God-appointed mission with the kingdom 
 of Judah and in Jerusalem, heaven gave them 
 to be liglit-bearers to the whole world ; first to 
 specially find their own brethren of the house of 
 Israel, and carry them the gospel, and they 
 would carry it unto all the earth. Thus the 
 Saviour said “Go not in the way of the Gen- 
 tiles, and into any city of the Samaritans enter 
 ye not. But go rather to the lost sheep of the 
 house of Israel. ’ ’ Peter in his epistle tells where 
 these lost sheep were scattered. Agreeable to 
 the Saviour’s command they went forth, and 
 preached as they went, and so carried the gos- 
 pel of Jesus with them. As a tribe they finally 
 settled in Normandy, and gave to France her 
 Protestantism, which, from that day to this, 
 Catholicism has not been able entirely to uproot, 
 though it has made several desperate attempts. 
 They finally, however, as a tribe, under the 
 Norman conquest entered England and united 
 with the other nine tribes. Their advent, and 
 
94 
 
 ISRAEL AX I) GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 tlie way they came, is very graphically symbol- 
 ized in the unicorn on the royal arms of England. 
 The unicorn is looking westward, and is at- 
 tached to the crown by a chain — showing that it 
 came from the East. 
 
 With these facts in one’s mind, read those 
 difficult passages of Romans, and all will be 
 plain. Take for instance Romans xi. 17 : “And 
 if some of the branches be broken off, and thou, 
 being a wild olive tree, wert grafted in among 
 them, and with them partakest of the root and 
 fatness of the olive tree.” Here it is manifest 
 that we have three parties mentioned. The 
 branches broken off mean Judah and Levi, the 
 wild olive stands for the Gentiles, the people in 
 among whom they were grafted, or root of whose 
 fatness they were partakers, mean the Israelites. 
 The hope of Jewish restoration is nicely set 
 forth in verse 24, “For if thou wert cut out of 
 the olive tree, which is wild by nature, and wert 
 grafted contrary to nature into a good olive tree, 
 how much more shall these, which be the natural 
 branches, be grafted into their own olive tree.” 
 Again, the wild olive stands for the Gentiles, 
 the good olive tree for Israel, the branches 
 broken off, but which may be grafted in again, 
 for the Jews. Thus to this theory of interpre- 
 tation the whole Bible responds easily and 
 reasonably. With this kind of interpretation 
 one need not twist and distort the sacred word 
 in order to understand it. I trust the day is 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 95 
 
 near when men will expound the sacred Scrip- 
 tures by the rules of common sense. 
 
 The calamity that happened to the nine tribes 
 of Israel in being carried captive has been turned 
 into good by our Heavenly Father ; into good 
 for them and all the world. “Therefore the 
 Lord removed Israel out of His sight, as He had 
 said by all His servants the prophets. So was 
 Israel carried away out of their own land to 
 Assyria unto this day.’.’ — 2d Kings, xvii. 23. 
 Keeping back the tribe of Benjamin is a marvel 
 of goodness. And with Paul we may exclaim : 
 “Now if the fall of them be the riches of the 
 world, and the diminishing of them the riches of 
 the Gentiles, how much more their fullness.” If 
 Israel has been able to contribute so much of 
 Christianity to the world, and evolve in her im- 
 perfect state such an equitable form of gov- 
 ernment, what will her contribution be when 
 gathered, restored and once again put into a 
 theocratic relation to God ? ‘ ‘ For if the casting 
 
 away of them be the reconciling of the world, 
 what shall the receiving of them be, but life 
 from the dead 3” This people who have been 
 scattered among the Gentiles, God is collecting- 
 out from among them for His own glorious pur- 
 pose and work. Thus scattered they have been 
 a mystery — a mystery among the Gentiles. 
 Paul to the Colossians says : “To whom God 
 would make known what is the riches of the 
 
96 
 
 ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 glory of this mystery among the Gentiles, which 
 is Christ in you the hope of glory.” 
 
 When will the fullness of the text take place ? 
 We answer, Before long. The fullness here 
 stands over against the Gentile fullness. In the 
 three last discourses we called your attention to 
 Israel’s maturing fullness in land, people and 
 language. And now', if you will consider the 
 state of the Gentile nations, it will he apparent 
 to you that the time of Gentile fullness is now 
 present. These Gentile nations are now over- 
 flowing. Take China with her teeming millions, 
 and ask why she has not peopled the world ? 
 for surely she could have done so long ago. 
 But she barred her own doors by making it un- 
 lawful for any of her subjects to leave the flow- 
 ery kingdom — forbidding heaven to such as 
 should die outside. Now, however, she must 
 permit emigration or perish by famine. Take 
 the countries of Europe, and is it not strange 
 that Israel’ s fullness of land, people and lan- 
 guage, is made the fuller by these nations con- 
 tributing toward the same. The fullness of the 
 Gentiles is made to flow into the fullness of Israel, 
 These countries, outside of Israel England, have 
 no colonies to send their overflow to, hence 
 they are filling up the domain of Israel and so 
 hastening on her fullness. The French, Ger- 
 mans, Italians and Spaniards, forsake their land 
 and language, thus adding to Israel’s fullness, 
 for they chiefly settle down within the bounds 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 97 
 
 of Israel. To this Gentile fullness there was to be 
 one strange exception — that was in the Turkish 
 nation. This nation is set forth by the prophets 
 under the figure of the river Euphrates. In their 
 first appearance they were to be very numerous. 
 In the eleventh century they began to invade 
 Europe. The historian Gibbon, speaking of 
 them, says: “Myriads of Turkish horsemen 
 overspread the whole Greek empire, until at 
 last Constantinople fell into their hands.” From 
 1453 till now have they held this grand capital. 
 John, in Rev. ix., pictures this invasion, and 
 speaks of the number of horsemen. He speaks 
 of them as having power in their mouths and 
 tails. This language is very expressive when we 
 remember the Moslem’s war cry, which was, 
 “ The sword of Mohammed and of God.” And 
 in one of the first of their great battles they lost 
 their standard, but, not long baffled, the com- 
 mander-in-chief cut off the tail of his beautiful 
 steed, and, putting it on the end of a pole, 
 hoisted it as a standard. This ensign they long 
 used. This kingdom, however, is to dry up — 
 that is, to disappear gradually,, as a river dries 
 up. All this is taking place. Turkey sends 
 emigrants nowhere. They are literally dying 
 out. In number they are fewer each year. Tur- 
 key will pass away for want of Turks. Her 
 territory will be taken away from her gradually. 
 How remarkable the dealings of Providence 
 with men and nations ! 
 
98 
 
 ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 Up to the point of Gentile fullness, Israel was 
 to be partly blind, for God’ s plans, through 
 Israel, were to remain a mystery for a time. 
 “ For I would not, brethren, that ye should be 
 ignorant of this mystery, lest ye should be wise 
 in your own conceits ; that blindness, in part, 
 is happened to Israel until the fullness of the 
 Gentiles be come in.” Our idea is that the 
 Gentile fullness is now in, and if so, it is natural 
 then that Israel should be found and about this 
 time have her eyes opened. Up to this time of 
 fullness, Jerusalem was to be trodden down. 
 “And they shall fall by the edge of the sword, 
 and be led away captive into all nations ; and 
 Jerusalem shall be trodden down of the Gentiles, 
 until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled.” — 
 Luke xxi. 23. Now, the Jews did fall by the 
 edge of the sword, as the Saviour foretold ; they 
 were carried captive into all nations ; Jerusalem 
 has been trodden under foot. Thus, then, do 
 we see three parts of His prophecy literally ful- 
 filled ; and so surely will the fourth part be, 
 which is, that in connection with Gentile full- 
 ness this treading shall cease, and proud, im- 
 perial Salem shall lift her head once more free 
 from tyrant hands and heathen tramping, to 
 become the city of God and His chosen ones. 
 
 When Moses was sent to deliver the children 
 of Israel from Egyyt, he was equipped with 
 miraculous power — that he might convince 
 Pharaoh and the Egyptians what was the will 
 
ISRAEL AND GENTILE FULLNESS. 
 
 99 
 
 of Jehovah — but not more so than are the pro- 
 phetic students of this day ; for the presence of 
 the Divine gleams forth all around in the mira- 
 cles of prophecy now so wonderfully fullilling 
 in this our day. 
 
DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 Discourse , 7. 
 
 FUTURE HISTORY OF THE WORLD — THE DE- 
 STRUCTION OF THE PAPACY COMMENCED — 
 IRELAND TO BE FREE AND INDEPENDENT OF 
 ENGLAND AND ROME — FUTURE GLORY OF 
 BRITAIN AND THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 “ Thou , O, King , sawest and beheld a great image . This great 
 image whose brightness was excellent , stood before thee ; and 
 the form thereof was terrible T 
 
 BOUT 2,500 years ago the kingdom of 
 
 Babylon was strong, great and prosper- 
 ous. The king of this vast empire is known in 
 history as Nebuchadnezzar. His reign had been 
 marked with great victories over the surround- 
 ing nations. The mighty Empire of Assyria he 
 had conquered. Egypt he had wasted and 
 almost destroyed. Palestine he had reduced to 
 strange and pitiable desolation, having carried 
 the Jewish inhabitants captive into the region of 
 Babylon. Among these captives we find Daniel, 
 the prophet of Judah. In the second year of 
 
 Text-Dan. ii« 31* 
 
DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 101 
 
 Nebuchadnezzar’s consolidated reign, as king 
 over Babylon and Assyria, he dreamed a dream 
 which gave him much anxiety of mind and 
 troubled him very much , This dream he could 
 not remember nor explain, save that it had left 
 a terrible impression on his mind. The wise 
 men were confounded, for they could neither 
 declare the vision or its meaning. The king, in 
 his rage, decreed them all to death. At this 
 point appears Daniel, one of the captives of 
 Judah. Moved of God, he presents himself 
 before the king, and made known to him the 
 vision and interpretation. 
 
 The king had seen a great metallic image, ex- 
 cellent in brightness and terrible in form. It 
 was a human figure of massive proportions, 
 standing erect with outstretched arms, and of a 
 mixed and strange composition. The head was 
 of fine gold. The breast and arms were of silver. 
 The belly and thighs of brass. The legs of iron, 
 the feet part of iron and part of clay. While 
 the king was gazing on this monstrous figure 
 ■with intense interest, his attention is arrested by 
 the appearance of a small stone — this stone was 
 alone ; there appeared no hands handling it or 
 moving it. It was cut out of the mountain with 
 out hands. In this stone there appears to be a 
 good deal of the supernatural. At once this 
 little stone assaults the image, beginning at the 
 feet. The battle is surely unequal ; the battle 
 continues, and during the struggle the stone 
 
102 DREAM IMAGE OP NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 actually grows ; the image falls to pieces, the 
 feet, thighs, breast and head, and victory is with 
 the stone. By the time the image is wholly de- 
 stroyed the stone has become a mountain. Or, 
 as Daniel said to Nebuchadnezzar : “Thou 
 
 sawest till that a stone was cut out without 
 hands, which smote the image upon his feet, 
 that were of iron and clay, and brake them to 
 pieces. Then was the iron, the clay, the brass, 
 the silver and the gold broken to pieces together, 
 and became like the chaff of the summer thresh- 
 ing-floors ; and the wind carried them away, 
 that no place was found for them; and the stone 
 that smote the image became a great mountain, 
 and filled the whole earth.” 
 
 In this vision and interpretation we have a 
 line of history laid bare, so clearly that we need 
 not err. The beginning is the time and kingdom 
 of Nebuchadnezzar. The image stands for four 
 great earthly monarchies, extending down 
 through the centuries even to this time and day 
 — and a little further — for these monarchies are 
 not yet wholly destroyed, and the stone-king- 
 dom does not yet fill the world. Of this fifth, 
 or stone-kingdom, there is to be no end by con- 
 quest, or decay, or succession. Daniel says that 
 this kingdom shall not be left to other people — 
 that is, it shall never be succeeded. 
 
 The peculiar features of the stone-kingdom 
 make it interesting to ascertain what kingdom, 
 monarchy, and people stand for it, for such 
 
DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 103 
 
 kingdom, though small at the beginning, is to 
 grow, prosper and continue to the end of time. 
 Guided by the Scriptures and History, let us 
 look for these four earthly monarchies: and the 
 better to accomplish our task, let us stretch the 
 giant figure on his back — then his head of gold 
 will rest in Babylon, his silver breast and arms 
 will take in Media and Persia, his belly and 
 thighs will take in Greece, and his legs and feet 
 will take in Pome. Thus, then, the gold head 
 stood for Babylon, and is now in this day rep- 
 resented and found in Russia — for Russia is a 
 continuation of Babylon. The Czar is on the 
 line of Nebuchadnezzar. This gold headed 
 kingdom will be the last destroyed — the de- 
 struction begins at the feet. Russia, therefore, 
 has yet a lease of life and prosperity; but finally 
 she too will yield the contests and disappear be- 
 fore the stone-kingdom. The gold stands for 
 work and endurance — as the head is significant 
 of supremacy ; but the stone will finally de- 
 stroy it. 
 
 The silver, next in value and endurance, of 
 which arms and breast stand for Persia. Cen- 
 turies ago Persia was the great power of the 
 earth. At one time it would seem as if she never 
 would decay, or ever have a rival. But her day 
 came, and she has dwindled down to the little 
 kingdom and monarchy, the Persia of to-day. 
 Her power is gone, she is consumptive, and will 
 soon disappear as a separate kingdom. The 
 
104 DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 present visit of the King of Persia to the Czar, at 
 St. Petersburg, is not without meaning. The 
 gold head of Russia will need the assistance of 
 the arms of Persia by and-by. 
 
 The brass parts stand well and appropriately 
 for ancient Greece — an empire once so gigantic 
 and powerful, a people so polished and learned, 
 but long ago their time and work and place were 
 marked out. And now the time is nearly gone 
 and work done, hence they will soon disappear. 
 The present little kingdom of Greece is all that 
 is left. Brass is in itself corrosive, so the Greek 
 empire has gradually eaten itself away. What 
 sublime lessons the prophets of old taught us. 
 
 The iron and clay of which were the legs and 
 feet, stand for the great Roman Empire, which 
 in its day was so solid and grand with its law 
 and order, its soldiers and statesmen. This em- 
 pire that tried the hopeless experiment of mix- 
 ing clay and iron — that is church and State, as 
 inaugurated by Constantine. This nation that 
 tried to fuse together Paganism and Christianity. 
 This nation that tried to stand on two equal 
 feet, and to encompass the whole of man, body 
 and spirit. Well might Daniel say of this brit- 
 tle empire that it should be partly strong and 
 partly weak. In conscience and the empire of 
 the soul, Christ alone is King. No wonder that 
 the Roman Empire has disappeared. The iron 
 part is now entirely gone. The Pope and the 
 church of Rome foolishly arrogate to themselves 
 
DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 105 
 
 to be this kingdom. They still try and believe 
 in mixing the iron and clay — they yet claim 
 authority in the spirit realm. Obedience to 
 Christ and the Pope cannot be, on the Spiritual 
 or clay side. No man can supremely serve two 
 masters. On the iron side no man can be loyal 
 to his country and the Pope at the same time. 
 No man can serve two masters at the same time, 
 both of which claim and demand supremacy. 
 These things cannot be mixed. “And whereas 
 thou sawest iron mixed with miry clay, they 
 shall mingle themselves with the seed of men, 
 but they shall not cleave one to another. Even 
 as iron is not mixed with clay.” 
 
 How true the prophetic utterances of the 
 prophet. The Catholics and Protestants do not 
 mix easily, not socially, not politically, not edu- 
 cationally. How are we to mix freely with 
 those who think we are heretics and damnable ? 
 How can we socially mix with a people so lordly 
 in their claims, and deficient in character as 
 many are ? A people who when true to their 
 profession must be our secret or open enemies. 
 Who sink their manhood and parental claims, 
 so as to depend upon the priest for forgiveness 
 and on him for instruction. Thus at the priest’s 
 command the coming generations are divided 
 and embittered in the fact of separate schools 
 for Catholics and Protestants. These men of 
 clay and lordly air, claim rights superior to the 
 State, despising the State provision for educa- 
 
106 DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 tion. Daniel said ‘ £ the dream is certain, and 
 the interpretation thereof sure.” If so, as sure 
 as the iron part has disappeared, so will the clay. 
 
 Now a clearer view, a purer faith and greater 
 liberty are dawning upon our Catholic friends, 
 which is making many of them feel too manly 
 and noble to be longer slaves to priest or Pope. 
 Bereft of temporal power, they henceforth will 
 have to win and fight their way, as others, on 
 the purity of their doctrines and practice. In 
 such a strife, we can but wish them, and all who 
 love the Lord Jesus Christ, great success. 
 
 Thus in the short outline of these four king- 
 doms we see enough to show us that God has 
 kept His word. How marvelous are His ways, 
 how complete His work. 
 
 Let us now look at this stone kingdom. This 
 fifth Kingdom is as much material and politi- 
 cal as the other four, and stands for a king, 
 country and people. It does not come into ex- 
 istence until the image is perfect. For it is 
 while Nebuchadnezzar was looking at the image 
 he saw the stone cut out of the mountain — its 
 growth was gradual. Its work was to destroy 
 this image and fill the world. As these king- 
 doms became weaker and smaller, it would be- 
 come stronger and larger. 
 
 What king, country and people respond to 
 this kingdom ? The answer is as easy as to find 
 the other, if we keep our minds free from pre- 
 judice and open to truth. 
 
DREAM IMAOE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. H)7 
 
 First, this kingdom was of divine origin. 
 Second, it was small at first. Third, the more 
 it fights the more it grows. Fourth, it breaks 
 in pieces this image, beginning at the feet. It is 
 in fact the sworn enemy of all the four king- 
 doms. Fifth, it is to fill the world and thus be- 
 come a universal kingdom and monarchy. In 
 this latter sense it will be a fit type of the king- 
 dom of Christ. 
 
 Just such a kingdom as this did God repeat- 
 edly promise to Abraham and his descendants. 
 David’ s throne and seed royal are to be estab- 
 lished before Him forever. He promised to 
 David’s throne perpetuity, and that David’s 
 seed should always be on the throne — not in a 
 spiritual sense as some think — but naturally and 
 actually in this world. 
 
 God promised to Israel, as a people and a 
 kingdom, such pre-eminence in origin, power 
 and growth. The answer then is simple and 
 plain— England, as representing the Lost Tribes 
 of Israel, and Queen Victoria, being a direct de- 
 scendant from David. For she came of James 
 VI., of Scotland — he from Bruce and Duncan, 
 and Malcolm, and Kenneth, and Kenneth 
 through the kings of Argyleshire, Alpin, and 
 Donald, and Fergus. Then through the long 
 line of Irish Kings from Earca to Heremon, of 
 Tara, and he married Tea Tephi, the daughter of 
 Zedekiah, who, through Jeremiah, the prophet, 
 had been hid from the destroying vengeance of 
 
108 DREAM IMAGE OE NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 Nebuchadnezzar. He killed all her brothers and 
 kindred, and put out the eyes of Zedekiah and 
 took him a captive to Babylon, where he died. 
 
 Look also at the British nation, learned as 
 they are, yet no historian can tell who the Eng 
 lisli were originally. Sharon Turner, the best 
 and most trustworthy on the origin of the Sax- 
 ons, fails to solve the question. He traces them 
 into Central Asia, but there he stops. They 
 here form part of the Aryan race, speaking the 
 Sanscrit language, from which came the Greek 
 and Latin. And from this place and people 
 came forth the Goths, and their language, and 
 also the Saxons and their language came to 
 view here. The German and Saxon, both seem 
 to come forth from the Aryan stock. 
 
 The very place the Saxons came from is the 
 very place where the Lost Tribes were carried 
 captive to by the King of Assyria, about 725 
 years before Christ, as we read in the second 
 book of Kings, seventeenth chapter. Take the 
 very word Saxon. This word comes from the 
 Sanscrit : Saka Suna. Saka means era, epoch 
 or date, and Suna means void, without. Hence 
 the word Saxon means a people whose origin is 
 unknown — void of date. True, Nebuchadnezzar 
 saw no hands cutting the little stone out from 
 the mountain. The origin of the English nation 
 is hid because God cast away His people for a 
 time — not forever. It is this view of the stone 
 kingdom that corresponds to the prophets, to 
 history, especially to the English history. 
 
DREAM IMAGE OE NEBUCIIADNEZZAft. 109 
 
 The very island itself is insignificant, and no 
 doubt was once joined to the continent of Eu- 
 rope. The formation on both sides of the Eng- 
 lish Channel, that is, on the French and English 
 coast, are the same, namely, chalk. The ocean 
 in time past washed through a passage, and thus 
 prepared a place for exiled Israel to rest in, and 
 renew their strength. 
 
 Why should this small island and few and 
 scattered people become so powerful, so as to 
 sweep the sea, and dictate on land, con^an^y 
 engaged in war, and though small, -inning vic- 
 tory upon victory, and, like t 1 - 0 stone, growing 
 stronger and stronger, a far fighting the whole 
 of Europe, giving liberties in religion that often- 
 times imperiled her safety at home, opening her 
 ports to all the world, and venturing to compete 
 in trade with all nations ? 
 
 How came they to take India, a country of so 
 vast an extent, powerful, rich and chivalrous a 
 country, at that time composed of sixteen sep- 
 arate and powerful nations, speaking thirty-six 
 different languages, and numbering in popula- 
 tion some 200,000,000 ? 
 
 With all her faults, still to her the world 
 owes much. She has stood for liberty in person 
 and conscience. The world has little to-day 
 which ennobles men and nations but what she 
 lias produced or aided in producing. 
 
 The two feet of the image stand for France, 
 the right foot, and Spain the left. On these 
 
110 DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 two feet long stood Rome, as all know. When 
 these two feet were broken, then soon followed 
 the downfall of Rome as an empire, and as they 
 are conquered for Jesus, so will the empire of 
 Rome, as a church, fall. 
 
 In the year 1346 took place the battle of 
 Cressey, led by Edward III. Then the little 
 stone fell on the right foot, and since then it has 
 %llen on that same foot victoriously 218 times. 
 On the left foot, Spain, thirty-five times. All 
 tiA** tiir.Q this stone has been growing. In 1665 
 the English, -, n a er General Penn, took Jamaica, 
 and every four yt*>rs since they have added a 
 colony. Now that litAU, s tone bares rule over 
 fifty-five colonies, one empire, namely, India, 
 and one dominion, Canada. And yet, mighty 
 as England was, she could not subdue the 
 American provinces, feeble and scattered colon- 
 ists as they were. Then they sought to fight 
 against Providence. Old Jacob blessed the sons 
 of Joseph, Ephraim and Manasseh, and then 
 predicted their destiny, saying of Manasseh, 
 “ He also shall become a people, and he also 
 shall be great ; but truly his younger brother 
 shall be greater than he, and his seed shall be- 
 come a multitude of nations.” So they are ; 
 and so Manasseh is a great people in the Ameri- 
 can nation. 
 
 This stone, cut out of the mountain, has much 
 to do. and destroy ; it is still watching the head 
 of gold. Israel and Babylon are still face to 
 
DREAM IMAGE OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. Ill 
 
 face. Greece will first disappear, although 
 England is trying to revive it. Next, Persia 
 will go, then Babylon, or head of gold. Russia 
 will have grown to giant like proportion, and 
 will finally measure swords with England. The 
 stone will win. England will then move her 
 royal residence and throne to Jerusalem. Every 
 country and province may then be independent 
 like Canada, but federated to the central gov- 
 ernment. Ireland will then be free, yes, doubly 
 free ; free from Rome and free from. England as 
 a state, but still federated to the central govern- 
 ment. It is thus this stone will fill the earth. 
 America will federate, the central government 
 will be destroyed. State rights increase. These 
 are some of the things suggested and taught by 
 this vision. 
 
LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 Discourse, 8, 
 
 THE TURKS THE ISHMAELITES — ENGLAND AND 
 RUSSIA TO PARTITION THE MOHAMMEDAN 
 EMPIRE — WHY ENGLAND SYMPATHIZES WITH 
 TURKEY. 
 
 “ And out of one of them came forth a little horn, which waxed 
 exceeding great, toward the South , and toward the East , and 
 toward the pleasant land." 
 
 EBUCIIABNEZZAR liad a dream in which 
 
 he saw a great metallic image of human 
 
 form. The head of gold stood for Babylon, the 
 silver arms and breast for Persia, the brass belly 
 and thighs for Greece, the iron legs and feet of 
 iron and clay for Rome. To all this we find 
 history has faithfully and beautifully responded. 
 
 A few years after this we find that Daniel has 
 a dream, which is interpreted to him by an 
 angel. From it we learn that the ten toes sym- 
 bolized ten kingdoms which were to arise out of 
 the Roman empire. 
 
 Tn the chapter from which we take our text. 
 
 Text— Daniel viii. 9, 
 
LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 113 
 
 we are introduced into tlie secrets of a vision 
 which Daniel had. The place of the vision is 
 on the banks of the river Ulai, in the province 
 of Elam, and in the gorgeous palace of Shushan ; 
 a place and palace made famous and familiar to 
 us by the doings of King Ahasuerus and Queen 
 Esther. In other words the scene is changed 
 from the palace of Babylon to the palace of 
 Persia. 
 
 In this vision Persia is typified by a ram, the 
 two horns of which represented Persia and 
 Media, for they formed one empire at this time 
 under the powerful rule and reign of Cyrus, who, 
 coming from the East, pushed his conquests 
 “westward and northward, and southward.” 
 “The two horns were high ; but one was higher 
 than the other, and the higher came up last.” 
 From history we know that Media conquered 
 Persia, and we know, also, that finally Persia 
 gained ascendency, so that the higher came up 
 last, and is even in existence to-day as the small 
 kingdom of Persia, but Media has long since 
 disappeared. 
 
 While the seer Daniel was considering behold 
 an he-goat came from the West. This goat had 
 a notable horn between his eyes. Horn gener- 
 ally symbolizes power ; here it symbolizes a 
 king of peculiar power, Daniel tells us. Goat 
 like, it bounded over the earth rapidly, pushing 
 and goring its adversaries. Can any one at all 
 acquainted with history, fail to see how fitly 
 
114 
 
 LITTLE Horn and turkey. 
 
 and grandly this description of the goat fore- 
 casts the origin and progress of the Greek em- 
 pire ? 
 
 Substitute Alexander the Great for the nota- 
 ble horn, and you at once mate history and this 
 vision. Surely God has not left Himself with- 
 out witnesses. “ Then the magicians said unto 
 Pharaoh, this is the finger of God.” So we may 
 freely say unto the historians and students of 
 history, truly in these things we see the finger 
 of God 
 
 Could any historian describe more faithfully 
 and accurately, the invasions, conquests and 
 victories of Alexander the Great, especially his 
 assault on the Persians ? How marvelous and 
 simple the description by Daniel: “And he 
 
 came to the ram that had two horns (Persia), 
 which I had seen standing before the river, and 
 ran unto him in the fury of his power ; and I saw 
 him come close unto the ram, and he was moved 
 with choler against him, and smote the ram, 
 and brake his two horns ; and there was no 
 power in the ram to stand before him, but 
 he cast him down to the ground, and stamped 
 upon him ; and there was none that could de- 
 liver the ram out of his hand.” 
 
 And with the same majestic simplicity we 
 have the downfall of Alexander and the division 
 of his empire described. Listen ! “ Therefore 
 
 the he-goat waxed very great ; and when he was 
 strong the great horn was broken ; and for it 
 
LITTLE HORN AKD TURKEY. 
 
 115 
 
 came up four notable ones toward the four 
 winds of heaven.” 
 
 To fully understand the sacred writer here, 
 you must call to mind a little of history, more 
 and better, for all knowledge only aids us the 
 better and better to read the Bible. 
 
 What beast, save the goat, could characterize 
 Alexander and his reign. He was the son of 
 Philip of Macedon, born 356 B. C., and died in 
 323. He began his reign at twenty years of age, 
 and closed it in twelve years and eight months. 
 No man in the same time ever fought so many 
 battles, won so many victories and subdued so 
 many people. No man, before or since, ever 
 ruled over so many people and such a kingdom ; 
 Queen Victoria is in these things his only rival. 
 But with his sudden death the fruits of liis vic- 
 tories are re-distributed. His empire was di- 
 vided into four parts — the four Diadochi were 
 his successors. What lessons may men and na- 
 tions learn by studying the prophecies. 
 
 For prophecy came not in old time by the will 
 of man, “But holy men of God spake as they 
 were moved by the Holy Ghost,” and unto this 
 sure word of prophecy we do well to take heed, 
 as unto a light that shineth in a dark place. 
 “Knowing this first, that no prophecy of the 
 Scripture is of any private interpretation.” — 
 II. Peter, 1, 20. As naturally as nature re- 
 sponds to the seasons, so will Providence to 
 prophecy. We can discern spring-time, sum- 
 
1 j 6 LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 k 
 
 mer, autumn and winter. The garden will re- 
 veal to us winter as distinct from summer, so in 
 interpreting prophecy we must always look for 
 an agreement between Providence and the world. 
 As naturally as the goat symbolizes Alexander, 
 so w ill Providence in national history respond. 
 Winter with its winds, storms and frost ; with 
 its leafless trees and desolate gardens, proclaim 
 beyond a doubt which season of the four is bar- 
 ing rule. Such a thing cannot be of private in- 
 terpretation. And prophecy when fulfilled is 
 as easy seen, and is not of private interpretation. 
 A man is as foolish in forging prophecy, as one 
 would be in trying to forge winter by putting 
 artificial leaves on trees and flowers on bushes ; 
 the thing is easily known if we exercise our rea- 
 son. In this line of thought we are sorry to 
 note that men have more faith than reason, 
 hence the blunderings of prophetic writers, and 
 the leaders of Adventism and Millenarianism. 
 Prophecy unfulfilled commands and demands 
 our faith— much more faith than reason, for it is 
 impossible to see how some things can come to 
 pass, but if they are subjects of prophecy they 
 surely will, whether we understand them or not. 
 A prophecy fulfilled, however, appeals more to 
 reason than faith, for if fulfilled it can readily 
 be demonstrated. 
 
 As naturally as the female and male birds 
 know each other and mate together, so will 
 events and prophecy. This kind of argument 
 
LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 117 
 
 Isaiali uses : ‘ ‘ Seek ye out of the book of the 
 Lord and read ; no one of these shall fail, none 
 shall want her mate, for my mouth it hath com- 
 manded, and his spirit it hath gathered them.” 
 — Is. 34-16. I charge you to beware of prophetic 
 dentists who put false teeth in the mouth of 
 prophecy. Who by their haste and impatience 
 forestall prophecy and weaken men’ s faith in- 
 stead of strengthening it. Prophetic evidence 
 is very strong evidence, both for the Christian 
 and the Infidel. 
 
 Some will fail to be convinced when prophecy 
 is fulfilled — Jew like, they will blind their eyes 
 and shut their ears to the evidences and voice 
 of fulfilled prophecy. The entire career of our 
 Lord Jesus Christ was foretold and mapped out 
 by the Old Testament writers. Moses declared 
 his family, Micah the place of his birth, Isaiah 
 the virginity of his mother, Zachariah his tri- 
 umphant entry into Jerusalem, David his life, 
 resurrection and ascension, with many other 
 kinds of evidence of a detailed and general char- 
 acter, yet the Jews, who claimed to be well 
 versed in the Old Testament, rejected Christ. 
 Keep these things in mind while we now con- 
 sider the text more directly. 
 
 You remember that out of the goat kingdom 
 there came up four notable ones, and out of one 
 of them came forth a little horn, which waxed 
 exceeding great toward the South, East and 
 pleasant land, or land of Palestine. Now this 
 
118 
 
 LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 horn is not to be confounded with the little horn 
 of the fourth kingdom spoken of in chapter 7th, 
 for that horn might justly be called the eleventh 
 toe horn, as it comes into existence after the ten 
 toe kingdoms. The little horn of the text is ex- 
 plained in verse 23d, to be a king of fierce coun- 
 tenance. He was to appear in the latter time. 
 It will be interesting for us to ascertain what 
 king, people and country, this little horn stands 
 for. Daniel has given us a very vivid picture 
 of the king. He is to be of fierce countenance, 
 to understand dark sentences, to stand up in 
 power and might, not however in his own power; 
 he will claim to be appointed and authorized of 
 God, and will pretend to rule in God’ s name. 
 He will destroy wonderfully even the mighty of 
 the world and the holy people. He will be very 
 prosperous and practical, giving a great impetus 
 to trade. By means of his prosperity he will 
 become proud and strong, and will destroy many. 
 He will actually stand up in place of Jesus, 
 Prince of Princes. But finally he will be broken 
 without a hand. Thus, you see, Daniel gives us 
 twelve special features of his person and reign. 
 Without doubt the mate of these descriptions 
 will be found on the person of Mohammed, and 
 his successors in religion Mohammedanism, and 
 in people and country the Turks and Turkey. 
 
 Mohammed had his religion and himself recog- 
 nized about the year 622 at Mecca ; from that 
 time and place he went forth to waste and to de- 
 
LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 119 
 
 stroy. As liis religion prevailed, so he subdued 
 the country or territory. He united in him- 
 self the rights and prerogatives of king, priest 
 and prophet, making it obligatory upon his fol- 
 lowers to prepare a way and enforce his religion 
 by the sword. He was indeed a king of fierce 
 countenance. Thus sprang Mohammedanism 
 and the Turkish nation into existence. As a 
 people they are chiefly the descendants of Esau 
 and Ishmael. If one desires to know the his- 
 tory and final destiny of this people, let them 
 study the prophetic utterances concerning Esau 
 and Ishmael. They are the descendants of 
 Abraham, and so they very naturally fall into 
 the prophetic line. 
 
 The Hungarians came from this family through 
 Lot. The Poles and Magyars are from Moab 
 and Ammon. These things being so, it is no 
 wonder the Hungarians and Turks should sym- 
 pathize, nor that England should have a liking 
 for Turks, England being the Ten Lost Tribes 
 of Israel. Alliance and sympathy between 
 England and Turkey has a deeper root and 
 meaning than some are willing to admit. Tur- 
 key, however, as a distinct empire, is nearly to 
 an end. The recognition of the Ten Lost Tribes 
 and their restoration with the Jews to Palestine, 
 is connected with the downfall of Turkey. 
 “ Saviours are to come up on Mount Zion to 
 judge the Mount of Esau, and the kingdom 
 shall be the Lord’s.” Obadiah. 
 
120 
 
 LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 How clearly speaks Obadiali again when he 
 says, “How are the things of Esau searched 
 out ? how are his hidden things sought up ? All 
 the men of thy confederacy have brought thee 
 even to the border ; the men that were at peace 
 with thee have deceived thee, and prevailed 
 against thee ; they that eat thy bread have laid 
 a wound under thee ; there is none understand- 
 ing in him. Shall I not in that day, saith 
 the Lord, even destroy the wise men out of 
 Edom, and understanding out of the Mount of 
 Esau.” 
 
 These are the latter times of the king of fierce 
 countenance. Hear Daniel inquiring of the 
 Angel in this vision : £ ‘ How long shall be the 
 
 vision concerning the daily sacrifice and the 
 transgression of desolation, to give both the 
 sanctuary and the host to be trodden under 
 foot ? And he said unto me, unto two thousand 
 and three hundred days.” These days are gen- 
 erally allowed to stand for years. If so, Jeru- 
 salem was destroyed Anno Domini 70. The 
 time Daniel saw this vision was about 490 B. C.; 
 take 70 from this leaves 420. From 2,300 take 
 420, and we have 1880. “Then shall the sanct- 
 uary be cleansed.” What means this ? It means 
 that Jerusalem will recur back again into the 
 hands of the Jews and Israel. Christ said that 
 the Jews ‘ ‘should fall by the edge of the sword, 
 and be led away captive into all nations ; and 
 Jerusalem shall be trodden down of the Gen- 
 
LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 121 
 
 tiles, until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled.” 
 — Luke 21. 24. 
 
 Now we know the Jews did full by the sword 
 when the Romans took Jerusalem. Second, we 
 know they were scattered among the nations. 
 Third, we know Jerusalem has been trodden 
 under foot, so much so, that Christians have not 
 been permitted to stand on Mount Zion, where 
 now stands the Mosque of Ommar. And this is 
 the city of the great king. This is Mount Zion 
 from which is yet to go forth the law. This is 
 Jerusalem that God promises to yet again make 
 the chief place of the earth. “Arise, shine, 
 for thy light is come, and the glory of the Lord 
 is risen upon thee.” When, we ask, will the 
 fullness of the Gentiles come in ? We answer, 
 soon. Think of what God has taught us in His 
 Word. We, as the Lost Tribes, have indeed 
 been ignorant of our origin and destiny. “For 
 I would not, brethren, that ye should be ignorant 
 of this mystery, lest ye should be wise in your 
 own conceits, that blindness in part is happened to 
 Israel, until the fullness of the Gentiles be come 
 in.” — Rom. 11. 25. This time is nicely pointed 
 out by John in Revelations 11. 2, “But the 
 court which is without the temple leave out, 
 and measure it not; for it is given unto the Gen- 
 tiles, and the holy city shall they tread under 
 foot, forty and two months.” Or as explained 
 in the following verse, a thousand two hundred 
 and three score days. Accepting a day for a 
 
122 
 
 LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 year again, and we liave 1260 years. Taking 
 Mohammed power to date from 622, or about, 
 then 622 and 1260 make 1882. Now just as sure 
 as Jerusalem is now trodden under foot, as cer- 
 tainly will it be free. 
 
 “Awake, awake; put on thy strength O 
 Zion ; put on thy beautiful garments, O Jeru- 
 salem, the holy city ; for henceforth there shall 
 no more come into thee the uncircumcised and 
 the unclean. Shake thyself from the dust ; 
 arise and sit down, 0 Jerusalem ; loose thyself 
 from the bands of thy neck, O captive daughter 
 of Zion.” — Is. 52. 1, 2. 
 
 England is appointed of God to take posses- 
 sion of Palestine and restore Jerusalem. The 
 present European congress will but further the 
 design. God has told us through Isaiah that 
 He will lay vengeance upon Edom by the hand 
 of Israel. The work of the congress is all cut 
 and dried for them; just as, near two years ago, 
 we pointed out to you the war, its course and 
 the parties thereto, and the results ; so now we 
 can forecast the results of the coming congress. 
 Russia and England will both gain ; Turkey will 
 be the loser. The many days of the vision of 
 Daniel are now gone ; the time is nearly up. 
 
 “For Zion’s sake will I not hold my peace, 
 and for Jerusalem’s sake I will not rest, until 
 the righteousness thereof go forth as brightness, 
 and the salvation thereof as a lamp that burn- 
 etii ; and the Gentiles shall see thy righteous- 
 
LITTLE HORN AND TURKEY. 
 
 123 
 
 ness, and all kings thy glory.” It is the duty 
 of the watchmen of Zion to discern the signs of 
 the times and become obedient unto heavenly 
 instruction. “Ye that make mention of the 
 Lord, keep not silence, and give Him no rest till 
 He establish, and till He make Jerusalem a 
 praise in the earth.” — Is. 62. 1-2-6-7. 
 
 
. LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 Discourse , 9. 
 
 PROPHET WONDERS — TWENTY MARKS OF THE 
 MONSTER — THE BERLIN CONGRESS — ANTI- 
 CHRISTS MANY — MISTAKES BY WRITERS. 
 
 Text— Daniel vil. 8. 
 
 “ I considered the horns , and behold ! there came up among them 
 another little hoin, before whom there were three of the first 
 horns plucked up by the roots; and behold ! in this horn 
 were eyes like the eyes of man , and a mouth speaking great 
 things 
 
 i N the visions and dream recorded by Daniel 
 in this chapter, we have the same subject 
 matter as that contained in the dream of Nebu- 
 chadnezzar of the metallic image. In this the 
 subject is carried further into the future, bring- 
 ing to view some new items of interest, under 
 different symbols and more of detail. The four 
 kingdoms of the metallic image are in this 
 dream presented by the symbolism of four 
 beasts. Babylon by a lion which had eagle 
 wings, setting forth the strength and swiftness 
 
LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 125 
 
 of tlie same. Persia by a bear raised up on one 
 side. Persia at this time was composed of 
 Media as well, but tlie one-sided position of the 
 bear denotes the dying out of Media and the 
 continuance of Persia. The same idea is con- 
 veyed in the eighth chapter and third verse : 
 “The ram had two horns, and one was higher 
 t'han the other, and the higher came up last.” 
 Media was a kingdom before Persia, but Persia 
 was to survive Media ; all this history confirms. 
 After tlie.Medo-Persian empire declined, Persia 
 surviving, held on to Babylon, Lydia and Egypt. 
 That is, wlien the bear was raised up on one 
 side it held in its mouth three ribs, and was 
 strong for a time. 
 
 The Macedonian Empire, Daniel saw under the 
 tpye of a leopard, which had on its back four 
 wings of a fowl ; the beast also had four heads. 
 Babylon was represented by two wings, but it is 
 very fitting that Alexander and his empire 
 should have four wings, for no conquerer ever 
 flew so fast over the earth as this same monarch. 
 In the metallic image he is represented by brass, 
 in this by a leopard, and in the one we noticed 
 in Discourse 7, by the goat. How wonderfully 
 appropriate are these symbolisms. The four 
 heads of this leopard stand for the four king- 
 doms into which the Macedonian Empire was 
 divided on the death of Alexander, namely, 1st, 
 Egypt under Ptolemy ; 2d, Syria under Anti- 
 gonus ; 3d, Asia Minor under Lysimachus ; 4tli, 
 
126 LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 Greece under Cassander. These four kings were 
 the four leading generals of Alexander. 
 
 The fourth beast of this vision is a nonde- 
 script ; for among all the animal creation there 
 could not be found one that could suitably rep- 
 resent Rome. But one was made for the pur- 
 pose, combining in itself all that is fierce and 
 terrible. “And behold a fourth beast, dreadful 
 and terrible, and strong exceedingly; and it had 
 great iron teeth ; it devoured and brake in 
 pieces, and stamped the residue with the feet of 
 it ; and it was diverse from all the beasts that 
 were before it ; and it had ten horns.” Its teeth 
 were of iron and its claws of brass. What a 
 monster ! The other beasts faithfully repre- 
 sented their respective kingdoms, and so did 
 this. What a record ! What a counterpart we 
 have in history of this beast ! “Tell it not in 
 Gath, publish it not in the streets of Askelon,” 
 lest the Pagan rejoice, and the heathen mock at 
 us, and the infidel triumph over us. Blot out 
 from Time’s record the 24th of August, 1572. 
 Let not our children learn the name of St. Bar- 
 tholomew, for fear they should despise Chris- 
 tianity. Quench the flames of Smith field, de- 
 stroy the Inquisition, and divorce Christianity 
 from such a kingdom, from such a beast. Thank 
 Heaven! the beast is dying ; its teeth are worn 
 to the very gum by the gnawings of centuries ; 
 its claws are not now sharp, so it cannot now 
 crush the innocent, as in days gone by, nor 
 
LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 127 
 
 tear with its brass claw the weak. Though the 
 beast is growing old and weaker, yet let us re- 
 member that its death struggle is yet to come. 
 The beast has been wounded, but this shall only 
 serve to intensify its rage. To be forewarned is 
 to be forearmed, if we are wise. 
 
 This beast, Daniel tells us, had ten horns, and 
 these horns are ten kings — that is, kingdoms — 
 that shall arise. Just here we may reasonably 
 ask whether these ten kingdoms are yet in ex- 
 istence, and the answer is no. Some of them 
 may be ; of course they are in existence, as w r as 
 Gen. Grant before the war, but not yet distinct 
 or assigned their special work and place. The 
 time, however, for them all to appear is near at 
 hand. Of this we may rest satisfied, when once 
 they are all in existence we will have no diffi- 
 culty in knowing them. Prophecy unfulfilled 
 is always more difficult to interpret than when 
 it is fulfilling or fulfilled. We have no doubt 
 but some of these horns are in existence, and 
 from what we can gleam from prophecy and his- 
 tory some are not yet in their proper place. 
 
 The special province of prophecy is to pre- 
 pare us for what is coming. Searching into 
 prophecy enables us to forecast the future with 
 tolerable certainty, just as the scientist can tol- 
 erably forecast the weather by studying the 
 laws, forces and inclinations of nature. So the 
 Christian student, by studying prophecy, Prov- 
 idence and history, and comparing them, can 
 
128 LITTLE HORN AND ANTI- CHRIST. 
 
 know much of what is coming. On the Divine 
 side all prophecy is certain, but on the human 
 it can only be approximated. Prophecy fur- 
 nishes the strongest kind of evidence in favor of 
 the existence of God — inspiration of the Scrip- 
 tures and Providence. The Lord himself calls 
 our attention to this kind of evidence frequently 
 in the Bible. “Produce your cause, saith the 
 Lord ; bring forth your strong reasons, saith the 
 King of Jacob. Let them bring them forth and 
 show us what shall happen ; let them show the 
 former things what they be, that we may con- 
 sider them, and know the latter end of them ; 
 or declare us things for to come.” — Is. xli. 21-22. 
 
 Prophecy does not interfere with the coming 
 to pass of an event, or suppress man’ s freedom 
 no more than the man at Washington, who gives 
 us the weather probabilities, makes the weather 
 or regulates nature. Even when men know the 
 sequence of a thing they oftimes persist in doing 
 it. The soldiers who wrangled at the cross 
 about the dividing of the garments of the cruci- 
 fied one, thought little and cared less for pro- 
 phecy, but when they came to the Saviour’s vest 
 they fell into the line of prophecy, for at once 
 they cast lots for that, all of which had been 
 fore- written for hundreds of years. Run and 
 tell that young man that the place he is enter- 
 ing is the way of death. Tell him that the air 
 is foul, that the furniture and painted humanity 
 are all gotten up to deceive. Tell him that in a 
 
LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 129 
 
 few years he will repent ever having seen snch a 
 place. And what is yonr reward ? It is that 
 you are laughed at and esteemed as one that in- 
 terferes, and told to mind your own business. 
 The young man is free and self-confident. Look 
 in a few years for that same young man and you 
 shall find him a terrible example of fulfilled 
 prophecy. Diseased, worn, weak and weary, he 
 cries in the anguish of soul for his folly. “And 
 thou mourn at the last, when thy flesh and 
 thy body are consumed, and say : How have I 
 hated instruction and my heart despised re- 
 proof?” — Prov v. 11-12. 
 
 The famous European Congress which met in 
 Berlin, we foresaw would meet, near three years 
 ago, and told you the conditions under which it 
 would be called. In the dark days of the past 
 did we not repeat to you our faith, as fostered 
 from prophecy, that England could not go to 
 war. Many of you, and persons in different 
 parts of the country, advised me by letter when 
 the telegraph despatches came crowding and 
 threatening, that I had so said. The Intention 
 was to break my faith, or at least to remind me 
 that I had not spoken correctly. What now ; 
 who is right ? This Congress completed a pro- 
 phetic period. After it was over, new scenery 
 appeared, and a new act came upon the stage. 
 But more of this by-and-by. 
 
 Among the results of this Congress will be an 
 enlargement of England’s poifrer over Turkey 
 
130 
 
 LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 and Egypt. For England must possess Constan 
 tinople, because to Israel it is promised, that 
 He shall possess the gates of his enemies, and 
 this is one of the finest gates in the world. Pal- 
 estine will come into the hands of England, and 
 be opened up for the return of the Jews, who, 
 when the time comes, will go in multitudes. 
 And the lost tribes representatively. “I will 
 take you one of a city, and two of a family, and 
 I will bring you to Zion.” — Jer. iii. 14. In a 
 few years men will understand why, in this 
 country, as well as in England, people are hunt- 
 ing up their geneology, and by tradition, history 
 and heraldry, trying to ascertain of what family 
 they are. The re-settlement of Palestine by 
 God’ s chosen people, the Lost Tribes, no one can 
 deny who reads and believes the Bible. Hang- 
 ing upon the fulfillment of this great fact are 
 many other prophecies and events, which are of 
 great interest to the church and the world. 
 
 1st. The ten-toed kingdom must be formed. 
 These kings are to form an alliance with the 
 beast, or church of Rome, as representative of 
 this beast. “And the ten horns which thou 
 rawest are ten kings, which have received no 
 kingdom as yet, but receive power as kings one 
 hour with the beast. These have one mind, and 
 shall give their power and strength unto the 
 beast.” Rev. xvii: 12. Thus strengthened, the 
 beast will make -foir with the saints, or chosen, 
 
LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 131 
 
 but it will be her final struggle, for in struggling 
 she will die. These ten kings will forsake her. 
 
 2d. Anti-Christ has to appear after the settle- 
 ment of Palestine. Anti-Christ is represented 
 by the other little horn spoken of in the text. 
 This little horn is to come forth from one of the 
 ten horns. He, too, will ally with the beast. 
 The subject of anti- Christ is a very interesting 
 one ; on it, men have written and speculated 
 much and wildly. In studying a subject of this 
 kind, we should first ascertain the scripture 
 teachings on it, then look for the preparative 
 signs in the church and world, and finally, for 
 the counterpart, which once in existence no one 
 can fail to recognize. The time, person and 
 work of anti-Christ have been very clearly set 
 forth in the old and new Testaments, especially 
 by Isaiah in the fourteenth chapter and twelfth 
 to sixteenth verses ; by Daniel in the seventh and 
 eleventh chapters, under the symbolism of this 
 little horn ; by Paul in second Tliessalonians, 
 second chapter and first to twelfth verses ; also 
 by John in Revelations, thirteenth chapter and 
 nineteenth chapter and twentieth verse, besides 
 many other references. 
 
 Of Anti-Christ, the early Christian fathers had 
 different views. 1st. Some thought that ho 
 would be Satan assuming the appearance of a 
 man. 2d. Some thought he would be a hybrid, 
 the offspring of Satan by a harlot ; of this 
 opinion were Lactantius and Sulspitius. 3d. 
 
132 LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 'Hilary, Jerome, and others, thought he would 
 be Satan incarnated. 4tli. Chrysostom, Theo- 
 polact and Theodoret thought he would be a 
 real man under the influence of the devil. This 
 latter view we accept, as being the nearest to the 
 Scripture teaching. In the Scriptures he goes 
 by the names of Lucifer, man of sin, son of per- 
 dition, and that wicked one. Now all these 
 names are indicative of some special feature of his 
 character. • Man of sin points out the intensity 
 of the person in wickedness. As some time ago 
 a man was called “ the wickedest man in New 
 York,” so anti-Christ will be called the man of 
 sin, having been the greatest sinner of human 
 kind. 
 
 From the Scriptures we find that he will 
 be characterized by some twenty peculiarities. 
 These we will just enumerate : a cunning se- 
 ducer, a vile imposter, a bold blasphemer, a 
 great tyrant, a wonderful organizer and diplo 
 matist ; hence he will readily make alliances 
 with other kings and strengthen himself ; a pre- 
 tentious and hypocritical communist, dividing 
 his lands, money and treasure among the people; 
 he will be very ambitious and aspiring, doing or 
 being anything so he may gain his point ; he will 
 be very self willed ; he 'will be very boastful, 
 speaking great words ; he will be very cruel, 
 not heeding the plea of woman ; he will be very 
 sacreligious, sitting in the temple of God — that 
 is, the new temple, built by the returned Jews, 
 
LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 133 
 
 and actually claim to be God ; lie will be a scien- 
 tific spiritualist, able to work miracles, even to 
 bring fire down from the clouds ; lie will be 
 very powerful by liis alliance, apparent gener- 
 osity and scientific deception ; lie will be a great 
 liar, making treaties and breaking them when- 
 ever it suits him ; he will be very wicked, guilty 
 of all manner cf crime ; his reign will be short 
 as a king, only about three and a half years. 
 Before this he will have been a man of power 
 and position. He will suddenly be destroyed 
 in the time of a fearful uprising of the people ; 
 he will remain unburied in the streets of Jeru- 
 salem for a time, then, finally, his remains will 
 be burnt up. These and many other facts in- 
 spiration furnish us beforehand of this most 
 wonderful character. 
 
 Against this person our Saviour warned the 
 Jews and all the Church, but especially the 
 Jews, and he did so for special reasons, which 
 will appear hereafter in this discourse. Christ 
 said, “I am come in my Father’’ s name, and ye 
 receive me not ; if another shall come in his own 
 name, him ye will receive .” At the time of 
 anti-Christ’s death there will be raging a fearful 
 war, and coincident with this war there will be 
 another Saint Bartholomew massacre, in several 
 of the ten-toed kingdoms. The beast and anti- 
 Christ are to be destroyed about the same time. 
 It will be the last plot of the Jesuits, who are 
 hounding to death poor Leo XIIT. A glimpse 
 
134 LITTLE HORN AND ANTI-CHRIST. 
 
 of tliat time the Saviour showed to His disciples, 
 when he says : ‘ ‘ For then shall be great tribula- 
 tion, such as was not since the beginning of the 
 world, to this time, no, nor ever shall be ; and 
 except those days should be shortened, there 
 should no flesh be saved ; but for the elect’ s sake 
 those days shall be shortened. Then, if any man 
 shall say unto you, Lo ! here is Christ, or there, 
 believe it not ; for there shall arise false Christs, 
 and false prophets, and shall show great signs 
 and wonders, insomuch that if it were possible, 
 they shall deceive the very elect. Behold ! I have 
 told you before.” — Matt. xxiv. 21,25. 
 
 What a warning the Saviour gave the Jews, 
 but how little have they and the church heeded 
 it. In the second century appeared the famous 
 Bar Cochebas with his thousands of followers, 
 who in his final struggle was slain with some 
 sixty thousand of his adherents. Also, think 
 of Antiochus Epiphanes and his terrible delu- 
 sions, the thousands and tens of thousands who 
 flocked to his standard. So marvelous was this 
 delusion, that many have actually made him out 
 to be anti-Christ, but those who thus reason 
 take the shadow for the substance, and do vio- 
 lence to all true Scripture exegesis. Antiochus 
 Epiphanes could not be anti-Christ, for he was out 
 of time, and meets but few of the special condi- 
 tions of anti-Christ. History records the ap- 
 pearance of not less than twenty-five anti-Christs 
 or persons, who have claimed to be the Messiah 
 
LITTLE HOEN AND ANTI-CHKIST. 
 
 135 
 
 of tlie Jews. How unbelief exposes a man or a 
 people. 
 
 Some have labored to make it appear that 
 Mohammed was anti-Christ, but with all his 
 badness, he is not bad enough to be anti-Christ. 
 He reviled not God, he never sat in His temple, 
 he did not die in Jerusalem. He had an honor- 
 able burial. 
 
 Some have tried to prove that Romanism and 
 the Popes were anti-Christ, but this cannot be, 
 you will see at a glance. The beast lias its own 
 character ; that was long ago written out by the 
 prophets, and up to the present time it has filled 
 in the outlines with a marvelous minuteness. 
 In these things many good and wise men have 
 erred in making prophecies fit certain persons 
 and nations and times, instead of waiting for 
 these things to fit on to prophecy. Let us not 
 be prophetic forgers. Let no one deceive you 
 in these matters. Adventism, Millerism, Shak- 
 erism, Spiritualism, are untimely excesses. As 
 systems they are, as yet, out of place. This 
 subject of anti-Christ, as to who he will be, and 
 when he will appear, I shall be obliged to leave 
 for next Sunday evening, as my time is up. 
 May the good Lord guide us into the ways of 
 truth and peace. 
 
ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 Discourse, 10. 
 
 SECOND DISCOURSE ON THE MONSTER — WHO HE 
 WILL BE AND HIS NAME — HOW HE WILL 
 OBTAIN POWER — TROUBLE EOR GERMANY, 
 ERANCE AND RUSSIA — COMMUNISM — ROM- 
 ANISM — SHAKERS — MATTHIAS, WESTCHESTER 
 PROPHET, 
 
 Let no man deceive you by any means ; for that day shall not 
 come, except there come a falling away first, and that man of 
 sin be revealed, the son of perdition; who opposeth and exalteth 
 himself above all that is called God. or that is worshipped , so 
 that he, as God, sitteth in the temple of God, shewing himself 
 that he is God.” 
 
 E may reasonably ask why Paul gave 
 
 the Thessalonians this caution, and the 
 
 answer will appear at once, if we read his first 
 epistle to this people. There you will find Paul 
 writing to them about the second coming of 
 Christ, which writing the Thessalonians had evi- 
 dently misunderstood, and this misunderstand- 
 ing was working mischief among them. They 
 
 Text— 2 Tliess* ii. 3, 4, 
 
ANTI-CHRIST A 1ST I) LITTLE HORN. 137 
 
 had false hopes and expectations. Their faith, 
 instead of exciting them to holy activity in 
 Church and State, had begun to paralyze all 
 their efforts. “For this we say unto you by the 
 word of the Lord, that we, which are alive and 
 remain unto the coming of the Lord, shall not 
 prevent them which are asleep; for the Lord him- 
 self shall descend from Heaven with a shout, with 
 the voice of the Archangel and with the trump 
 of G-od ; and the dead in Christ shall rise first ; 
 (that is before Christ descends), then we who are 
 alive and remain shall be caught up together 
 with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in 
 the air ; and so shall we be ever with the Lord.’' 
 1 Thess. iv: 1.7-17. It was the frequent use of the 
 pronoun “we” that had confused them — we 
 who remain, we who are alive. The Thessalon- 
 ians had inferred from this that the second com- 
 ing of Christ would take place in their day. 
 Hence to correct this impression Paul thus 
 writes in his second epistle. The two verses 
 preceding the text show us Paul’s intent. “Now 
 we beseech you, brethren, by the coming of our 
 Lord Jesus Christ, and by our gathering to- 
 gether unto Him, that ye be not soon shaken 
 in mind, or be troubled, neither by spirit, nor 
 by word, nor by letter as from us, as that the 
 day of Christ is at hand.” Then comes in the 
 text, “Let no man deceive you,” etc. 
 
 In reasoning on such important subjects as 
 anti-Christ, resurrection, and second coming of 
 
138 ANTI- CUEIST AND LITTLE IIOEN. 
 
 Christ, we should always be mindful of the 
 Scriptural order. When we sit to take dinner, 
 we follow the order that custom has prescribed, 
 soup, fish, meats and desert. Children, how- 
 ever, if let alone, would reverse this order by be- 
 ginning with the desert first. So with many 
 Christians, they reverse the order of things as 
 laid down in the Bible. They make Christ to 
 come before anti-Christ, and anti-Christ to come 
 before the Jews and ten Lost Tribes are gath- 
 ered together again and settled after their first 
 estate in Palestine. The Millerites could neither 
 have deceived themselves nor others, had they 
 taken knowledge of the relation of things. The 
 Jews and Lost Tribes had not been gathered to- 
 gether, then, the temple had not been built in 
 Jerusalem, as described in the last chapter of 
 Ezekiel, neither had anti-Christ appeared. But 
 such was the folly of men then, and not less 
 now than then. Four-fifths of the prophecies of 
 the Bible refer to the history of Judah and Israel 
 in their own land, their captivity and return in 
 the latter day. Still men take one fifth and con- 
 fuse themselves and everybody else. They have 
 brought the prophets and prophecy into bad re- 
 pute by ignorantly or willfully interpreting the 
 same. 
 
 We freely avow now that the prophecy ful- 
 filling at present is the finding of the Lost Ten 
 Tribes, then their union with the Jews, then 
 their restoration to Palestine, then after being 
 
ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 1 39 
 
 settled there for some time, the Jews, as Jews, 
 having built their new temple and having estab- 
 lished the Mosaic Temple service again, and the 
 Lost Tribes as Christians, then, and there, we 
 may look for anti-Christ, not before. Not for 
 the sake of boasting, and yet without fear, we 
 freely invite minister or layman anywhere to 
 disprove these facts, and to such we will re- 
 spond cheerfully if asked for further proof. 
 The Lost Tribes, we believe, are come to light, 
 and may be found in the Saxon race chieliy as 
 represented in this country and Great Britain. 
 If this be so, then we may look for the prepar 
 atory signs in Providence and nations, and 
 thank Heaven, these are at hand and in accord 
 with the Divine word. 
 
 In Nebuchadnezzar’s metallic image we saw 
 Rome symbolized by the legs, composed of iron 
 and clay. We saw, also, that the little stone 
 cut out of the mountain began its destructive 
 assault on the image by striking the feet — these 
 it would first break, so Rome politically has 
 disappeared. The ten toes, however, symbolized 
 ten kings, or kingdoms that were to arise in the 
 latter day, or at the time of the end. These ten 
 kingdoms are, also, symbolized in Daniel’s 
 dream by ten horns that come out of the head 
 of the nondescript animal that stood for Rome. 
 It is out of one of these ten horns that another 
 little horn grows, having eyes like a man, and a 
 mouth speaking great things — that is anti-Christ. 
 
146 ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 It is at once plain then, that e’er anti-Christ can 
 appear these ten kingdoms must be formed. 
 
 How, when, and where will these ten king- 
 doms be formed ? The clay part of Rome is still 
 alive, and is designated by Daniel, and by John 
 in Revelations, under the name of Beast, and 
 here you need to be careful, for the word beast 
 is sometimes given to anti-Christ, so as not to 
 confound it with the word beast when it stands 
 for the Romish church. They will be formed 
 out of Spain, Italy, France and part of Austria. 
 Edom, Moab and the sons of Ammon in Aus- 
 tria, are to be free — that is the Poles, Magyars, 
 and Hungarians. The setting up of these ten 
 kingdoms will begin in France by a revolution. 
 In this revolution the Roman church will take 
 part, and put forward as its candidate the pres- 
 ent Prince Napoleon. 
 
 By the doctrine of infallibility these countries 
 are claimed by Rome and wedded to her, and 
 this doctrine of infallibility makes a divorce im- 
 possible. Rome waits only her time to reclaim 
 her supposed own. And this doctrine of infalli- 
 bility will make it a holy war, hence good and 
 true Catholics everywhere will be obliged to 
 snstain the same by their money, or presence, 
 or prayers. This, to many of our Catholic friends, 
 will sound strange. But this they know, if 
 such an emergency ever does arise — they cannot 
 well fight against the infallible church — between 
 commands and duties, they will readily prefer 
 the pope and church to king and country. 
 
ANTI CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 141 
 
 The Jesuits are now, and have long been pre- 
 paring for such an event ; they expect it. By 
 their plottings and intrigues they will again, as 
 many times before, involve the church in war. 
 They are busy sowing the seeds of discord. In 
 past time both the church itself and nations 
 have banished these crafty fellows from their 
 pale and country. The United States alone, of 
 the nations of the earth, is the only one that has 
 not so done. But even among us they are plott- 
 ing and manoeuvering to such an extent that it 
 will not be long before America will be tested 
 and tried on this same subject. 
 
 Among the preparatory signs of the coming of 
 anti-Christ we have Communism, which is des- 
 tined to spread . In Europe it will unsettle every 
 throne but one, that is Israel England. We 
 fear that neither the Church nor State compre 
 liend the terrible power that is thus quietly or- 
 ganizing in this and other lands. It is this up- 
 rising of the Communists and intriguing of the 
 Jesuits in our own land, that will call General 
 Grant once more to the front, as we pointed out 
 to you months ago. The recent European 
 Congress resulted in patching up a temporary 
 peace between Russia, England and Turkey. A 
 place will be provided for the Duke of Edin- 
 burgh, who, having married the Czar’ s daughter, 
 will enable the two powers to agree. He may 
 not be the first prince, still he and his seed are 
 to find a kingdom in that place. Russia will be 
 
142 
 
 ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 willing for England to have Constantinople, and 
 exercise a provisional protectorate over Turkey, 
 with a view of strengthening his daughter's 
 chances. England will thus come peaceably in 
 possession of Palestine. 
 
 Germany, being tied to both the Russian and 
 English throne by blood and marriage, will also 
 freely consent. Besides, Germany is going to 
 pass through a severe trial. The old emperor 
 will soon die, and also Bismarck, then a new 
 prince will advise the new king, new counsel 
 and new blood, near and on the throne. Ger- 
 many will become a prey to internal strife, 
 fanned by the discontented catholics of the em- 
 pire, that number some 15,000,000, and weak- 
 ened by the Communistic elements. Not much 
 longer can Germany bear the strain of her im- 
 mense army and enormous taxes in consequence. 
 
 Russia also will have all she can do to stay 
 the desire for reform, and the claims of the Ni- 
 hilists or Communists. Thus will Providence 
 prepare His peoples’ way back to Palestine. 
 
 If God promises once He does so fifty times, 
 that he will restore Israel and Judah to their 
 own land. To this one thing all Providence is 
 concentrating, and this is the key that unseals 
 prophecy and Providence, “And I will cause 
 the captivity of Judah and the captivity of Israel 
 to return, and will build them as at the first.” 
 Jer. 33:7. They will form a free province, elect- 
 ing their own rulers and governors. They will 
 
ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 143 
 
 be quite democratic, doing away with all titles, 
 being the children of the Lord. ‘ ‘ And the no- 
 bles shall be of themselves, and their governor 
 shall proceed from the midst of them.” Jer. 
 30:21. Or, as stated by Isaiah, 1 chap, and 20 
 verse, ‘‘And I will restore thy judges as at the 
 lirst, and thy counsellors as at the beginning ; 
 afterward thou shalt be called : The city of 
 righteousness, the faithful city.” Thus they 
 will be a free province, managing their own af- 
 fairs under the patronage and protection of 
 England. Now it is this freedom that will 
 open the door and prepare the way for anti- 
 Christ. He will be elected governor because of 
 his supposed superiority in manners, science 
 and benevolence. He will appear as a lamb at 
 first, according to John, but once in power his 
 true character will appear. He will be a great 
 scientist, and in the eyes and faith of the mul- 
 titude he will be able to work miracles — to 
 bring, scientifically, fire down from Heaven. 
 So clever will he be that he will decieve some of 
 the very elect. 
 
 Before his election, he will have been a man 
 of great power and influence. Once in power, 
 he will contrive to center all power and interests 
 in himself. He will pander to the Communists 
 — to the Romish church — to the scientific infi- 
 dels of the day. In this feature he will draw 
 heavily upon the Hermans, and create quite a 
 sympathy in England and this country. “For 
 
144 ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 some of them of understanding shall fall, to try 
 them, and to purge, and to make them white 
 even to the time of the end.” — Dan. 11:35. 
 
 The Scriptures having pointed out the special 
 features of his character, we see that many of 
 these features are already in the world. This is 
 anti-Christ. This is the spirit of anti-Christ. 
 And when God withdraws His restraining power, 
 anti-Christ will embody all these forces and 
 characteristics in himself. And all men having 
 these features, will sympathize with him, and 
 aid him. God alone is now keeping back and 
 down, this spirit of anti-Christ, until His own 
 chosen time. “And now ye know what with- 
 holdeth, that he might be revealed in his time ; 
 for the mystery of iniquity doth already work, 
 only he who now letteth will let until he be 
 taken out of the way (that is, till God withdraws 
 himself) and then shall that wicked be revealed.” 
 
 Anti-Christ means one opposed to Christ. 
 Also it means one opposed to Christ, and yet 
 desires to be Christ— who wishes to be received 
 as Christ. And when the time comes he will be 
 received by many. The Jews will be looking 
 for, and expecting the coming of their Messiah, 
 hence many of these will be deceived. Many 
 radical Adventists, and Millenarians will accept, 
 because they are in haste in their expectations ; 
 many of these will follow him. Indeed, the 
 whole world seems ripe to furnish him a quota. 
 But who will he be? Answer: he will be a 
 
ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 145 
 
 French Jew, who will inter-marry into the Bon- 
 apart family. His title will be Napoleon I, of 
 Palestine. This word Napoleon, resolved into 
 Greek equivalents, is equal to Apolyon, and as 
 a number stands for 666. “Here is wisdom. Let 
 him that hath understanding count the number 
 of the beast, for it is the number of a man, and 
 his number is six hundred three score and six.” 
 Rev. 13. 18. 
 
 Christ, when warning the Jews of anti-Christ, 
 said, “I am come in my Father’s name, and ye 
 receive me not ; if another shall come in his own 
 name, him ye will receive.” Here, and in other 
 discourses, we have to content ourselves at many 
 points with mere statements, for to defend every 
 point would take too long a time, and would not 
 suit our purpose. It is our desire in all these 
 discourses, to incite you to study, to teach you to 
 examine for yourselves. To prepare you against 
 being unduly led away by Adventism, Commun- 
 ism, or Infidelity. To give you an interest in 
 Providence and history. Do you ask, if any 
 will be led away by such a false pretender ? We 
 answer yes — unless humanity undergoes some 
 radical change. Take a few instances : 
 
 Our Shaker friends believed in Mother Ann 
 Lee. This woman in 1770, while living in Man- 
 chester, England, pretended to have a special 
 revelation from Heaven, making known unto her 
 that she was the female side of Christ— as Jesus 
 was the revelation of the male side. As Eve was 
 
146 ANTI-CHRIST AJND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 taken out of Adam, the female principle sepa- 
 rated from the male, so she was separated from 
 Christ. This, and much that is curious, do these 
 sincere, honest and industrious people, believe. 
 
 Take another example, nearer home, and of 
 which some of you are cognizant, having known 
 the pretender and many of his duped followers. 
 We refer to Matthias, the Prophet of Westches- 
 ter county. This pretended Lord began his 
 labors in Albany, N. Y., in 1830. First he 
 taught himself to be God’s high priest, then the 
 Saviour, then he claimed to be God. On being 
 asked where he was from he would answer : “I 
 am a traveler, and my legal residence is Zion 
 Hill, Westchester county, New York State. I 
 am a Jewish teacher and priest of the most High 
 God, saying and doing all that I do, under oath, 
 by virtue of my having subscribed to all the cov- 
 enants that God hath made with man from the 
 beginning up to this time. I am chief high 
 priest of the Jews of the Order of Melchizedec, * 
 being the last chosen of the Twelve Apostles, 
 and the first in the resurrection which is at the 
 end of 2,300 years from the birth of Mohammed 
 which terminates in 1830. I am now denounc- 
 ing judgment on the Gentiles, and that judg- 
 ment is to be executed in this age.” 
 
 He appeared in fine pontifical robes, with a 
 rule six feet long in his right hand; with this he 
 was to measure off God’ s Holy City. In his left 
 hand he had a two-edged sword. Underneath 
 his pontifical robe he had a rich olive broadcloth 
 
ANTI-CHRIST AND LITTLE HORN. 
 
 147 
 
 cloak, lined and faced with, silk and velvet ; be- 
 sides he wore a brown frock coat, with several 
 stars on each breast, with a splendid gold star 
 on the left. His belt was of white cloth, fastened 
 by a golden clasp, and surmounted with an eagle. 
 He wore a cocked hat of black beaver, trimmed 
 with green, the rear angle being surmounted by 
 the golden symbol of glory. 
 
 He moved from Albany to New York, and 
 here succeeded most wonderfully, winning over 
 some of the finest families of Fifth Avenue, and 
 the richest and best merchants of the city. His 
 followers furnished him with plenty of money ? 
 carriages, a mansion in the city, and one in the 
 country. Finally he was accused and detected 
 of the worst crimes, and at last was sent to Sing 
 Sing. While in jail he issued the following 
 proclamation : “As I live, there shall be no 
 
 more sowing in the earth until T, the twelfth 
 and last of the Apostles, am delivered out of the 
 house of bondage.” For fear of this proclama- 
 tion many of the farmers refused to sow, and 
 they set to work to deliver him, and succeeded. 
 He left the jail, and may be living yet to read 
 what we now state to you. 
 
 It is really wonderful how easily men are de- 
 ceived in religious matters. Let us study the 
 Word, ask God’s guidance in knowing and do- 
 ing His will. Time is gone. I have said but 
 little, much more might be said. In my next 
 discourse I will introduce you to two old men 
 who will visit anti- Christ. 
 
THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 Discourse, 11. 
 
 TROUBLOUS TIMES — APPEARANCE OF THE WIT- 
 NESSES — WHO THEY ARE — HOW THEY CAN 
 BE IDENTIFIED — THEIR MISSION WORK AND 
 SUFFERING— THE TIME AND CIRCUMSTANCES 
 OF CHRIST’S COMING. 
 
 “ And I will give power unto my two witnesses , and they shall pro- 
 phecy a thousand two hundred and three score days , clothed in 
 sackcloth 
 
 E will all agree that the person and work 
 
 of anti-Christ are yet in the future. For 
 
 while anti-Christ is ruling in Jerusalem, and 
 battling with the saints of the Most High, hav- 
 ing conquered and plucked up by the roots 
 three of the ten horned kingdoms, by his vic- 
 tories and cunning craft, and his alliance with 
 the beast, or church of Rome, he will become 
 proud, blasphemous and arrogant, and will at 
 once try to force the people to worship the 
 beast. He will claim to be the promised Jewish 
 
 Text— Rev. ii. 3. 
 
THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 149 
 
 Messiah. He will enter the new Jewish temple 
 and actually sit enthroned as Hod incarnated, 
 commanding the people to worship him. He 
 will be so received by the Jews, some of the Is- 
 raelites and the Romish Church. By the Com- 
 munists and scientific infidels, and by “such as 
 do wickedly against the covenant shall he cor- 
 rupt by flatteries,” men of understanding shall 
 fall ; indeed, Christianity will seem to be about 
 destroyed. 
 
 Russia will aid by her influence his preten- 
 sions with a secret purpose to take the spoils 
 and gain her long desired object, Jerusalem and 
 Palestine. England will stand aloof for a time 
 waiting an opportunity to interfere. Then will 
 be a time to try men’ s faith. To test the church. 
 England and America will stand alone as repre- 
 senting freedom and religious liberty. ‘ ‘And then 
 shall many be offended and shall betray one an- 
 other and shall hate one another. And many 
 false prophets shall arise and deceive many, and 
 because iniquity shall abound the love of many 
 shall wax cold, but he that shall endure unto 
 the end shall be saved.” This is the time when 
 Communism, infidelity and Romish Jesuitism, 
 will combine against God and liberty, and thank 
 heaven, this is the time appointed when they all 
 will be destroyed. Then the kingdoms of this 
 world will be given to the saints of the Most 
 High. The struggle will be fierce, long and ter- 
 rible, but victory will be on the Lord’s side. 
 
150 THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 In the very midst of these awful times there 
 will appear two famous persons as witnesses for 
 Jesus. One who will specially appear to the 
 Jews, the other to Israel, and both testify for 
 God and Jesus. These two witnesses will turn 
 the tide of battle, confront anti-Christ and his 
 host, and give to the world new views of God 
 and Providence. 
 
 These two old men or witnesses, will be en- 
 dowed with miraculous power to bring fire down 
 from Heaven, or turn the water streams into 
 blood, and smite the earth with all manner of 
 plagues, as often as they will. Their presence 
 and power will cast a gloom o’er the nations of 
 the earth, and anti-Christ and his allies. They 
 will finally be slain in the streets of Jerusalem. 
 At the time of their death, a great feast will be 
 held to commemorate the victories of anti- 
 Christ, and to inaugurate the setting up of an im- 
 age of him in the temple. So in the city there 
 will be peoples, kindreds and tongues of many 
 nations. And they will see the dead bodies of 
 the two witnesses lying exposed and unburied 
 in the streets for three days and a half, for anti- 
 Christ will not suffer them to be buried. On 
 the wings of the wind, by the telegraph and by 
 signals, the news of their death will s'pread 
 rapidly abroad to all the nations of the earth. 
 Infidelity and Communism, and the Jesuits, will 
 be emboldened. Feasting and rejoicing will be 
 the order of the day. “And they that dwell 
 
THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 151 
 
 upon the earth shall rejoice over them and make 
 merry, and shall send gifts one to another, be- 
 cause these two prophets tormented them that 
 dwelt upon the earth.” That will be the merry 
 wake for you. A wake that will suddenly end, 
 and that too, before the corpses are buried. 
 The victories will be cut short and the rejoicing 
 checked. 
 
 The spirit of life from God shall enter into 
 the two exposed and corrupting bodies, and 
 they shall stand upon their feet to defy anti- 
 Christ and his host, and laugh at the pains of 
 death. Great fear will fall upon them who 
 saw the dead so raised. This time the telegraphs 
 will be muffled, and the news is kept back from 
 the nations as much as possible, but astonishment 
 ends not here, for over the destroying and now 
 idolatrous city of Jerusalem hangs a peculiar 
 cloud, and voices peal as thunder through the 
 air, to call the attention of the multitudes. And 
 when every eye is skyward, the cloud moves and 
 opens, as a chariot of fire and glory, and rising 
 in majesty and composure up above roofs, tem- 
 ples and pinnacles, will be seen the two witnesses 
 of Christ ; they enter in and are borne heaven- 
 ward. “And they ascended up to heaven in a 
 cloud, and their enemies beheld them.” Then 
 while the multitude are wrapped in wonder and 
 all amazement, the pinnacles sway to and fro, 
 the houses rock, the earth trembles, the walls 
 of the city fall, and Olivet cleaves in twain. 
 
152 
 
 THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 Then anti-Christ is slain with many of his fol- 
 lowers, and the remnant fear unto repentance. 
 “And the same hour there was a great earth- 
 quake and a tenth part of the city fell, and in 
 the earthquake were slain of men seven thou- 
 sand, and the-remnant were afrighted and gave 
 glory to the God of heaven ; and the seventh 
 angel sounded, and there were great voices in 
 heaven saying, the kingdoms of this world are 
 become the kingdoms of our Lord and of His 
 Christ, and He shall reign for ever and ever.” 
 These are some of the wonders yet to come. 
 Then, how say some that anti-Christ has already 
 been ? The witnesses have not yet appeared ; 
 they have not yet wrought their miracles. The 
 Lost Ten Tribes and the scattered Jews, have 
 not yet been gathered from all countries whither 
 the Lord God had scattered them, and placed 
 in their own land, to go out no more, to be 
 plucked up no more. Jerusalem is yet being 
 trodden under foot, the land is comparatively 
 desolate, no temple yet adorns the city, nor 
 priest, nor Levite, attend at the altar. Pshaw ! 
 upon the Biblical interpreters of this day, who 
 willfully or ignorantly careen through the line 
 of prophecies, despising the order established 
 by God. They are like the girl with her novel 
 who cannot wait to read through the book, and 
 take events in their order, but she turns to the 
 last leaf to find the destiny of her hero. So men 
 borne by passion and choice, skip by several 
 
THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 153 
 
 of tlie prophecies, and harp everlasting on the 
 last — the coming of the blessed Jesns. “He 
 whom the heavens must receive until the times 
 of restitution of all things, which God hath 
 spoken by the mouth of all His holy prophets 
 since the world began.” Acts iii. 21. The 
 world is not yet ready for Christ ; it is yet too 
 much upside down, too much confused. But 
 God is in Christ reconciling the world unto Him- 
 self. It does not now look like God ; so God 
 and Christ, Providence and the Church, must 
 work on till the house is in order for His return. 
 “ Hon del our anon men dexasthai archri chro- 
 non apo7cataseos panton ,” whom, indeed, hea- 
 ven must retain until the time of restoration of 
 all things. If things are not now restored or 
 reconciled, or in order, why, then, Christ can- 
 not come. He will not come to put them in 
 order ; this He has left for and with the church 
 to do, and has promised to be with His church 
 to the end. 
 
 A few Sunday evenings ago, a brother kindly 
 asked me where the church would be while anti- 
 Christ was reigning. I simply said anywhere 
 and everywhere, wherever it happened to be. He 
 thought the church would be taken away by 
 Christ ; he referred me to several passages. I 
 said come next Sunday evening as those passages 
 will be partly considered in my next sermon. 
 He replied that he might be taken up by that 
 time. All right I said, then we will excuse you. 
 
154 
 
 THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 Now, in the name of common sense, why have 
 men and why do men, down through the centu- 
 ries, and now, entertain such views ? Because 
 every bible reader must see that there are many 
 prophecies that must be fulfilled before Christ 
 can come. One of which is the appearance of 
 the two witnesses of the text. They will be 
 specially sent and commissioned to testify for 
 Christ, as against anti-Christ. 
 
 Let us now ascertain who these two witnesses 
 are, or are to be. I find on examining the sub- 
 ject all manner of views set forth. And, as is 
 often the case in studying a subject of this kind, 
 I find few that agree, so much so that at last I 
 found relief in turning from what men said and 
 thought, to what God, in His Holy Word, had 
 written and said. 
 
 First — They are two men. Second — They are 
 sent to Jerusalem which, because of the wicked- 
 ness of the city at the time of their visit, will be 
 called Sodom and Egypt, but, lest we should 
 mistake the place from these names, John adds: 
 “Where also our Lord was crucified.” So 
 Isaiah, 1:10 says : “ Hear the word of the Lord, 
 ye rulers of Sodom ; give ear unto the law of 
 our God, ye people of Gomorrah.” This fixes 
 safely the place. Besides, the place is pointed 
 out from the fact that they oppose anti-Christ, 
 who at that time we know will be at Jerusalem. 
 Third— They are sent. You ask where they are 
 sent from 1 the answer is, from heaven, from 
 
THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 155 
 
 standing before the God of the whole earth. 
 Fourth — Who sends them 1 We answer Jesus 
 — Because the Book of Revelations is “ the Rev- 
 elations of Jesus Christ, which God gave unto 
 John.” Fifth — What were they sent for \ In 
 the first place they were to be special witnesses 
 for Jesus, for He calls them His two witnesses. 
 In the second place they were to prophecy, to 
 be prophets in the fullest sense, to forecast the 
 future, to interpret past and present. To work 
 miracles. To assume control in directing State 
 affairs. Sixth — It is worth your careful notice 
 to note that they are not constituted witnesses 
 by being sent ; they are sent because they are 
 witnesses. They are not then to be endowed 
 with miraculous power ; “these have power ” in 
 the present tense. These facts, if nicely con- 
 sidered, will at once suggest the persons. 
 
 Whoever they are, they must have gone from 
 earth to heaven with their bodies, two persons 
 who have escaped death, for their death takes 
 place in Jerusalem. They must have been pro- 
 phets before they left earth for heaven the first 
 time. And in the third place they must at 
 some time and place have been special witnesses 
 for Christ. In fact they are tw r o annointed ones, 
 or, in other words, they are two persons who 
 have been set apart and prepared for the very 
 visit spoken of in the text. 
 
 Daniel when speaking of them, and the visit 
 spoken of in the text, calls one “ the Ancient of 
 
156 
 
 THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 Days;” tlie other one was “like the Son of 
 Man.” He represents these two persons as sitt- 
 ing in judgment on anti-Christ, and the seven 
 horns, or kingdoms. “And the ten horns that 
 were in his head and of the other which came 
 up, and before whom three fell; even of that 
 horn that had eyes, and a mouth that spake 
 very great things, whose look was more stout 
 than his fellows (this is anti-Christ) I beheld, 
 and the same horn made war with the saints and 
 prevailed against them, until the Ancient of 
 Days came, and judgment was given to the 
 saints of the Most High; and the time came that 
 the saints possessed the kingdom.” Dan. vii.20. 
 
 Many interpret “the Ancient of Days” and 
 the “ one like the Son of Man” to be Christ. 
 They stagger not at the fact that there are two 
 persons, and that they are introduced one to 
 another, and that the Ancient of days seems to 
 be the greatest. It is nothing to such interpret- 
 ers that there are two persons ; these they make 
 one. The one looking like the Son of Man they 
 make out to be the Son of God, although Dan- 
 iel says he only looked like Him. The judg- 
 ment spoken of by Daniel they make out to be 
 the general judgment, when in fact, Daniel tells 
 on what and where they sat in judgment, 
 namely, at Jerusalem. About anti-Christ — 
 and that anti-Christ is soon destroyed after this 
 — and “as concerning the rest of the beasts 
 (that is, the seven horns), they had their do- 
 
THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 157 
 
 minion taken away ; yet their lives were pro- 
 longed for a season and a time. The vision and 
 scene of the whole chapter belongs to this 
 world, and the kingdom of the saints here 
 spoken of is as much material and political as 
 the other. The difference is, the rulers and 
 people are Christians, they are called saints. 
 
 Every throne should be double-kinged ; that 
 is God’s purpose, that is heaven’s plan. Christ 
 wants no earthly throne excepting that way. 
 As the Creator is Lord of lords, and King of 
 kings, so Christ after his resurrection assumed 
 his father’s place, and stands to us as God to 
 the Jews of old. All power was given to Him 
 in heaven and in earth, therefore, He, Christ, 
 has long since begun His reign, and He must 
 continue to reign until He hath put all enemies 
 under His feet. When David was king over 
 Israel and Judah, so was God. We repeat, 
 every throne should be double-kinged. 
 
 To this end will come these tw x o witnesses. 
 Who will they be % we answer. Moses and 
 Elijah, these are the two brave old men now' liv- 
 ing and waiting to fulfill their mission. For 
 hundreds of years they have been anointed. 
 Moses is “the Ancient of Days,” the “one like 
 the Son of Man” is Elijah, the Tishbite. This 
 interpretation chimes in with the Divine Word, 
 without twisting and distorting to make both 
 ends meet. 
 
 We said these two were to be human : so they 
 
158 
 
 THE TWO WITNESSES. 
 
 are. They being sent from heaven, we said they 
 must have passed by death with their bodies ; 
 so they did. They were to be prophets ; so they 
 are, two of the grandest prophets of all. They 
 were to have power over fire and water ; so they 
 had when they lived on earth. The bloody 
 stream of the Nile gives witness for Moses. The 
 parched land and time of drought speaks of 
 Elijah in Ahab’s time. They both called fire 
 down on them who sought to hurt them. They 
 were to be special witnesses of Christ ; so they 
 were on the mount of transfiguration. These 
 two olive trees stood one on each side of the 
 golden candlestick, Jesus. Peter, James and 
 John, testifying to having seen Moses and Elijah. 
 These two old veterans know Christ well, hence 
 they will be sent to testify for Him against anti- 
 Christ. Moses is a Jew. He will appeal unto 
 the Jews, who wiil be found in the new temple, 
 performing according to the old Mosaic law. 
 He will change and lead his people from anti- 
 Christ to Christ. Elijah is an Israelite. He 
 will specially bear testimony to the Israelite, his 
 long lost but then restored brethren. 
 
 More next Sunday evening on these two 
 Christian heroes. 
 
MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 Discourse, 12. 
 
 MORE ABOUT THE TWO WITNESSES — MORMONISM 
 — GOD RULING AMONG THE NATIONS — 
 CAREER OF THE TWO WITNESSES — ANTI- 
 CHRIST — THE THRONE AND HOUSE OF DAVID. 
 
 Text— Rev. ii. 15. 
 
 ** And the seventh angel sounded ; and there were great voices in 
 Heaven , saying. The kingdoms of this world are become the 
 kingdoms of our Lord, and of his Christ ; and He shall reign 
 forever and ever 
 
 <jT(W AST Sabbath evening we called your atten- 
 ■?£— t tion to two special witnesses who are at a 
 given time to appear at Jerusalem for a specific 
 purpose. At the time of their appearance anti- 
 Christ will be reigning with great power and 
 pomp. He will have succeeded in persuading the 
 Jews and many others that he is the promised 
 Jewish Messiah ; this claim he will be able to sus- 
 tain and confirm in the eyes of the multitude, 
 from the very fact that he will, to all appearance, 
 
160 
 
 MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 work miracles. Nor need we query that such a 
 thing can take place. Look at some of the facts 
 of our own day, and see how pliable human na^. 
 ture is. There are millions of people who sin- 1 
 . cerely believe that Leo XIII. is God’s vicegerent,/ 
 
 ' and that he is infallible. Take into account the 
 Mormonism of this day, and see how terrible a 
 thing in the name of Christianity can be estab- 
 lished and maintained. Aye, in the nineteenth 
 century, and in the United States of America. 
 
 Or look in upon the Spiritualists and consider 
 their claims and pretensions. Thousands upon 
 thousands of them are persuaded that they are 
 en rapport with Heaven and in communication 
 with spirits and spirit-land. Then you will not 
 be surprised at the pretentious claims and suc- 
 cess of anti-Christ. In our calm and unpreju- 
 diced consideration of these organizations, we 
 are bound to admit that they have done more, 
 and owe more for their success, to deception and 
 error than to truth and openness. Each in its 
 turn has been caught in the act of deceiving, and 
 has been frequently exposed, but of what avail ? 
 Truly but little. We do not mean that in these 2 
 systems there is no good, R f or surely there is, butt 1 ^ 
 that the errors and deceptions are of so glaring 
 a kind, tha t we wonder that anybody of com- 
 ( mon sense can be so easily led astray, j 
 
 With these facts before us, can we wonder 
 any longer that anti-Christ shall be so success- 
 ful. The very occasion and peculiar times and 
 
MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 161 
 
 incidents of the reign of anti-Christ will call for 
 some special manifestations on the part of the 
 Divine One that shall soberly and clearly con- 
 front the hollow and hypocritical pretentions of 
 that age. Hence the appearance of the two wit- 
 nesses — Moses the Ancient of Days, and Elijah 
 the Tishbite, who will look like the Son of God. 
 
 Allow ns to submit further evidence in proof 
 that the two witnesses of John in Rev. XI, are 
 none other than Moses and Elijah : for many 
 passages of Holy Writ are sealed to the under- 
 standing till we comprehend who the two wit- 
 nesses are, their mission and work. We will 
 notice the attributive features of these witnesses 
 as they are related by John in this chapter, that 
 is Rev. XI. 
 
 In the first place they are two persons or indi- 
 vidualities ; this appears plainly from the tenor 
 of the whole record. They are spoken of as 
 “they, them , their mouth, their feet, as dying 
 and being resurrected .’’' 1 But, strange to say, 
 after all this plainness of speech, men have be- 
 come so accustomed to spiritualize and gener- 
 alize that anti-Christ stood for Rome, and 
 naturally enough having generalized anti-Christ, 
 they must do the same with the two witnesses, 
 hence they found them in the churches of the 
 Waldenses and Albigenses. In such an inter- 
 pretation nearly all the attributive features of 
 these witnesses are ignored. Such as that they 
 had power to work miracles, to lie unburied in 
 
162 MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 the streets of Jerusalem for three days and a 
 half. Some have labored to prove that the Old 
 and New Testaments were these witnesses, others 
 that they were symbolized by the law and gos- 
 pel. Again, some that the two sacraments, 
 baptism and the Lord's supper, were these two 
 witnesses, and so on almost without end. These 
 instances will suffice for our present purpose ; 
 for surely any of you reading God’s own word 
 need not so blunder. 
 
 In the second place Jesus calls them His two 
 witnesses. Now, in what sense were they His? 
 for such they are now. Not that they will be 
 His when they appear, but (hey will appear to 
 oppose anti-Christ at Jerusalem because they 
 are sent. The prophets are all witnesses, for as 
 Peter says: “To Him give all the prophets 
 witness.” The Apostles were witnesses, and all 
 believers are witnesses for Jesus ; yet these two 
 are so in a special and pre-eminent sense. Let 
 any one read the account of the transfiguration 
 of Jesus and the circumstances attendant there- 
 on, and all will be plain. Moses and Elias (an- 
 other spelling for Elijah) we find were present, 
 as well as Peter, James and John. When 
 Christ was transfigured, “Behold there ap- 
 peared unto them Moses and Elias,” Matt. 17:3. 
 These two persons talked with Jesus, “and 
 spake of His decease which He should accom- 
 plish at Jerusalem.” Thus, then, they were spe- 
 cial witnesses for Christ, and so they will come 
 again and witness for Him in the time appointed. 
 
MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 163 
 
 The number of days we must take in a literal 
 sense ; here the 1,260 days and 3| days are the 
 days appointed for their work and death. It is 
 well to remember that many of the prophetic 
 numbers contain a double prophecy. Thus 
 1,260 here may be coincident with the treading- 
 down of Jerusalem by Mohammedism. But 
 whether it is or not, does not vitiate the literal 
 quantity, when applied to these two witnesses. 
 In the third place, they are called two olive 
 trees and two candlesticks standing before the 
 God of the whole earth. The figurative mean- 
 ing will be found by finding some passage where 
 two trees are mentioned and the interpretation 
 given — such a passage by Zechariah 4. Here the 
 prophet saw two olive trees and asked of the angel 
 the meaning ; and the angel said . “Knowest thou 
 not what these be?” And I said, “No, my 
 Lord.” Then said he, “ These are two 
 anointed ones that stand by the Lord of the 
 whole earth.” The simple meaning is, that the 
 two olive' trees mean two persons, who are in 
 heaven at present, but are anointed, that is, set 
 apart, selected for some distinct work for God. 
 
 Moses and Elijah evidently were anointed and 
 specially selected, for it is probable theyboth es- 
 caped death. The wonder connected with the dis- 
 appearance of Moses and the translation of Elijah 
 now finds some measure of explanation. None 
 doubt the translation of Elijah. John the Baptist 
 was not Elias, except he was to go before Christ 
 
164 
 
 MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 in the spirit and power of Elias ; in this sense 
 John stood for Elias. John the Baptist pre- 
 pared the way of Christ the first time, so will 
 Elias for Christ’s second coming. The record 
 of Moses’ s departure from this world is as mys- 
 terious as it is dramatic. But, certainly, neither 
 the mysterious nor the dramatic have any mean- 
 ing, excepting we allow something divinely spe- 
 cial. To die as other people, would mean nothing 
 on the line of specialties, but he did not so die. 
 He went from the people alive ; no one saw him 
 die or dead. He went up into Mount Horeb 
 and never returned. So, so far as the people 
 were concerned, he was to them a dead man, for 
 he went from them no more to return. The 
 word death in Hebrew has not less than six 
 meanings, one of which is simply to disappear. 
 This is the meaning that we must attach to the 
 death of Moses. Neither his grave, nor body 
 have ever been found. 
 
 There is a peculiar passage in the book of 
 Jude where “ Michael the Archangel, "When con- 
 tending with the devil, he disputed about the 
 body of Moses, durst not bring against him a 
 railing accusation, but said, ‘ The Lord rebuke 
 thee.' ” Now, Satan then had power over death 
 in some way Divinely permitted. Paul says 
 (Heb. ii, 14); speaking of Christ, “Forasmuch 
 then as the children are partakers of flesh and 
 blood, He also Himself likewise took part of the 
 same ; fliat through death He might destroy 
 
MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 165 
 
 him that had the power of death , that is, the 
 Devil.” When God was translating Moses, 
 passing him by death, Satan fought with Michael, 
 who was God’s messenger, to inflict the sting of 
 death on Moses, and although Michael carried 
 Moses on by death into the presence of God, 
 Satan durst not bring a railing accusation 
 against him. 
 
 Jude, in his epistle, probably quoted from 
 one of the now lost books of Revelation, which 
 was entitled, “ The Ascension or Assumption of 
 Moses the Servant of God.” The church father, 
 Origen, makes mention of this work, but like the 
 book and prophecies of Enoch, from which Jude 
 makes a quotation, it has been lost, they having 
 served their purpose. The fairest and most gen- 
 erous interpretation then is that Moses did not 
 die the ordinary death, but disappeared, was in 
 fact translated, anointed and set apart for a 
 special work in connection with his own people, 
 the Jews, in the days of the coming anti-Christ. 
 Thus, without any trouble, he could appear with 
 Elijah on the Mount of Transfiguration. And 
 it is worthy of note that before he disappeared 
 in Horeb — the sacred writer is mindful to tell us 
 “Moses was an hundred and twenty years old 
 when he died — his eye was not dim nor his natu- 
 ral force abated” Deut. xxiv.7. But supposing 
 Moses died naturally, there is nothing unreason- 
 able or irregular in concluding that God resur- 
 rected him as a mortal for future use. True he 
 
166 
 
 MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 will die again as a witness ; so there are in 
 heaven now eight persons who have died twice 
 in this world. Namely : 
 
 The child raised by Elijah — I Kings, xvii, 21. 
 
 The child of Elisha — II Kings, iv, 85. 
 
 The Moabite soldier who came to life on touch- 
 ing the bones of Elisha — II Kings, xiii, 21. 
 
 The daughter of Jarius — Luke viii, 55. 
 
 The widow’s son at Nain — Luke vii, 15. 
 
 Lazarus of Bethany — .John xi, 44. 
 
 Dorcas or Tabitha by Peter — Acts ix, 40. 
 
 Eutyclius by Paul — Acts xx, 10. 
 
 Anti-Christ will be a great electrician ; elec- 
 tricity by that time will be a fearful power iu 
 the hands of science. Edison with his genius 
 and marvelous discoveries, and others of like 
 gifts, will have perfected the use of this agent in 
 a wonderful degree. Anti-Christ will make use 
 of this power to cower his enemies and bring 
 them in fear-subjection. He will bring fire down 
 from Heaven. The two witnesses, however, will 
 be clothed with Divine power ; they will be able 
 to bring fire by a simple command — this they 
 both understood and used when on earth. 
 
 Moses called fire down upon the 250 rebellious 
 Korahthites, as we read in Numbers 16. Aliab, 
 the King of Israel, thought to punish and com- 
 pel the obedience of Elijah ; but God gave fire 
 from Heaven in answer to the prophet’s prayer. 
 So when Ahaziali sent a captain and fifty men to 
 bring Elijah into the king’s presence, they found 
 
MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 167 
 
 him sitting on the top of a hill and commanded 
 him to come down. “And Elijah answered and 
 said to the captain of fifty, If I be a man of God, 
 then let fire come down from Heaven, and con- 
 sume thee and thy fifty. And there came down 
 fire from Heaven, and consumed him and his 
 fifty.” — II Kings, 1. 10. Thus will these two 
 anointed ones be able to contend with anti- 
 Christ and all the powers of scientific infidels. 
 “If any man hurt these two witnesses, by the 
 very means used so shall they be killed.” 
 
 “ These have power to shut Heaven, that it 
 rain not in the days of their prophecy, and have 
 power over waters to turn them to blood.” To 
 whom would these gifts and attributes apply 
 better than to Elijah, who, in the days of the 
 wicked king Aliab, sealed the Heavens against 
 rain for three years and a half. And to Moses, 
 when contending with Pharoah, turned the sweet 
 flowing Nile into a stream of blood. What two 
 prophets had such a wide range of prophetic 
 energy and liberty as Moses and Elijah \ None. 
 Well may the Re vela tor say, then, of them, that 
 they can smite the earth with all manner of 
 plagues as often as they will. 
 
 By awful and sublime manifestations the 
 world shall see that God rules in the Heaven and 
 on the earth. Shall learn that anti-Christ is a 
 false Christ. Then shall fear and repentance 
 fall upon the people. The Jews shall be con- 
 vinced and converted and persuaded by the ap- 
 
168 
 
 MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 pearance of their beloved Moses. They shall 
 know of a truth that the Messiah has been, and 
 is waiting to come again. Referring to that 
 time the prophet Zechariah calls it a time of 
 trembling, the time of a terrible siege. But he 
 tells us that “The Lord also shall save the tents 
 of Judah first , that the glory of the house of 
 David, and the glory of the inhabitants of Jeru- 
 salem do not magnify themselves against 
 Judah.” Thus we learn that the Jews, who 
 have been so long despised and bereft of a king, 
 country and government, shall see through the 
 great mystery of Providence first. The house 
 of David is found in the royal family of Eng- 
 land. The Jews, seeing this, will invite, in con- 
 cert with all the inhabitants of Jerusalem, the 
 English government to take charge of the affairs. 
 
 “Then shall the children of Judah and the 
 children of Israel be gathered together and ap- 
 point themselves one Head .” — Hosea 1. 2. The 
 Jews will then be Christians. “ For they shall 
 look upon Him whom they have pierced, and 
 they shall mourn for Him, as one mournetli for 
 his only son.” 
 
 At this time the whole world will be amazed 
 and confounded at the destruction of anti- 
 Christ and his host. The Jews, the house of 
 David, and the Lost Tribes, Israel, the Saxons, 
 will hold a council in Jerusalem. David’ s house, 
 which God selected, and throne, both of which 
 the Almighty promised perpetuity to, shall be 
 
MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 169 
 
 found and recognized in tlie English throne and 
 royal family. The Saxon race shall distinctively 
 appear as long lost Israel. So that the Jews, 
 and David's house, and Israel, will unite and ac- 
 knowledge Christ as Lord and master. They 
 will make known to America, who stands for 
 Manasseli, and all the colonies, the decision of 
 said council ; all parties will see and accept and 
 federate for the world’s conquest and peace. 
 
 This federation of the ancient people, the 
 literal seed of Abraham, will cause jealousies 
 and alliances on the part or rest of the world, 
 excepting some portions of France, Austria and 
 Prussia. The beast, dragon and anti-Christ’s 
 force that will survive the shock of the two wit 
 nesses, will all unite for an onslaught upon Eng- 
 land, but especially Palestine. Russia, though 
 nominally Christian, will join the beast or Rom- 
 ish church. The dragon means the Pagan por- 
 tion of the world. Thus will be inaugurated 
 the battle of Armageddon, the issues of which 
 we are permitted to know through Revelation. 
 Then will the kingdoms of this woi'ld become the 
 kingdoms of our Lord and His Christ. 
 
 With many, and to many, these things are but 
 as dreams ; they are chimerical. But one thing 
 is certain ; the history of the church and Provi- 
 dence in the future are appallingly grand. Prov- 
 idence was grand in leading forth His people of 
 old from Egypt. But he will be no less grand 
 when He shall set His hand a second time to re- 
 cover His people as he has promised to do, 
 
170 
 
 MOSES AND ELIJAH, 
 
 “Behold, the days come, saith the Lord, that 
 I will raise unto David a righteous branch, and 
 a king shall reign and prosper, and shall execute 
 judgment and justice in the earth. In His days 
 Judah shall be saved, and Israel shall dwell 
 safely, and this is His name whereby He shall be 
 called, The Lord our Righteousness. (That is, 
 the rulers of God’s choice— a king — then in fact 
 by Divine right). Therefore, behold, the days 
 come, saith the Lord, that they shall no more 
 say, the Lord liveth which brought up the 
 children of Israel out of the land of Egypt. 
 But the Lord liveth which brought up and 
 which led the seed of the house of Israel out of 
 the North country, and from all countries 
 whither I had driven them, and they shall dwell 
 in their own land.” — Jer. 23. 6. 
 
 God has now one of the seed of David on the 
 throne, and He has a Jew doing her bidding, 
 executing her decrees over and for Israel. For, 
 though Israel were to be numerous and power- 
 ful, yet to David’s seed belongs the throne. 
 
 The recent Congress was but a forerunner of 
 the one yet to come. The crownless king, Dis- 
 raeli, who forced the Congress, is, perhaps, an 
 unconscious instrument in the hands of Provi- 
 dence. But whether he be or not, he is hasten- 
 ing on the day with lightning speed. Forth 
 from the recent Congress he goes, having once 
 again linked the destinies of England to the 
 Continent, which has been so strangely severed, 
 
MOSES AND ELIJAH. 
 
 171 
 
 till Russia, Italy, Austria, France and Spain, 
 might each test the other, and each find their 
 appointed place. Now, again, England pledges 
 herself a continental power — nay, more — an 
 Asiatic power. She will come forth from the 
 Congress the virtual ruler of Turkey, the owner 
 of Palestine. 
 
BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 Discourse, 13. 
 
 THE COMBATANTS ON BOTH SIDES— WHO “THE 
 KINGS OF THE EAST” ARE — THE GREAT 
 NAPOLEONIC IDEA — DISRAELI, LINCOLN AND 
 GRANT — ENGLAND’S POLICY IN TURKEY — 
 FUTURE WARS AND INTRIGUES — THE GREAT 
 BATTLE FIELD — GATHERING OF THE NATIONS 
 — EARTHQUAKES — JERUSALEM A SEAPORT. 
 
 Text— Rev. xvi. 16* 
 
 “ And he gathered them together into a place called \ in the Hebrew 
 tongue , Armageddon 
 
 u^2.HRISTIAN students and prophetic writers 
 are generally agreed on three things, touch- 
 ing this great event. First, that there is to be 
 such a decisive battle fought. Second, that it 
 will take place in some part of Palestine. Third, 
 that this great struggle will be final, the end of 
 war, the beginning of the Millennium morn. 
 
 In the Scriptures the contestants are pointed 
 out, as they rally under the standards of the 
 dragon, the beast and anti-Christ on one side, and 
 
BATTLE OF ABM AGEDDON. 
 
 173 
 
 on the other, under the standard of David, will 
 be the called , the chosen and the faithful. Or in 
 other words, the Ten Lost Tribes, as found 
 chiefly in the Saxon race, with all who sincerely 
 believe on the Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 In another sermon we point out to you the 
 plain fact of the existence of David’s throne and 
 David’s seed, as found and seen specially in the 
 throne of England. We there see how faith- 
 fully God has kept his promise to David and 
 his people. For God frequently told David 
 that his throne should be established unto all 
 generations, and of David’s seed there should 
 never be wanting a man to sit thereon. It is 
 the permanence, the grandeur and progressive 
 character of this throne and people that make it 
 a fitting type of Christ and His church. Nay, 
 more, it is on this throne that Christ now sits, 
 so far as this world goes ; and it is through this 
 people that He reigns, and He will and must 
 reign until He has conquered a universal peace. 
 It is a delusion too long entertained by the 
 church to think that David’s throne and seed 
 have not now, nor for centuries had an existence. 
 It is a delusion that we should not entertain for 
 a moment, to think that the Ten Tribes of Israel 
 are lost forever, or that their work or mission is 
 fulfilled. As surely as the two tribes, Judah 
 and Levi, now exist, fulfilling and ' filling in 
 the outlines of prophetic history, so surely are 
 Reuben, Simeon, Zebulun, Issachar, Dan, Gad, 
 
174 
 
 BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 Asher, Naphtali, Benjamin, Ephraim and Man- 
 asseh in existence, answering the purpose of an 
 all-seeing Providence. 
 
 Who are the kings of the East spoken of in 
 the Scriptures ? We answer, they are the royal 
 ones of the house of David. The word king, 
 both in Hebrew and Greek, means such. This 
 seed God chose, and made them royal by that 
 very selection. They have been away from their 
 own land, Palestine, wandering and dwelling in 
 the West. But God in Providence is preparing 
 a way for their return. In connection with the 
 pouring out of the sixth vial upon the great 
 river of the Euphrates, or upon Turkey, as 
 most writers agree, the waters are to dry up — 
 that is, Turkey is to decay, to be absorbed. 
 And why? “That the way of the kings of the 
 East might be prepared.” — Kev. xvi, 12. 
 
 These kings have been away from the East, 
 and their return is assured, and the preparation 
 for such return is to be seen at this time and in 
 connection with the decay of Turkey. If Tur- 
 key, as symbolized by the river Euphrates, is 
 drying up, then these kings must be advancing 
 eastward ; and so they are. 
 
 The crownless king, Disraeli, who, like many 
 other men God has raised up, is for these times 
 an index finger pointing out the way of Provi- 
 dence. He is a receptive agent of Divine force, 
 to the intent that he may interpret a divine pur- 
 pose. He may know, or he may not know, that 
 
BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 175 
 
 he is so directed of heaven. The prophets of 
 old were seldom permitted to interpret or un- 
 derstand their own prophecies. If they asked, 
 like Daniel, the meaning, they were told to “go 
 their way, for often times the words were closed 
 up and sealed until the time of the end.” No 
 wonder this man against all England, nearly, 
 and to the amazement of all the world, proclaims 
 the Queen of England the Empress of India, for 
 the way of the kings of the East must be pre- 
 pared. 
 
 Napoleon Bonaparte’s grand idea was to pre- 
 pare the way of the kings of the East and make 
 himself and his descendants these kings. ‘ ‘ Con - 
 quer England and the world is ours,” he said. 
 But when his secret and well prepared assault 
 on England was revealed and frustrated by a 
 train of Providential events, he hit upon another 
 plan to get possession of Palestine. Seventy 
 years ago he invited all the leading Jews of the 
 world to a secret council in Paris ; he wished 
 them to aid him in getting possession of Pales- 
 tine. He pretended to want their return. He gave 
 them certain privileges and labored to procure 
 more from the other nations ; he did much for 
 the Jews in enlarging their liberties and taking 
 away from them the curse of society. The one idea 
 that is distinctly Napoleonic, is to possess Pal- 
 estine. The late Napoleon had his idea, and in 
 his day, this idea had become a part of France ; 
 so much so, that France thought herself to be 
 
176 
 
 BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 then and now, the real protector of Palestine. 
 It was for this idea that she allied with England 
 and Turkey in the Crimean war. It was to keep 
 Russia back from possessing the holy places. 
 Not till France was weakened could England 
 advance on her way East rapidly ; so Germany 
 was used to destroy her prestige, and cause her 
 to stand aside till England proceeds on her way 
 homeward. 
 
 It was a comely sight, some five years ago, 
 to see two Jews closeted together making a 
 secret bargain ; one had power, the other had 
 money. The man of power asked the man of 
 money to lend him twenty million dollars ; it 
 was done. At once the man of power purchases 
 with this twenty million part of his fatherland 
 back again — the Suez canal. This very canal is 
 on the boundary of the Land of Palestine as 
 given to Abraham centuries ago. By this very 
 route the old Patriarch entered the Promised 
 Land. It was fitting, indeed, that this should 
 be the first piece purchased back. No one knew 
 save those directly interested. England mur- 
 mured and France protested, but the thing was 
 done. Poor France, bleeding and divided, could 
 do but little, for Disraeli and Rothschilds had 
 done the work. The way of the kings of the 
 East must be prepared. So on they go. A 
 man who executes a Divine purpose is always 
 strong. Abraham Lincoln, in the history of our 
 country, was so chosen and led of God. The 
 
BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 177 
 
 politicians, and statesmen, and generals, and 
 many of the people were against him at first, 
 but the Lord was with him, so he marched on to 
 victory, the country following in the wake. 
 And though dead, not forgotten, the country 
 and the civilized world are marching on after 
 him and now they have nearly overtaken him. 
 Lincoln’s ideas and the country’s are nearly 
 equal. A man led of God is generally a good 
 distance behind, and the people led by such a 
 man are equally as far behind him as he is behind 
 God. But this nation and Abraham Lincoln 
 are now one, and in those things in which they 
 once were divided they are a unit, with more 
 than the honored Lincoln, for they are a unit 
 with God and Providence. Thus follows the 
 English nation in the wake of Disraeli, and the 
 world is coming on behind, and the day will 
 come when all will be a unit. It does not shock 
 our idea of human honesty much when we learn 
 that this crownless king played a double game 
 with Russia and Turkey. It is intensely Jew- 
 ish, but, if it were only Jewish, then it would 
 be very detestable ; it is more, it is Divine in 
 part. “Had the princes of this world known 
 they would not have crucified the Prince of 
 Glory.” Had the princes of the late Berlin 
 congress known the double game being played 
 by one of the quietest of their number, they 
 would not have done as they did. Turkey in 
 Asia was given over to England’s protection, 
 
178 
 
 BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDOX. 
 
 aye, yes, that included Palestine. The island 
 of Cyprus is given over entirely — surely the way 
 of the kings of the East is being grandly pre- 
 pared. 
 
 Why didn’t the Congress hand over to Eng- 
 land’ s protection Turkey in Europe ? For rea- 
 sons good and sufficient. Turkey in Europe 
 will be the cause of much strife, of several wars 
 and of strange alliances, hence it would not 
 have done for Israel-England to be mixed up 
 with it. Constantinople, alone, of European 
 Turkey, England will keep. Israel is to be 
 much preserved from war, until the great battle 
 of Armageddon comes on. Against that time 
 she will have to husband her strength and re- 
 sources. It is marvelous now, to think that 
 what the Congress settled as belonging to Eng- 
 land, none dispute — all is peace. But Russia’s 
 share and Austria’ s are in arms. Servia, Greece, 
 Roumania, and all the Turkish Provinces, rebel, 
 and are in a state of disquietude, that portends 
 war and strife again in a few years. But Eng- 
 land will have nothing to do with it, excepting 
 that Russia and Austria, with the consent of Ger- 
 many, Italy, and France, are to set a precedent 
 for England, which in a few years she will need. 
 It is plain that if Russia and Austria can force 
 by arms the condition of the Berlin Congress, 
 England will be at liberty to do the same 
 without any interference, even from France. 
 The Congress handed over to England’s keeping, 
 
BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 179 
 
 Turkey. England then can make Turkey do 
 her bidding by force of arms sustained by the 
 very precedent already set. Thus will Israel- 
 England open up Palestine for Christian settle- 
 ment. The Moliammeds will murmur and re- 
 sist, to have the Holy Places taken from them, 
 but no matter ; England, when the time comes, 
 will enforce it. It is just here that Turkey and 
 England will dispute, and in each dispute, Eng- 
 land will find a reason for drawing the lines a 
 little tighter around poor Turkey. 
 
 The contestants on one side, at the great bat- 
 tle of Armageddon, you remember, are the 
 Dragon, the Beast and Anti-Christ. Now what 
 people is represented by the term Dragon ? We 
 answer, the Pagan nations, and authorities, just 
 as the Chinese have on their standard to-day, a 
 dragon, as we have the eagle. The Mohamme- 
 dans, Hindoos, Brahmins, Buddhist and all 
 Pagan idolaters, are summed up in the word 
 Dragon. At present, England is tolerant with 
 the subjects and adherents of these different 
 worshipers and religions, but the time will come 
 when she will not longer tolerate the same — thus 
 will they arrange themselves against her in the 
 battle of Armageddon. This will come to pass 
 as the gradual destruction of Mormonism in our 
 country. This system has been fortified by law 
 — now laws are being arranged against it. It is 
 now only tolerated, and in a short time it will 
 be wiped out of existence 
 
180 
 
 BATTLE OE ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 The final battle referred to in the text is to 
 occur at a place called in the Hebrew tongue 
 Armageddon, the literal meaning of which 
 is at the Mount of Megiddo. In olden times 
 there was a city called Megiddon ; it stood in 
 what is now called the great plains of Esdraelon, 
 a plain that lies midway between the sea of 
 Galilee and the Mediterranean. It was also 
 called Jezreel. The prophet Hosea speaks of 
 this place, battle and time, all by this one word. 
 Referring to the time when the Children of 
 Judah and of Israel are gathered together under 
 one head in their own land, he says: “For 
 great shall be the day of Jezreel.” Hos. i. 11. 
 It is spoken of in the Scriptures and history, as 
 the valley of Jelaoshophat, because here Jehos- 
 liophat, the king of Judah, gained a great vic- 
 tory, for here the Lord fought against the ene- 
 mies of Israel, as he will in the coming battle. 
 Joel iii. 12. says, referring to this coming strug- 
 gle, “ Let the heathen be waked up and come to 
 the valley of Jelioshophat, for there will I sit 
 to judge all the heathen round about.” 
 
 There is one name given to this time and bat- 
 tle that is very significant and striking. Have 
 you ever noticed it 1 If not let me call your at- 
 tention to it. It is called “ That great day of 
 God Almighty ,” by John in the chapter of the 
 text. The day of the Lord of Hosts by Isaiah. 
 Ezekiel 30, iii. “ Howl ye ! Woe worth the day, 
 for the day of the Lord is near ; it shall be the 
 
BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 181 
 
 time of the heathen.” And Joel says, “Multi- 
 tudes, multitudes in the valley of decision, for 
 the day of the Lord is near in the valley of de- 
 cision.” By the prophets Amos, Obadiali, 
 Zephaniah, Zechariah, Malaclii, and Paul and 
 Peter, it is called the day of the Lord. 
 
 You ask if this battle may not have taken 
 place. We answer no. Of such a battle we 
 have no record. Again it will be the end of 
 war — the final overthrow of Paganism, the Beast 
 and Anti-Christ. Malachi says, “Behold, I 
 will send you the prophet Elijah before the 
 coming of that great and dreadful day of the 
 Lord.” Elijah has not yet been as a witness. 
 At the time of this great battle nature is to take 
 a wonderful part. As when Christ was on the 
 cross the sun darkened, the rocks rent, the 
 mountains shook ; so in connection with this 
 battle, there shall be some strange wonders. 
 Earthquakes, thundering, lightning, hail and 
 fire. The Mount of Olives will divide, the val- 
 ley of the Dead Sea will fill with water and join 
 to the Mediterranean, Jerusalem will become a 
 seaport, an appointed center from which, being 
 central to all the world, will go forth the ships 
 of the Lord. The city of Jerusalem, between 
 this time and that, will be considerably enlarged, 
 then it will divide into three parts. At the time 
 of this dividing John says, “That the cities of 
 the nations are to fall — London, Paris, Berlin, 
 Rome, Petersburg!!, and many others, that all 
 
182 
 
 BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 may turn to Jerusalem, the capital appointed of 
 heaven.” 
 
 If you wish to know more of the particulars 
 of this day, read the Prophets, study what John 
 the Revelator says, under the sixth vial and 
 sixth seal. With awful grandeur, and with ter- 
 rible majesty, have the sacred writers set forth 
 this day and time. 
 
 That this day will come, who will deny ? 
 Look at the world ripening for this day. Here, 
 in our own land, as well as others, the forces 
 are maturing, the agents are at work. Many of 
 the events of the past year we were permitted to 
 forecast, by looking into the future through the 
 prophets, and onward yet we look. And the 
 events coming are neither less in number, merit 
 or force, than those passed. Keep the events 
 of Prophecy in their proper order, lest they 
 confuse you. The Jews, and Ten Lost Tribes, 
 are to be found, and possess Palestine, before 
 this battle. Anti-Christ is to appear. The two 
 witnesses, Moses and Elijah, are to appear. 
 And Jesus, our beloved Master, will not come 
 till the world is settled long in perpetual peace 
 — till the house is prepared for the bride, then 
 shall He come. But with lightning speed events 
 are crowding on along the ages. The accumula- 
 tive forces of centuries are pressing hard upon 
 time present. The time of the end is near — not 
 the end of time, but the time appointed of God 
 in which certain great things are to be accom- 
 
BATTLE OF ARMAGEDDON. 
 
 183 
 
 plished. Eighteen hundred years ago John 
 cried out : ‘ ‘ Loose the four angels which are 
 bound in the great river Euphrates. And the 
 four angels were loosed, which were prepared 
 for an hour, and a day, and a month, and a 
 year.” — Rev. ix:14. 
 
 The Turkish power originated on the banks of 
 the Euphrates. It first was divided into four 
 Sultanies, namely, Bagdad, Aleppo, Damascus 
 and Cesarea. These are typified under four 
 angels. Their time was to be 396 years and a 
 fraction — an hour, day, month and year. These, 
 taking a day for a year, 365 for the year, thirty 
 for the month, one for the day, and we have 
 396. So from the taking of Bagdad by the 
 Turks in 1057, which was the overthrow of the 
 Saracens, until the capture of Constantinople in 
 1453, which overthrew the Greek empire, we 
 have just 396 years. And the time for the dry- 
 ing up of Turkey is at hand, and so it comes to 
 pass. 
 
 Dear friends, how wonderful are the dealings 
 of our God. Can we shut our eyes to His di- 
 vine revelation. Let us be wise in the day of 
 grace, taking heed to the sure word of prophecy, 
 as unto a light that shineth in a dark place. 
 The world indeed is dark, and all confusion. 
 But His word shows unto us order in all this con- 
 fusion ; blessed be His name. More next Sun- 
 day evening. 
 
ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 Discourse, 14. 
 
 THE FORCES IN THE BATTLE — TIME OF ITS OC- 
 CURRENCE — MISTAKES OF ADVENTISTS — A 
 CHURCH “STRIKE” WANTED — THE HARD 
 TIMES AFTER 1882 — HISTORY OF THE WORLD 
 TILL 1935 — hine’s THEORY. 
 
 Text— Rev* xvii. 14* 
 
 “ These shall make war with the Lamb , and the Lamb shall 
 overcome them ; for Lie is Lord of lords and King of 
 kings; and they that are with Him are called , and 
 chosen, and faithful 
 
 (JjTj^AST Sunday evening we considered the 
 subject of the great battle of Armageddon. 
 This evening we will take up the same subject 
 for further consideration. This battle, we learn, 
 is to be very terrible, such a one as the world 
 has not had. Fearful as some of the wars of the 
 past have been, this will overshadow them all in 
 skill, fierceness, number, slaughter, devastation 
 and wide-spread ruin. It will, in some respects, 
 
ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 185 
 
 be like one of the wars of olden times. For in 
 this struggle God is again to take a direct part, 
 as He did for His people Israel and Judah in 
 times of old. Again shall the forces of nature 
 do battle for God and His people ; again 
 shall they be full of instinctive revenge. Hear 
 us, and believe us, Denis Kearney, Providence 
 will then “pool the issues” of the called, the 
 chosen , and the faithful. The called are the 
 Jews, the chosen are Israelites, and the faithful 
 embrace all of every nation who believe in 
 Christ. Then many will wade in pools of blood 
 and perish. The birds of prey are to hold high 
 carnival on the dead bodies of the slain. The 
 spirit of Satan, that now worketh in the chil- 
 dren of disobedience, will pool the issues of hell 
 and death in the hosts of the dragon , beast and 
 false prophet. For though these three powers 
 are diverse in their aims, professions and in- 
 tents, yet we learn from many passages of the 
 divine book that they will join hands and agree 
 upon a common policy, federating together that 
 they may contend with the called, the chosen, 
 and the faithful. “And I saw three unclean 
 spirits like frogs come out of the mouth of the 
 dragon, and out of the mouth of the beast, and 
 out of the mouth of the false prophet. For they 
 are the spirits of devils working miracles, which 
 go forth unto the kings of the earth and of the 
 whole world, to gather them to the battle of 
 that great day of God Almighty.” — Rev. xvi. 
 
186 ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 13, 14. Here indeed will be a pooling of the is- 
 sues, a pooling that will divide the whole world 
 into two forces or parties. 
 
 Now the canvas has begun, preparations are 
 going on, party lines are being drawn, powers 
 are concentrating, and men are rallying under 
 their respective standards, getting the world 
 ripe and ready for the coming generations, into 
 whose hands the destinies of that day will be 
 cast. Few of us now living can personally take 
 part in that final battle, excepting as we do so 
 by impressing the unborn millions with our 
 ideas. Like as David prepared the material for 
 the building of the temple, and his son Solomon 
 carried forward the same, so the work of this 
 generation is simply preparatory, and that of 
 the coming will be executive. 
 
 Several wars will take place before that of 
 Armageddon, which in their nature will be fierce 
 and terrible. Still these will all be preparatory 
 —leading on to the day of decision and the bat- 
 tle final. On this point many err, and their error 
 lias a pernicious influence on the church and 
 the world. They interpret the preparatory 
 signs, as if they were final, hence the end with 
 such is too near. A sincere anxiety takes pos- 
 session of their soul, which utterly unfits them 
 to judge aright the signs of the times and tokens 
 of Providence. Thus were a portion of the Ad- 
 vent church thrown into confusion the 8tli of 
 last July, because they had fixed upon the 
 
ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 187 
 
 seventh as the time for the ending of the world. 
 And human folly and haste will repeat itself 
 again on the lOtli of April next, because another 
 portion of the Advent brethren have fixed 
 upon the 9th of April as the time of the end. 
 It is a wonder the first did not take the 4th of 
 July instead of the seventh, for then a stranger 
 might think the end was nigh in some of our 
 cities ; or why didn’ t the other party select the 
 1st of April, for no doubt it would have proved 
 a more propitious day. But thus it is, and will 
 be again, before the appointed time of Heaven 
 comes. Man is a creature of haste and sudden 
 impulse ; especially so in his religious experi- 
 ence. Kings and nations, churches and sects, 
 have labored hard in times past to force the is- 
 sues of Providence and give speed and certainty 
 to times and events. 
 
 The prophecies affecting our day are clear ; so 
 much so, that he who runs may read, if need be. 
 But an impatient activity urges men on, bedaz- 
 ling their eyes, which at once unnerves and un- 
 fits them for reading or judging. “In your 
 patience possess ye your souls,” said the blessed 
 Master to his disciples of old, and not less 
 through them unto us. 
 
 “Order is Heaven’s first law,” it has been 
 said ; and surely order pervades the prophecies. 
 But the pulpits in general over-ride this order, 
 and are not slow to malign such men as Edward 
 Hine, of Liverpool, England, when the fact is, 
 
188 ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 tliat his theory of the prophecies and mode of 
 interpretation are vastly more natural, respon- 
 sive and reasonable, than the ill-adjusted, un- 
 natural and non-responsive system of current 
 theology. A person is under obligation to use 
 that key for the unlocking of prophecy which 
 fits the best, and that responds to Providential 
 events the most natural, without regard to the 
 antiquated systems and mode of church, sect, or 
 college theology. Hine’s theory, as it is called 
 sometimes, is as much superior to the old sys- 
 tem of interpretation, as the railway Pullman 
 car is to the rickety old stage coach. 
 
 The Anglo-Saxon Israel theory neither de- 
 stroys nor introduces any new principle, but 
 discovers and applies that which had been long 
 hidden. The introduction of steam and electri- 
 city did not destroy or produce any new princi- 
 ple, but simply discovered and applied, in an 
 improved form, that which had been in the 
 world from Adam down till now. 
 
 As men in science, mechanics and practical 
 life, throw overboard men and things of the 
 past, so should we in theology, church life and 
 experience, when we can do better. Reverence 
 for person, and respect for ideas, should not en- 
 slave us. Let us move on, doing better and 
 better. Wedo not care to believe all the theology 
 of a Martin Luther. When we can make an ad- 
 vance on men, or theories, we should do so. 
 Bacon and Newton are now in part rejected, 
 
ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. ISO 
 
 without intending, or in fact doing them any 
 dishonor or disrespect. So are Calvin and 
 Wesley, on the same principle, by every good 
 theologian. If a theory be advanced that opens 
 up the Scriptures, and especially the prophecies, 
 better than those before existing, let the pulpit 
 accept it, throwing aside its mawkishness and 
 age-intrenclied stupidity. I have no hesitation 
 to say, after over twenty-five years of experience 
 with preachers and pulpit, that the majority of 
 preachers are lazy and indifferent in study. 
 For this reason many of them are deterred from 
 examining any new theory. Many have said 
 to me, and written to me, that if they accepted 
 the Lost Tribe theory it would destroy nearly 
 all their old sermons, and necessitate the 
 making of new ones — a work they were not 
 willing to undertake. It will, therefore, be a 
 long time before the pulpit is reformed. These 
 days there are many strikes. While in Canada, 
 on my vacation, I agreed to lecture for a church 
 choir, on the Prophet Jeremiah’s visit to Ire- 
 land. But some preachers banded together and 
 stopped it ; and, in consequence of it, the choir 
 struck and refused to sing the following Sunday. 
 Passing by this strike, I really wish the laymen 
 would strike and call the pulpit to an account 
 and rouse it from its lethargy, and demand that 
 it should untrammel itself and be free and equal 
 to the age and demand. I have met with 
 miserly persons who didn’ t believe in beautiful 
 
190 ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 clrarclies, or the missionary cause, or any cause 
 indeed, that wanted money. They would argue 
 for plainness and so on. The secret of their 
 
 ideas on these matters was to he found 
 m tneir stinginess, and their love of money. 
 They advocated such theories because it saved 
 them from contributing. Like a man I met 
 with on my vacation tour who said that he saved 
 forty dollars a year by pretending to be angry 
 with the minister or some of the deacons^ 
 when they came round collecting money. Some 
 ministers, no doubt the majority of them, talk 
 about holding on to the old landmarks and be- 
 ing orthodox for the very reason that to make 
 a move implies labor, which they are not wil- 
 ling to give, hence they prate about orthodoxy 
 and landmarks as a pretext to cover over their 
 indifference. He is the most orthodox who 
 searches after the truth and keeps up with the 
 age. “Prove all things, hold fast that which is 
 good,” says Paul. These pretended followers of 
 Paul say : “ Prove nothing, hold fast what you 
 have got.” 
 
 It is as plain as A, B, C, that the Bible 
 teaches the return of the Jews and Ten Lost 
 Tribes of Israel to the Land of Palestine. Also, 
 that after they are settled in this land anti-Christ 
 appears. The dragon and beast are already in 
 existence, but anti-Christ is not ; the spirit of 
 anti-Christ is. When Israel and Judah are set- 
 tled and prosperous in the old fatherland, then 
 
ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 191 
 
 is to come on the battle of Armageddon. Thank 
 heaven! that though the struggle. will be awful, 
 it will be final, and victory will turn on the 
 Lord’s side. Then will be set up a kingdom 
 that shall endure in abiding peace and prosper- 
 ity for at least a thousand years. The world 
 will nestle in regaling plenty and great assur- 
 ance. This kingdom is to be set up in the lat- 
 ter days of the four kingdoms spoken of by 
 Daniel. By this we understand that these 
 kingdoms will have their day, and by succession, 
 after a time, run out. These kingdoms — namely, 
 Babylon, Persia, Greece and Rome — are now 
 disappearing. Rome, politically, is gone, Persia 
 will soon be absorbed, also Greece. Babylon, 
 being continued in the empire of Russia, has yet 
 a glorious future before it for the next fifty 
 years or so, then she will disappear to rise no 
 more. The cry will go forth, “ Babylon is fall- 
 en.” In Nebuchadnezzar’s image, you will re- 
 member that the stone cut out of the mountain 
 began to destroy the metallic image upward, 
 hence these kingdoms will disappear in reverse 
 order to their origin. First Rome, which has 
 gone, next Greece, which is nearly gone, then 
 Persia, and then Russia. The new kingdom 
 will fill the world. Already it foreshadows the 
 outlines of possession by its immense territory 
 of to-day. Then a scion of the house of David 
 shall be enthroned in Jerusalem. All the other 
 great capitals will have been destroyed. It is 
 
192 ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 surprisingly grand to read of tliat day, king and 
 kingdom. Let me read to you a few verses from 
 Jeremiah, twenty-third chapter: “Behold, the 
 days come, saith the Lord, that I will raise unto 
 David a righteous branch, and a king shall reign 
 and prosper, and shall execute judgment and 
 justice in the earth. In his days Judah shall be 
 saved, and Israel shall dwell safely ; and this is 
 Ills name whereby he shall be called : The Lord 
 our Righteousness. Therefore behold, the days 
 come, saith the Lord, that they shall no more say, 
 the Lord liveth which brought up the children 
 of Israel out of the Land of Egypt ; but the 
 Lord liveth which brought up and which led the 
 seed of the house of Israel out of the north 
 country, and from all countries whither I had 
 driven them, and they shall dwell in their own 
 land.” The words, “ that day,” are often used, 
 and if we desire to know when that day is, 
 we have data in the great fact that it is the other 
 side of Armageddon, and Armageddon is the 
 other side of the settlement of Israel and Judah 
 in Palestine. 
 
 I wish, just here, to correct many of you as 
 well as some of the public journals. Of late I 
 have frequently seen it stated in the papers that 
 I predicted the end of the world in 1882 . And 
 many persons have actually asked if I did really 
 think so. The truth of the matter is, in my ser- 
 mons on the great pyramid I pointed out to you 
 the remarkable fact that the grand gallery was 
 
ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 193 
 
 1,882 inches long. Beginning with the birth of 
 the Saviour these inches stand for years. This 
 gallery suddenly ends, excepting that it is con- 
 tinued in a narrow passage, the narrowest in 
 the whole building, for fifty-three inches. Then 
 comes the King's chamber, which, before you 
 enter, you pass under a portcullis in the form 
 of an olive leaf. In this chamber all is equal, 
 qniet and central. Now, what I believe this 
 Pillar of Witness in Egypt teaches, (see Is. xix. 
 19,) is that in 1882 the whole world will enter 
 upon a time of great trouble, war, pestilence 
 and famine, and for fifty- three years these 
 troubles will continue more or less. Then about 
 1935 will occur the battle of Armageddon, which 
 will be the finishing touch, the end of wars. I 
 arrive at this, when I follow the teachings of 
 the Pyramid, by adding 1,882 and 53, which 
 gives me 1,935. Even then the world will not 
 end, but only begin the Millennium morn, wliicjq 
 will last for a thousand years or more. 
 
 Now corresponding to these facts are the 
 events of Providence. As when spring is nigh 
 we know by certain signs, so we know from the 
 Scriptures, Providence and pyramidal teaching, 
 where we stand and the season we are in. “ O ye 
 hypocrites, ye can discern the face of the sky 
 but can ye not discern the signs of the times V 
 said Jesus to the proud and critical Pharisees 
 and learned and doubting Sadducees. These 
 parties affected to be specially wise and discrim- 
 
194 ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 inating in their knowledge of the times and sea- 
 sons, and interpreting the prophets and writings 
 of Moses. Yet their conduct betrayed their ig- 
 norance, for they saw not the end of that grand 
 old prophetic age nor the fading symbolism of 
 the temple, nor the departing glory and decay 
 of their nation. They knew not the fullness of 
 time in which they lived ; thought it bulged out 
 like a mountain. They did not know that one 
 time had ended , another time begun , for they 
 still dated their documents 4032 of the world, 
 when it was the year of our Lord and their 
 Lord 32. 
 
 The antediluvians stand condemned because 
 they were willingly ignorant of the Providen- 
 tial tokens and signs of the times. They set at 
 naught the teachings and warnings of Noah, 
 and in exulting pride they rejected the idea of a 
 special Providence. Their faith, like many in 
 this day, was planted and nourished by the laws 
 of nature and the analogous continuance of the 
 same, not accepting the doctrine of a Divine 
 Providence. They cried aloud, “Where is the 
 promise of His coming ? For since the fathers 
 fell asleep, all things continue as they were from 
 the beginning of the creation.” 
 
 Do you, like the Jews of old, demand. more 
 signs? when those given you are not understood ? 
 or, if understood, they are undervalued? The 
 prophets have been lavish in portraying the 
 calamities of the last days , or the times into 
 
ARMAGEDDON AND TIIK PYRAMID. 
 
 195 
 
 which we are entering. For the words last 
 days are the few years preceding the battle of 
 Armageddon. The calamities of these days 
 are of four kinds : First, social disorders ; 
 second, religious feuds and wars ; third, won- 
 derful political disturbances ; fourth, temporal 
 or physical disasters. Of the social condition 
 of these last days, Paul instructs us : “This 
 know, also, that in the last days perilous times 
 shall come.” Then he groups together nineteen 
 immoral attributes of the social state of these 
 last days: “ Men shall be lovers of their own 
 selves ; covetous, boasters, proud blasphemers, 
 disobedient (to parents especially), unthankful, 
 unholy, without natural affection, truce break- 
 ers, false accusers, incontinent, fierce despisers, 
 traitors, heady, high-minded lovers of pleasure 
 more than God, formal in religion;” 2d Timo- 
 thy, iii. What, we ask, will be the state of 
 society when the social condition becomes such ? 
 
 The religious feuds and persecutions of the 
 last days we can but faintly conceive. It was 
 terrible when the beast, two hundred years ago, 
 held sway. The inquisition, the rack, the stake, 
 and all the horrors of a wise age will be brought 
 to bear. For in these days to come, the beast 
 will be joined by anti-Christ — who will burn 
 with rage, and vent his displeasure on Christ’ s 
 followers. Also the barbarism and savage dis- 
 position of the pagans will be let loose. Then 
 will the dragon tear and destroy. This will, 
 
196 ARMAGEDDON AND THE PYRAMID. 
 
 indeed, be a day or time of visitation. The 
 political disturbances will be terrible. Nation 
 against nation plotting and deceiving ; internal 
 strife and outward dangers. These are of a kind 
 to appall one in reading them. Then come the 
 temporal or physical evils. These are to be a 
 horrible train of ills in the form of pestilence, 
 famine and earthquakes. The plague of yellow 
 fever is as nought to some of the scourges that 
 will then go forth. Gibbon, the historian, tells 
 of a plague that swept away two- thirds of 
 Europe and Asia. At that time the dead lay 
 unburied by thousands. In Constantinople, for 
 three months, five and even ten thousand per- 
 sons died daily. The famines in India and 
 China give us some idea of those yet to come. 
 Of the earthquakes, such as have been, will be 
 repeated in increasing terror, violence and de- 
 struction. To all these shall be added fire from 
 heaven, hail, whirlwinds and floods. These are 
 times that will try men’s souls. Read the Pro- 
 phets for yourselves, and range yourselves on 
 the Lord’s side. 
 
WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 Discourse , 1 4. 
 
 PURPOSE OF THE FLOOD — THE ABRAHAMIC CUR- 
 RENT — RENDING MOUNT OLIVET — FORMER 
 EARTHQUAKES — BOUNDARIES OF PALESTINE 
 — DAN AND GAD TO GUARD THE u GATES 55 — 
 GAD THE SCOTCHMAN — THE FUTURE JERUSA- 
 LEM — THE DEAD SEA AND MEDITERRANEAN 
 TO BE JOINED — MISTAKE OF SPIRITUALIZING 
 EVERYTHING. 
 
 Text— Zacliariali xiv. 4. 
 
 “ And His feet shall stand in that day upon the Mount of Olives, 
 which is before Jerusalem on the East, and the Mount of 
 Olives shall cleave in the midst thereof toward the east and 
 toward the west, and there shall be a very great valley; and 
 half the mountain shall remove toward the north , and half 
 of it toward the south.” 
 
 ® OME four thousand years ago the earth was 
 washed with the regenerating waters of a 
 terrible flood. Millions were suddenly cut off, 
 with their handiwork and antediluvian civiliza- 
 tion. The swelling floods subsided, and the 
 
J9S WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 God-avenging waters retired to their appointed 
 place. The earth again stood forth in virgin 
 strength, lonely, bare and citiless, but with a 
 potency and promise inviting and grand. Across 
 these swelling floods one craft had been safely 
 borne ; in it was stored the seed-stock of a new 
 world of man and beast. The destruction had 
 been complete and terrible. If we credit Dr. 
 Gurney and others who have written on this 
 subject, the population far exceeded the inhab- 
 itants of to-day. But whether they did or did 
 not, we know that many must have perished, 
 and civilization must have been hurled back to 
 a primitive beginning. No doubt the present 
 seas and oceans cover over the ruins of that age. 
 Elipliaz, the Temanite, when addressing Job, 
 said: “Hast thou marked the old way, which 
 wicked men have trodden, which were cut down 
 out of time ? w7iose foundation was overflown 
 with a flood?” Now it is not unreasonable to 
 suppose that in this and every other great 
 change in nature God has a purpose — a design 
 agreeable with His own exalted character. He 
 is too wise to err, and too good to be unkind. 
 The flood came for the same reason that He only 
 gave Adam one wife. And what was that rea- 
 son ? It was that He might fill the world with 
 a godly seed. “And did not he make one? 
 Yet had he the residue of the spirit. And where- 
 fore one? That He might seek a godly seed.” 
 —Mai. ii. 15. The same spirit which made one 
 
WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 199 
 
 Eve could have made twenty for the residue of 
 the spirit was with Him. It was in the interest 
 of morality and godliness that the flood came. 
 
 When this design began to fail of being accom- 
 plished by the increased wickedness of thepost- 
 deluvians, then God called Abram, and through 
 Abraham and his seed designed that this pur- 
 pose should flow on and be fulfilled. Through 
 this Abraliamic channel flow all the purposes of 
 a Divine Providence in this world. Through 
 his seed all the nations of the earth are to be 
 blessed. The children of Abraham are the ap- 
 pointed and divinely authorized agents of God. 
 Through them, as primary, he has, and is, and 
 will evangelize the world. Abraham stands to 
 the generations of earth as the gulf stream to 
 Europe and the isles of the sea. This gulf 
 stream is our largest river ; being the longest, 
 broadest and deepest. Its bottom and banks are 
 cold water. Compressed by the straits of Florida 
 it rushes forth to warm and replenish the earth 
 and isles of the sea. *So the forces of a Divine 
 Providence compressed in Abraham go forth to 
 bless mankind. The gulf stream is water in 
 water, and Abraham’ s seed are men among men. 
 Providence is at once clear and intelligible, and 
 history is at once plain, reasonable and harmon- 
 ious, when interpreted in harmony with the 
 Abrahamic covenant. The scattering and re- 
 turning of Israel and Judah to Palestine, and 
 the intervening history, from the time of disper- 
 
WONDERS OR THE EUTUKE, 
 
 yoo 
 
 sion to the return, is dear as noon-day. Their 
 location, oppression, prosperity and victories, 
 have long been foretold by prophets inspired of 
 God. 
 
 Through all the changes in nature God has a 
 design. He prepared the world for Adam and 
 his seed, and He did so by some wonderful up- 
 heaving and overturning ; this scientists will 
 admit. This world, in its present shape and 
 condition, indicates fierce and protracted strug- 
 gles. The outlines of strange and sublime revo- 
 lutions are imprinted on her rock-ribbed bosom. 
 Look at her cloud-capped mountains, her snow- 
 crowned peaks, her wild and rocky wastes, her 
 barren plains and sandy deserts, her fruitful 
 hills and luxuriant valleys, her mighty oceans 
 and swelling seas, her inland lakes and rolling 
 rivers ; these tell us of a time long ago — of the 
 time when the Mighty One went forth to work 
 a work, to build a house and make a home for 
 His creature man. And as it was necessary in 
 the preparatory stage to’ tune nature to the 
 coming man, so all along through the history of 
 the centuries we find nature holding a subordin- 
 ate relation to man. The world is not run on 
 one principle and man on another, but both are 
 permeated by a divine force and lead on to a 
 divine end. All things are ours, and we are 
 Christ’s and Christ is God’s ; this is the estab- 
 lished order of subordination. Most certainly 
 it cannot be unscientific in the Author of nature 
 
WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 201 
 
 to make the same His messenger for good or 
 evil. It is not unscientific to throw a line from 
 the shore to a ship in distress, even though 
 thrown from the mouth of a cannon, nor is it 
 counted unscientific to use that same cannon in 
 war to destroy men. 
 
 The earthquake spoken of in the text is, in- 
 deed, a small affair in comparison to some that 
 have occurred in this world ; and if the same 
 God be living now, as then, surely he can rend 
 in twain the little mountain of Olivet. And if 
 we grant to the infidel scientist of to-day the 
 fact that there is no God, still the thing 
 prophesied of is neither unreasonable or impos- 
 sible, because what has been may be again, and 
 as the demand in this case is small in compari- 
 son to what has been, surely this thing may 
 come to pass. In times past Providence and 
 the wants of the church have been timely aided 
 by convulsion in nature, and if they were only 
 so accidentally, why then accidentally they may 
 all agree again. To the scientist, especially the 
 geologist, there can be no great difficulty in 
 crediting the miracles of the text when we think 
 of the successive revolutions that have taken 
 place. Fires and floods, and earthquakes, have 
 done sublime service in the past, whether we 
 credit the same to nature or to God. That an 
 earthquake, or any peculiar expression of na- 
 ture, should be timed to meet a special condi- 
 tion of the church or the special purposes of 
 
202 
 
 WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 a Providence, is not strange. In sucli an event 
 there really is no more wonder than that a man 
 should set an alarm on his clock to go off at 
 three minutes past four in the morning. Some 
 men can swallow big things if you will only al- 
 low them to make out the author to be nature. 
 But whether we attribute the things past to na- 
 ture or to God, we know that wonderful things 
 have happened. 
 
 Seismology, the science of earthquakes, is by 
 no means void of interest. The earthquake 
 catalogue of the British association takes notice 
 of, and records the occurrence of over 6, 000 that 
 happened between 1606 B. C., and 1842 A. D. 
 Some of these have been terrible in force, de- 
 struction and extent, oftentimes changing the 
 whole face of a country, its climate and river 
 courses. The great earthquake of 1783 in Cala- 
 bria, probably caused the death of 100,000 peo- 
 ple ; it was felt over a great part of Europe. 
 The city of Lisbon was visited on the morning 
 of November 1st, 1755, with an earthquake so 
 severe that in a few minutes 60,000 persons per- 
 ished, and most of the city was destroyed and 
 buried beneath the water of the bay some 600 
 feet. 
 
 The country given to Abraham embraces all 
 of what we call Syria. It is central, and spec- 
 ially adapted for the future purposes of God 
 through Abraham's seed. Beginning with the 
 northwest corner the boundaries will be Mount 
 
WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 203 
 
 Taurus, river Euphrates, Persian gulf, Arabian 
 sea, Red sea, river Nile, and Mediterranean, en- 
 closing Syria, Arabia Deserts, Arabia Felix and 
 Arabia Petrcea. Thus it will be seen that the 
 Abrahamic inheritance is surrounded by water 
 except at two points, namely : the northwest 
 land boundary which is between the Euphrates 
 and the Mediterranean sea. The entrance is 
 through the mountain range of Taurus, and 
 forms a natural gate or mountain pass from 
 Europe and Asia into Palestine. Here, when 
 the tribes are resettled in the land of Palestine, 
 this gate will be in the allotment of Dan. Our 
 Irish brethren will again be in the northwest, 
 where they will have to fight and defend the 
 land and the truth, as in days of old, for their 
 brethren. The fact is, “Dan shall judge his 
 people as one of the tribes of Israel” said old 
 Jacob. The Judge in olden times satin the gate. 
 So will Dan sit. Moses said that Dan was a 
 lion’s whelp. Among Israel it is customary to 
 put lions as guards at gateways. The south- 
 west corner between the Mediterranean and the 
 sea of Suez forms the other land boundary. 
 Through this gate will come the teeming mil- 
 lions of Africa. At this gate will be the tribe 
 of Gad, that is, a portion of the Scotch, the low- 
 landers. The tribes will be hemmed in one by 
 another so that they cannot enlarge their terri- 
 tory : but Gad can, for a vast country opens up 
 beyond the gate. It is barren, still the desert 
 
204 
 
 WONDERS OE THE FUTURE. 
 
 is to blossom as a rose. 01 Gad it was said by 
 Moses, £ ‘ Blessed be lie that enlargeth Gad; he 
 dwelleth as a lion and tearetli the arm with the 
 crown of the head. And he provided the first part 
 for himself, because there in a portion of a law- 
 giver was he seated.” You remember that 
 Sinai is in this portion. What sight and fore- 
 sight Jacob and Moses had. The land as thus 
 bounded would be 600 miles broad from the 
 Red sea to the river Euphrates, and 1,390 be- 
 tween the Red sea and Persian gulf, and from 
 the Mediterranean to the Arabian sea, 1,600. 
 These boundaries you will glean by taking note 
 of the several promises to Abraham and his seed 
 as recorded in Genesis xv. 10, and Ex. xxiii. 
 31, and Deut. xi. 24. The land so promised and 
 given specially to Abraham and his seed, the 
 descendants of Abraham never yet occupied, no, 
 not half of it, even in the palmy days of King 
 Solomon. Will it ever be \ We answer yes, as 
 sure as the seasons and night and day. He is 
 faithful that has promised and will do it. 
 
 This remarkable peninsula will be the theatre 
 of the future glory of Israel and Judah. As 
 finely described by the Rev. A. B. Grimaldia, 
 it will be found to be most exactly and suitably 
 placed to enable them to fulfill their high des- 
 tiny to all nations, and become the centre of all 
 lands, the praise and beauty of the whole earth. 
 This land has, in fact, a central position for com- 
 munication, commerce, and all other advant- 
 
WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 205 
 
 ages of civilization not enjoyed by any otlier 
 portion of land in the whole world ; while the 
 peculiar geographical formation is such that it 
 has an immense seaboard, and is therefore fitted 
 for vaster commercial and naval operations than 
 have ever yet been seen, commanding, as it does, 
 the three most important seas and the two larg- 
 est rivers of the whole world. 
 
 This land, as laid out by Ezekiel, will be di- 
 vided into thirteen longitudinal strips, sixty 
 miles long, and twenty broad. In the very cen- 
 ter will be a portion, some fifty miles square, 
 which will be divided and apportioned to what 
 is called the holy oblation — namely, in the very 
 middle will be the temple, a mile square, or 
 larger than ever the whole city of Jerusalem 
 has yet been. Then the city will be ten miles 
 square. On one side will be a portion for the 
 priests ; on another, a portion for the Levites ; 
 and on the other two sides, the prince’s or 
 king’s portion. This portion, which will be on 
 the east and west sides, will be sixty miles 
 long by ten broad, or some 600 miles square. 
 But it is clear he will need it, for he will not be 
 supported by taxes. He will have to judge the 
 land. He cannot take any more land. He will 
 have to support his own family. No public 
 grant to his children. He will have to be liberal 
 with the temple. He will have sixty miles of 
 sea coast to defend and sixty miles of land 
 frontier to protect, and thus cover some of the 
 
206 
 
 WONDERS OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 weaker tribes. The city will have 720 square 
 miles as a suburb, in which to raise supplies 
 specially for itself. It will in reality be in two 
 parts — one called by the prophets the profane ; 
 here will the commercial business be done. The 
 other part will be sacred. Into it strangers will 
 not enter ; it will be holy — a quiet habitation. 
 “ There the glorious Lord will be unto us a 
 place of broad rivers and streams, wherein shall 
 go no galley with oars, neither shall gallant 
 ship pass thereby.” The city proper will be 
 some thirty miles north of the present city of 
 Jerusalem. 
 
NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 
 
 Discourse , 15. 
 
 “SIGNS OF THE TIMES 5 ’ — THE RETURN TO 
 JERUSALEM— FORCES OF RUSSIA AND ENG- 
 ' LAND — PRESENT LOCALITY OF ANCIENT NA- 
 TIONS — ORIGIN OF AMERICAN REPUBLICANISM 
 — FEDERATION OF THE NATIONS COMING — 
 EVOLUTION AND DEVOLUTION. 
 
 Text— Daniel xii. 12. 
 
 ** Blessed is he that waiteth , and cometh to the thousand three 
 hundred and Jive and thirty days.” 
 
 0 according to the prophet Daniel there is a 
 
 time to come in which it will be blessed to 
 
 live. The prophecies of Daniel are generally of 
 a material character, that is, they have special 
 reference to this world politically, and to this 
 end he had direct and special reference to cer- 
 tain kingdoms in existence at the time of writ- 
 ing, as well as others that were to come into be- 
 ing. Of all the prophets he concerns himself 
 the most with positive data, of the rise and 
 
208 NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 
 
 fall of nations. The figures of the data used 
 we freely confess are difficult to understand 
 and interpret. The church and times are greatly 
 in need of some man competent on this 
 point. All prophetic students know the diver- 
 sity and confusion in this department of theo- 
 logy. Of all the difficult departments of theo- 
 logy none exceed the numerical. The numer- 
 ical symbolism of the Bible is as yet but little 
 understood. True, indeed, we are improving. 
 Aided by Providence we are enabled to inter- 
 pret some dates by data ; that is, certain events 
 occurring, locate us, and point out the prophetic 
 period we are in. Like the captain, who is 
 unable by his certain and usual modes of cal- 
 culating to find his whereabouts, does so by 
 currents, the gulf stream, islands, color of wa- 
 ters, etc., did we know the exact quantity of 
 Daniel’ s two thousand and three hundred days, 
 his times, time and half a time, his seventy 
 weeks, his thousand two hundred and ninety 
 days, and the thousand three hundred and five 
 and thirty days, then we could deal with the 
 prophecies with a definitiveness to which as yet 
 we are strangers. 
 
 The times, however, are peculiarly interest- 
 ing from the very fact that the church is waking 
 up to the importance of prophetic study. 
 “Coming events cast their shadows before,” is 
 a trite, but true saying, and here as true as 
 anywhere. Men feel in their fears and hopes 
 
.NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 201J 
 
 the pressure of prophecy. The church is re- 
 markably anxious and at unrest. Governments 
 are suspicious and confused. The populace are 
 restless and threatening. Indeed, everything 
 conspires in church, State and people, to fore- 
 cast the future. A thunderstorm is felt before 
 it is seen or heard. It shadows the mind, thrills 
 the nerves, and pains the rheumatic limbs. 
 Many in 1858 felt war coming in our own coun- 
 try. Many were at a loss to interpret their 
 fears. Some, however, interpreted the signs of 
 the times and sounded an alarm. 
 
 The few years to come are pregnant with 
 angry forces. Men are busy in Russia, Ger- 
 many, France, England and America, sewing the 
 winds, and the harvest will surely be whirl- 
 winds. But, beyond all, the sky is clear. War 
 ceases, commerce revives, the nations accept a 
 settled peace, science and religion join hand in 
 hand to repair the wastes and woes of war. The 
 beast is overcome. Anti-Christ is slain and the 
 dragon is banished from the earth. Jerusalem 
 again rises in splendor from the grave of deso- 
 lation. Again Canaan will become the glory of 
 all lands, and Jerusalem the glory of Canaan. 
 Here, again, after centuries of wandering, shall 
 the throne of David find rest, and on it one 
 of David’ s seed, chosen and anointed of God, 
 accepted of men and served by the nations. 
 Crowned and imperial Salem shall become the 
 home of her long-captive sons and daughters. 
 
210 NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 
 
 Israel and Judali shall meet together, and shall 
 be one stick, one people, having one head, one 
 throne, one city, one Lord, even Jesus. 
 “Therefore they shall come and sing in the 
 height of Zion, and shall flow together to the 
 goodness of the Lord, for wheat, and for wine, 
 and for oil, and for the young of the flock and 
 of the herd, and their soul shall be as a watered 
 garden, and they shall not sorrow any more at 
 all.” — Jeremiah xxxi. 12. 
 
 No one can read the prophecies that find their 
 fulfilment after the battle of Armageddon — or, 
 as the prophets have it, “after those days,” — 
 without being ravished with delight. Israel in 
 her palmy days, and Judah in her glory ! A 
 nation called of God, and ruled by God through 
 David or a Solomon: how inviting! When 
 heaven was their defense and provider, when 
 the fidelity of men to God was enough of de- 
 fense, and the morality of a people was a rich 
 manure giving an abundant harvest in field, 
 stall and orchard. Then we see the true posi- 
 tion of a nation, its grandeur and prosperity. I 
 am convinced that morality has a more intimate 
 relation with the forces and wealth of nature 
 than we are in the habit of believing. God can 
 give increased measure to the harvest, fruitful- 
 ness to the vine, plenty in the orchard, increase 
 in the stall and addition to the household. Time 
 upon time are these blessings promised by the 
 prophets to Israel and Judah, in the latter day. 
 
NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 211 
 
 Take notice of a few statements of the proph- 
 ets responding to those times — the times that 
 will ensue after the Ten Lost Tribes of Israel and 
 the Jews are again possessed of, and settled in 
 Palestine. Jeremiah in the 30th chapter and 
 31st, refers to those times : “ For, lo, the days 
 come, saith the Lord, that I will bring again the 
 captivity of my people, Israel and Judah, saith 
 the Lord; and I will cause them to return to the 
 land that I gave to their fathers, and they shall 
 possess it ” — referring to this time and the bat- 
 tle of Armageddon, in which Israel will be tested 
 as we have before shown. “Alas! for that 
 day is great, so that none is like it ; it is even 
 the time of Jacob’s trouble, but he shall be 
 saved out of it.” Now we ask why will it be 
 specially a time of trouble? We answer, be- 
 cause of the strength of the combined forces 
 that will be arrayed against Israel — that is Eng- 
 land. The forces as set forth in the scriptures 
 are thirteen on one side , led by Russia , and 
 four on the other , which will be led by England,. 
 The thirteen are : 1st, Gog ; 2d, Magog ; 3d, 
 Rosh ; 4tli, Meshech ; 5th, Tubal ; 6tli, Persia ; 
 7th, Ethiopia ; 8th, Libya ; 9th, Gomer ; 10th, 
 Togarmali ; 11th, the Beast ; 12tli, the Dragon ; 
 and 13th, anti-Christ. The four are: 1st, 
 Sheba ; 2d, Dedan ; 3d, Merchants of Tarshish 
 with all their young lions ; 4th, the Jews and 
 Israelites settled in Palestine, that will not be 
 led astray by anti-Christ. 
 
212 NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 
 
 To understand the prophets when forecasting 
 the future, we must keep in mind that in speak- 
 ing of a nation’ s destiny in the future, they would 
 speak of it by the name it had at that time, if 
 such a nation had an existence at that time. But 
 in course of time, such nations would change 
 their name, and sometimes locality ; in such a 
 case they must be found. For instance, if one 
 desires to know the destiny of Turkey, he will 
 find it set forth by the prophets under the name 
 of Edom and Esau. Moab and Ammon are 
 found in the Poles and Hungarians ; they were 
 the sons of Lot. In all parts of the world the 
 children of Abraham have an attachment for 
 each other. Thus India was peopled at first by 
 the descendants of Abraham, hence they will 
 mix with, and accept English rule sooner than 
 any other people. “But unto the sons of the 
 concubines which Abraham had, Abraham gave 
 gifts, and sent them away from Isaac, his son, 
 while he yet lived, eastward into the east 
 country.” — Gen. xxv. 6. If we trace back the 
 origin of a people to their head or founder, we 
 will better understand their peculiarities and 
 national idiosyncrasies. Study Ishmael to un- 
 derstand the Arabs, Esau to understand the 
 Turks, Ammon and Moab to understand the 
 Poles and Hungarians. Study the character 
 and condition of Manasseli in Egypt, as being 
 brought up in a palace and being the lawful heir, 
 but deprived of his birthright by a Providence 
 
NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 213 
 
 which he could not understand, and you have at 
 once a key to the Pilgrim character, and the 
 characteristics of a real American. Why he 
 hates titles, kings and aristocracies. But he 
 forgets not the place of his youth when he had 
 the great seal made, for on the reverse of the 
 great seal of the United States you will have 
 the figure of a pyramid crowned with the All- 
 seeing Eye. No tribe but the tribe of Man- 
 asseh could say, or did say, “We are a great 
 people.” Yet so this tribe said to Joshua ; see 
 Josh. xvii. So we often say “We are a great 
 people.” 
 
 Rachael and Leah, the two wives of Jacob, are 
 the real source of the separation of the Ten 
 Tribes of Israel from Judah. Each wife 
 sought to have her son as the leader. Thus 
 between Judah and Joseph began the spirit of 
 rivalry. Ephraim took up the cause of Rachel. 
 David and Saul’s bitterness lies here. David 
 stood for Leah, and Saul for Rachel. The de- 
 scendants of the north of Ireland, being from 
 the tribe of Dan, have ever been distinct from 
 the rest of the Irish in features, enterprise, 
 spirit and religion, For the others are 
 the Canaanites of old, the Philistines. 
 
 Who do the thirteen enemies stand for to-day ? 
 Let me answer you briefly. Gog stands for the 
 Caucassians or mountain tribes of Caucassus. 
 Magog covers the inhabitants and country north 
 of the Caucassiari mountains, and they are 
 
214 NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY -SEVEN. 
 
 known as Tartars. Rosh, or Roosli, means the 
 real Russians. Their ruler is called by the pro 
 phet Ezekiel Nasi Roosli. We translate it the 
 chief prince of Meshech. This portion, or people 
 of Russia, are the old Babylonians, hence the hate 
 and rivalry between England and that nation. 
 Meshech means the Muscovites, who made Mos- 
 cow what it is. Tubal is found in the Siberians. 
 Meshech and Tubal are generally mentioned to- 
 gether in the scripture, and, strange to say, they 
 are found together in history to-day. Moscow 
 is the capital of Meshech, for though to the 
 world St. Petersburg seems to be, yet every im- 
 perial document is signed and dated Moscow. 
 Tobolski is the capital of Tubal or Siberia. 
 Persia still retains its ancient name, and will be 
 easily recognized. Also, the same with Ethio- 
 pia. Libya takes in a portion of the African 
 race. Gomer stands for the Germans in part, 
 for those who descended from Gomer. From 
 this word Gomer is Gomeren, Gemren, and the 
 country Germia, hence, Germany and Germans. 
 Togarmah includes the people of Independent 
 Tartary. The Dragon includes China. The 
 Beast, the Jesuits and their followers, which 
 will take in France, Spain, Italy and South 
 America ; and at first divide even England, es- 
 pecially Ireland, and the United States. Anti- 
 Christ will be chiefly sustained by the Jews, 
 who will have been settled in Palestine. 
 
 The four opposing forces led by England : 
 
NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 215 
 
 Sheba represents India, who is already training 
 for this time of battle. Dedan embraces Arabia, 
 especially that part occupied by the sultan of 
 Muscat. Merchants of Tarsliish and all the 
 young lions, means England and her colonies, 
 in which is embraced the United States. Man- 
 asseli will have to stretch out a helping hand to 
 Jacob in the time of his trouble, for she cannot 
 allow liberty to be enslaved and freedom of 
 worship and conscience to be trampled under 
 foot. The plague will come here sooner than 
 we think, by a civil and internal division among 
 ourselves, which will force us to take part. The 
 Jews that are not carried away with anti-Christ 
 will join with their brethren of Israel. The 
 called, the chosen and the faithful, will be one 
 party, and they will be on the Lord’s side. 
 
 If during the late Turkish war we could have 
 had our dispatches agreeable to ancient names of 
 people and country, they would have sounded 
 queer. Instead of reading of the Russians pass- 
 ing the Caucasus, and moving upon Erzeroum by 
 way of Kars, we should have read : Rapid ad- 
 vance of the Babylonians under the chief prince 
 of Mesliach. Successful passage of the Pison. 
 The whole land of Havilah occupied. The men 
 of Togarmah rally at Gihon. Fierce fighting in 
 Eden. The invaders defeated in the mountains 
 of Ararat. For, according to ancient names of 
 people and country, such was the fact. It is 
 comforting to all God's people to know from 
 
216 NINETEEN 1IUNDKED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 
 
 His word that there is a time of peace ; that 
 there is a golden age in the near future. Dr. 
 McKay has the Christian idea in his poem : 
 
 “ There is a good time coming, boys, 
 
 Wait a little longer, 
 
 Let us aid it all we can, 
 
 Every woman, every man, 
 
 The good time coming.” 
 
 When will the 1,335 days of years, spoken of 
 in the text, end ? AVe answer, about the year 
 1957. And why that year ? Because these days 
 evidently date there, beginning from the time 
 the daily sacrifice is taken away and the city 
 trodden under foot. The little goat horn of 
 Daniel viii. 9, stands, we have before shown you, 
 for Turkey. “And out of one of them came 
 forth a little horn, which waxed exceeding great 
 toward the south, and toward the east, and to- 
 ward the pleasant land.” It stands for Moliam- 
 medism, which was to overturn Christianity 
 for a given period, a time, times and a half time, 
 or in figures 1260. Now, Mohammed was ac- 
 cepted and crowned at Mecca in the year 622. 
 If we add 1260 and 622 we have 1882 ; a time 
 that is very plainly pointed out in the Pyramid. 
 Daniel says seventy weeks are determined upon 
 thy people and upon thy holy city, Jerusalem. 
 These weeks put into prophetic years make 490, 
 which, of course, brings us to the time when Jeru- 
 salem was destroyed by Titus. Daniel asked how 
 
NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 217 
 
 long the vision concerning the daily sacrifice and 
 transgression of desolation to give the sanctuary 
 and people to be trodden down % The answer 
 was unto 2,300 days, taking a day for a year. 
 Jerusalem was destroyed in year 70. Take this 
 from 490 and we have 420. Now these 420 years 
 taken from 2300 will bring 1880. Then the 
 sanctuary is to be cleansed, that is, Jerusalem 
 will be in the possession of England. She now is. 
 
 From about 1880, or 1882, England will pos- 
 sess J erusalem. In the twelfth chapter of Daniel, 
 eleventh verse, we find thirty days added to 
 the 1,260, making 1,290 ; these added thirty 
 years denote the time England will have to con- 
 tend for her right to Palestine. It will finally 
 be acknowledged, however, by all nations. In 
 1935 the battle of Armageddon will end, but 
 Palestine will not be fully settled down to a 
 peaceful possession till 1957. Then the govern- 
 ment will be fully established and acknowledged 
 all over the world. The kings and Gentile na- 
 tions will have gone up to Jerusalem and given 
 in their adherence. Then all the world will be 
 federated to David’ s throne. The year 1957 I 
 arrive at by the same rule as the other — 1335 
 when added to 622, makes 1957. “Blessed,” 
 says Daniel, “are they who see that time.” 
 
 The world is to undergo some marvelous 
 changes these next few years — mechanically, 
 politically, socially and morally ; the telephone, 
 the phonograph, the microphone, the telema- 
 
218 NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 
 
 chone and coming improvements will transform 
 our modes of labor and learning beyond our 
 present conception. God times inventions and 
 improvements to the advancement of His king- 
 dom. 
 
 I do not regard inventions as mere accidents, 
 but as the outcoming of a Divine intent through 
 human agencies. Watts and Wesley both did 
 good service for the church and the world. Ed- 
 ison and others of kindred minds are scientific 
 prophets. “The earth is the Lord’s and the 
 fullness thereof.” All is made subservient to the 
 progress of the kingdom of heaven. The doc- 
 trine of the evolution of man as taught by Dar- 
 win is neither complimentary to man, or God. 
 But the doctrine of devolution is. Man is a de- 
 veloping creature ; a creature who takes the 
 centuries to grow in. The devolution of God is 
 through man by means of all the increasing fa- 
 cilities and agencies that make man stronger, 
 wiser and better. The secret powers and forces 
 of nature are revealed to man in the ratio of his 
 ability to apply them, on the same scale as we 
 instruct our children. 
 
 In the latter days, or the period spoken of by 
 Daniel, nature will be divinely prompted with 
 an impulse of generosity not now known, for then 
 men will be wise enough, strong enough, and 
 good enough, to use the same and not abuse. 
 The prophetic teachings glow with promises of 
 regaling plenty, peace and good will, in those 
 
NINETEEN HUNDRED AND FIFTY-SEVEN. 219 
 
 days. “I will multiply upon you man and 
 beast ; and they shall increase and bring fruit ; 
 and I will settle you after your old estates, and 
 will do better unto you than at your beginnings ; 
 and ye shall know that I am the Lord.” — Ezek. 
 xxxvi. 11. Again: “ I will multiply the fruit 
 of the tree, and the increase of the field, that ye 
 receive no more reproach of famine among the 
 heathen.” I submit and believe that all this 
 God will do by what men are pleased to call 
 natural law. The Divine will not rudely break 
 in upon His own established laws. Sin impairs 
 the energy and growth of man, and so infringes 
 upon nature. As man frees himself from the 
 bondage and sequences of sin, he will rise higher 
 and higher in his command and authority over 
 nature’ s forces. Three several times the earth 
 has been cursed, which curse is gradually re- 
 moved as man returns unto his God in loving 
 and obedient service. “And now art thou 
 cursed from the earth, which hath opened her 
 mouth to receive thy brother’s blood from thy 
 hand. When thou tillest the ground it shall 
 not henceforth yield unto thee her strength.” — 
 Gen. iv. 11. The secret of a world’s wealth and 
 peace lies here, and it were well if reformers and 
 agitators understood this. For they work best 
 who work in harmony with God and His laws. 
 
THE STONE WITNESS * 
 
 Discourse, 1 7 . 
 
 IN THAT BAY THERE SHALL 
 BE AN ALTAR TO THE LORD 
 IN THE MIDST OF THE LAND 
 OF EGYPT, AND A PILLAR AT 
 THE BORDER THEREOF TO 
 
 THE LORD ; AND IT SHALL 
 BE FOR A SIGN AND FOR A 
 WITNESS UNTO THE LORD OF 
 HOSTS IN THE LAND OF 
 EGYPT.— ISAIAH 19 : 19 . 
 
 THE GEEAT PYEAMID — WHO JOB WAS — WHO 
 BUILT THE PYEAMID — WHAT IT WAS BUILT 
 POE — AN EPITOME OF THE EAETH — THE HIS- 
 TOEY OP MAN CONTAINED IN IT PAST AND 
 PUTUEE — SCIENCE AND THE BIBLE, ETC., 
 ETC. 
 
 S HE wonderful discourses of Rev. Dr. Wild, 
 of Brooklyn, were continued last Sunday 
 evening, before a thronged congregation, in Elm 
 Place Church. Under the organ gallery, behind 
 the pulpit, was a representation of the pyramid, 
 or, as the learned doctor terms it, “the stone 
 
 * This discourse we give to the reader as reported. In all the others 
 we have excluded the reporter’s introduction and personal references. 
 
THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 221 
 
 Bible,” its massive rectangular dark stone foun- 
 dation and some of the most interesting of its in- 
 terior passages, chambers and mysteries. All 
 eyes were fastened in scrutiny upon it, well 
 knowing that some revelations of unusual Chris- 
 tian interest would be made by the doctor from 
 it as soon as his lecture commenced. The pre- 
 liminary exercises of singing by a well trained 
 choir and prayer were therefore impatiently lis- 
 tened to by many whose thoughts were concen- 
 trated on the wonders of the Pyramid and its 
 astounding confirmation of the prophetic Scrip- 
 tures. Dr. Wild read a lesson from the 38th 
 chapter of the Book of Job, remarking that the 
 author of that book was also the engineering 
 director or architectural author of the Pyramid 
 and identical with Shem and Melchisedec. The 
 Book of Job is the oldest book in the world 
 by 200 or 300 years. Shem, or J ob, was ninety- 
 eight years old when he entered the ark, and he 
 lived thirty years after Abraham, with whom 
 therefore he shook hands as well as with Me- 
 thuselah who shook hands with Adam. Only 
 one man, therefore, stood between Adam and 
 Shem, and only two, or not quite two, between 
 Adam and Abraham. The Book of Berosus, of 
 Babylon, is the only one that compares with Job 
 in antiquity. This was the age of tradition be- 
 fore Moses compiled the first portions of it. In 
 the days of Abraham, Shem was the patriarch 
 or oldest of his family, and it was therefore to 
 
222 
 
 THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 him he did homage according to the patriarchal 
 custom under the name of Melcliisedec when re- 
 turning from the slaughter of the kings. Shem 
 had brought with him from the days before the 
 flood much of the knowledge and wisdom which 
 had been accumulated in the earth during the 
 2,000 years previous to that event, and which 
 was swept away when only eight persons were 
 saved in the ark. We have been told that the 
 human race has gradually improved, and that 
 our ancestors in far off ages were monkeys, or 
 something of that sort, but the remains of the 
 ruins and knowledge of antiquity show every- 
 thing the reverse of this to be the truth. 
 Look at that pyramid. We could not build it 
 to-day with all our boasted science. It will bear 
 in every respect the closest scientific scrutiny. 
 Our greatest scientists are only beginning to 
 comprehend the depths of its mysteries, yet it 
 is over 4,000 years old. The capstone on top of 
 it is a pyramid in itself in miniature unlike any- 
 thing of the kind or any other building on the 
 earth. The reverend gentleman then continued 
 to read from the 38th of Job, and show that the 
 writer of it w*as master of astronomical and geo- 
 graphical science and the builder of the pyramid 
 which is a miniature of the measurement of the 
 earth and indicates the history of the human 
 race. After this preliminary dissertation he 
 took for his text the 29th verse of the 28th of 
 Isaiah, “ This also cometh forth from the Lord 
 
THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 228 
 
 of hosts , which is wonderful in counsel , cmcZ 
 excellent in working” 
 
 The Bible is a growing book, being more read 
 and better understood as the years pass by, and 
 as men shall increase in knowledge and power, 
 so the Bible will gain in influence and authority. 
 Opposition to its teaching, and vaunting denial 
 of its authority, shall be made subservient to its 
 interests by goading on the church to a wiser 
 and more noble defence and exposition of the 
 same. Now theology can levy upon the well- 
 defined facts of science in confirmation of the 
 sublime teachings of inspiration. The Christian 
 student need not hold himself in timid dread 
 for fear the scientist will discover aught in the 
 realms of nature that will contradict the word 
 of God ; for as sure as God is the author of both, 
 so surely shall we find an agreement between 
 revelation and science at every point truly un- 
 derstood — increased light means increased evi- 
 dence. Nations and men, nature and Provi- 
 dence, are united witnesses for God, and the 
 Scriptures, and the more we know of the past 
 the better shall we understand the present and 
 forecast the future. Let us recognize the future. 
 Let us recognize the important difference be- 
 tween the Bible subjectively and objectively 
 — that is between what the Bible really is and 
 what men think it is. Let us be free enough, 
 bold enough, and wise enough, to claim the Bible 
 itself. Let us unyoke it from tradition which 
 
224 
 
 THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 claims to be superior or even equal. Let us di- 
 vorce it from councils, from creeds, from sects 
 and denominations ; let us lift it up out of the 
 ecclesiastical rut of ages. Let us with a com- 
 mendable pride count ourselves worthy and able 
 to formulate our own creeds, make our own 
 prayers and confessions, accounting that the 
 liberties of our fathers have been bequeathed to 
 their children, and that the same God who gave 
 them liberty and power is no less gracious to us, 
 their offsprings. Traditions, councils, creeds 
 and degrees, are worth much unto us as aids to a 
 higher life, and a nobler civilization. The Chris- 
 tian ‘fathers, the Luthers, Calvins, Knoxs, Wes- 
 leys and others, were our servants, as we will be 
 the servants of coming generations. They 
 worked grandly, they wrought well, they pro- 
 cured for us a goodly heritage : to them we 
 are indebted. Yet it was not their purpose nor 
 the design of Providence to enslave us, or to 
 stereotype the church for the ages to come. In- 
 creased light is increased evidence, enabling 
 us the better to understand the word of God. 
 When a publisher has stereotyped a book he is 
 naturally loath to make any change or correc- 
 tion ; so churches who have stereotyped the 
 Bible are very unwilling to change, to receive 
 light. Hence they are sometimes found oppos- 
 ing the march of a better civilization, proving 
 and sustaining all manner of institutions and 
 tyrannies : the torturing and terrible inquisition 
 
THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 225 
 
 of Spain, the punishment and hanging of sup- 
 posed witches by England and New England, 
 the bondage and slavery of the South. So to 
 prove their creeds and systems correct they 
 each have a mode of their own, Catholic, Epis- 
 copalian, Baptist, Congregational, Methodist, 
 etc. So also, theologians have o.f ten been impa- 
 tient to reconcile the Scriptures with history, 
 even to suggest mistakes in the sacred Record. 
 Instance Daniel being made the Third Ruler. 
 They supposed it meant second , but later re- 
 searches show that Babylon had two rulers at 
 that time, namely, Nebuchadnezzar and Bel- 
 shazzar, so Daniel was made a third. See the 
 remains of Borssippia near Babylon— Dan. 5. 29. 
 Now we know that both Daniel and Berosus, the 
 old Babylonian historians, were right, and the 
 Bible was right in using the word Third. God 
 in His revelation has always been equal to man's 
 need. Tradition — Abraham saw Shem, for 
 
 Shem lived some thirty years after Abraham’s 
 death. Shem, and Melchizedek, and Job, are 
 likely the same person. Certainly, Shem and 
 Melchizedek are the same, and by Egyptian his- 
 torians called Philitis. This Philitis was the 
 builder of the great Pyramid. Now Shem saw 
 Methuselah and Methuselah Adam. Thus then 
 tradition would be sufficient. As tradition failed, 
 the written word began. There is little doubt 
 now but that Shem, called also Melchizedek, was 
 the builder of the Pyramid, being instructed of 
 
226 
 
 THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 Gfod, as his father Noah had been in building 
 the ark, and as Moses with the tabernacle, and 
 Solomon with the temple. As the prophet in 
 the text and context shows that the wisdom of 
 man is often the gift of God. See Moses also. 
 “And the Lord spake unto Moses, saying : See, 
 I have called by name Bezaleel, the son of Uri, the 
 son of Hur,of the tribe of Judah; and I have filled 
 him with the Spirit of God, in wisdom and in 
 understanding, and in knowledge, and in all 
 manner of workmanship. To devise cunning 
 works, to work in gold, and in silver, and in 
 brass, and in cutting of stones, to set them, and 
 in carving of timber, to work in all manner of 
 workmanship. And behold I have given with 
 him Aholiab, the son of Ahisamach, of the tribe 
 of Dan ; and in the hearts of all that are wise- 
 hearted I have put wisdom that they may make 
 all that I have commanded thee.” — Exod. 31,1-6. 
 Let ns look at this building, for it is a special 
 revelation for these times. For this precise and 
 scientific day God has provided. Science and the 
 Bible are interlocked in this building; they agree, 
 they testify for the same God, yet they witness 
 to the same Christ, the Providence and history 
 of His chosen people. This stone Book could 
 not be read till now ; it even takes the most pre- 
 cise scientific men of the day to read it. For 
 thousands of years there has been no one in the 
 court of the world able to question and interpret 
 this witness of the Lord in Egypt. The scient- 
 
THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 227 
 
 ists have been asking for some other revelation 
 than the Bible, for the supernatural in a scien- 
 tific form, for something beyond man, for some- 
 thing all could see, for something that would 
 answer to pure science, for something that could 
 be seen, handled, measured, tested, and amena- 
 ble to mathematics; something superhuman, for 
 something in which the human and the divine 
 blend. Thank heaven, all they ask is granted 
 in this stone monument. Here we have science 
 forecast for thousands of years ; here we have 
 the grandest of problems in science solved, and 
 the sublimest phenomena of religion and science 
 crystalized, symbolizing and teaching the most 
 marvelous facts in religion, sociology and as- 
 tronomy. It is not a tomb, nor grainary, nor 
 temple, but a pillar and witness unto the Lord 
 of Host. Think of a few facts. 1. Its location 
 the center of the land surface of the whole earth. 
 Hence the best zero point on earth for meridi- 
 onal and latitudinal calculations. Central to 
 clime, here is no rust, moss nor frosts to destroy, 
 nor earthquake, a well chosen spot for such a 
 pillar. 2. Its form and size — symbolizing the 
 earth quantity in its weight of five millions of 
 tons — the freight of 1,250 of the largest steamers 
 leaving New York- Its shape, or inclination 
 from base to apex, the same as from the pole to 
 the equator. To express this the builder sloped 
 in ten feet for every nine in height. On this 
 building the sun can shine upon the whole of it 
 
228 
 
 THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 twice per year without a shadow. This build- 
 ing is the most correctly orient of any structure 
 on the earth. It is the highest, largest and old- 
 est building on earth, rising to the height of 486 
 feet and a fraction, which height if multiplied 
 by ten nine times gives the distance of the earth 
 from the sun. Or pile a thousand million pyra- 
 mids one on the other, and the last would touch 
 the sun. As it stood perfect, it was the circle 
 squared. For the height is the radius of a cir- 
 cle, whose circumference, if divided into four 
 equal parts, each part would equal one of the 
 surface sides of the base. Closer in approxima- 
 tion than Walli’s Indivisibles, or Newton’s 
 Fluxions, or Liebnitz’ s Calculus. The door of 
 entrance was some forty-nine feet from its base, 
 and 300 inches east of the centre, so as at once 
 to express the tilt of the earth’s axis from, the 
 plane of its orbit, and by its height from the 
 ground express the Procession of the Equinoxes. 
 What a witness outwardly, when complete, of 
 polished marble, covering some thirteen and a 
 half acres, within and without clean and free 
 from idolatrous marks. But God foretold the 
 place and purpose of this huge pile through the 
 prophet Isaiah, 19:19-20. “ In that day shall 
 
 there be an altar to the Lord in the midst of 
 the land of Egypt, and a pillar at the border 
 thereof to the Lord. And it shall be for a sign 
 and for a witness unto the Lord of Hosts in the 
 land of Egypt. ’ ’ Here we see the altar and 
 
THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 229 
 
 'pillar are one and the same, and a scientific fact 
 is expressed when the prophet says it shall be 
 in the midst and on the border. The position 
 of the pyramid is such, being at the sector point 
 of Upper and Lower Egypt, thus being on the 
 border of both, yet in the midst. The sector 
 point of the arm is where the wrist joins the 
 hand. The spreading hand represents Lower, 
 and the arm Upper Egypt. See on frontis- 
 piece the sector plate. 
 
 May we ask what the Pillar and Witness — 
 the Pyramid — has to say on the Jewish question, 
 for it has not left this fact unnoticed. At the 
 junction of the first ascending passage with the 
 grand gallery, on the left-hand side, or east, 
 there is a horizontal passage-way leading to what 
 is called the Queen’s chamber. This chamber is 
 on the twenty-fifth course of masonry. Now, it 
 is allowed, the grand gallery expresses the time 
 of Christ’s advent and fullness of time — enlarged 
 liberty. The ascending passage being only four 
 feet high, men were cramped in passing up, but 
 on reaching the grand gallery they were free, for 
 it is twenty-eight feet high. 
 
 The passage to the Queen’s chamber is only 
 four feet, and, is it not strange that it is alto- 
 gether Jewish? This low horizontal passage 
 terminates in a grand Sabbatic room, which 
 symbolizes the Jewish Sabbath-week, feasts and 
 time periods. 
 
 From this passage we learn that the Jews re- 
 
230 
 
 THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 jected Christ, and went off by themselves, refus- 
 ing the liberty of Christ. So as truly as the 
 coming of Christ had been forecast in this 
 Pyramid, so had His rejection by the Jews. 
 
 The very mortar in this chamber is mixed with 
 salt. The chamber is seven-sided. The last 
 seventh of the passage-way sinks down, giving 
 more room to move in. Salt was an article used 
 freely with the Jews in sacrificing. Seven was a 
 sacred number. The sinking of the last seventh 
 part of the passage-way floor may mean the en- 
 larging privilege of the Jews in this latter day. 
 Of the civilized nations, only Russia and Spain 
 forbid them citizenship. Even Turkey admits 
 them now as citizens. 
 
 The Jews have been represented as being blind 
 in part. The passage-way and chamber have 
 been difficult to explore because of foul air ; there 
 being no ventilating tubes as in the King’s 
 chamber. 
 
 But, strange to say, a gentleman exploring 
 this chamber a short time ago, found two tubes 
 by an accident in striking the side wall with a 
 hammer. The tubes had been left entirely closed 
 over, with a thin, unbroken scale. These tubes 
 extended inward through the masonry, and into 
 the stones forming the walls of the room, all 
 nicely cut, but for about one inch they were not 
 cut through into the room itself. Thus the whole 
 was designed is evident. This thin scale no doubt 
 symbolizes the condition of the Jews. His eyes 
 
THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 231 
 
 are now open. The time of liis wandering nearly 
 spent, as told by this Pyramid. 
 
 The curses foretold upon the Jews have been 
 terribly fulfilled. So shall the blessings foretold 
 now in reserve. It was foretold that he would 
 reject Christ ; so he did. But it is also foretold 
 that he will yet look upon Him whom he pierced, 
 and mourn and repent, and accept the true Mes- 
 siah. Lo-ruhamah represents lost Israel ; Lo- 
 ammi represents cursed Judah ; Ruhammah 
 represents Israel found ; Ammi represents the 
 curse removed from the Jews. So now we must 
 say as the Prophet Hosea long ago instructed us 
 — we Saxons — “ Say ye unto your brethren, 
 Ammi,” and you Jews say to your sisters, Ru- 
 hammah. 
 
 We have esteemed the Jews as cursed ; we will 
 soon esteem them blest. The Jews have never 
 thought we were their brethren, the descendants 
 of Abraham. But God is revealing in this latter 
 day His own great plan ; and Christ will be the 
 Saviour of both. 
 
 “ In His days Judah shall be saved, and Israel 
 shall dwell safely. Therefore, behold, the days 
 come, saith the Lord, that they shall no more say, 
 the Lord liveth which brought up the children of 
 Israel out of the land of Egypt ; but the Lord liveth 
 which brought up, and which led the seed of the 
 house of Israel out of the north country, and from 
 all countries whither I had driven them, and they 
 shall dwell in their own land.” — Jer. xxiii. 6-8. 
 
232 
 
 THE STONE WITNESS. 
 
 Glorious times are near at hand for the church 
 and the world. Great things hath God promised, 
 all of which He will in His own good time bring 
 to pass. 
 
 The very dimensions of the door- way are of 
 thrilling import, expressing in square inches the 
 Time of the Adamic World, which, when added 
 to other figures, forecast the time of the end, or 
 the 6,000 years, and point out the date of the 
 beginning of the Millennium morn, or Sabbath of 
 the earth. The period spoken of by Daniel when 
 he says, “Blessed is he that waiteth, and cometh 
 to the thousand, three hundred and five and 
 thirty days.” This period we approximated in 
 our last Discourse, and made it out to be about 
 1,957. The doorway, in square inches, is 1,949 ; 
 take these inches for years, and we have, before 
 the building of the Pyramid, of years 1,949 a. m. 
 Time of building 2,170 B. C. and length of Grand 
 Gallery 1882, and we get a total of 6,001. This 
 is indeed a close approximation. 
 
SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 Discourse , 18. 
 
 THE STONE PROPHET IN THE WILDERNESS — NO 
 WAR FOR FOUR YEARS — THE GREAT STRUG- 
 GLE TO COMMENCE IN 1882 — PRUSSIA AN- 
 CIENT ASSYRIA — ENGLAND, GERMANY AND 
 EGYPT, TO BE ALLIES — THE FUTURE HISTORY 
 OF THE WORLD — THE PHILISTINES THE 
 SOUTHERN IRISH — WHO THEIR GREAT AN- 
 CESTOR WAS, ETC. 
 
 Text-Jeremiali xxxii. IS, 19. 20. 
 
 “ The Great , the Mighty God, the Lord of Hosts, is His name. 
 Great in counsel , and mighty in work; for Thine eyes are 
 open upon all the ways of the sons of men; to give every one 
 according to his ways, and according to the fruit of his doings; 
 which has set signs and wonders in the land o f Egypt, even 
 unto this dayT 
 
 S GYPT is intimately connected with Pales- 
 tine in Providential history, both past, 
 present and future. No student can have a 
 proper knowledge of the Jewish and Israelitish 
 nation, unless he be familiar with the early civili- 
 zation and power of Egypt. From this land went 
 
234 
 
 SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 forth the Caphtorim to settle Palestine, led forth 
 by the great and good Melchizedek, after he had 
 built the Pyramid. Under his reign they first 
 settled Palestine, built and made Jerusalem 
 their capitol. On the death of Melchizedek they 
 lost their allegiance to God, they became an 
 idolatrous people, and were rejected by Jehovah 
 as his special agents. They are known in after 
 history under the name of Philistines, which 
 simply means the followers or subjects of Phil- 
 itis — a name which the early historians of Egypt 
 gave to the builder of the pyramid, which was 
 none other person than Melchizedek. By the 
 Israelites they were driven out of Palestine, and 
 finally settled in the south of Ireland, as Irish 
 historians allow. 
 
 Another member of the family of Shem was 
 called, namely, Abraham, from whom came 
 God’s chosen people — Israel and the Jews. 
 They also had to sojourn in Egypt, and they, 
 too, were sent to Palestine, and grafted on to the 
 purpose of God, where the Philistines had been 
 broken off. 
 
 “Have not I brought up Israel out of the 
 land of Egypt ; and the Philistines from Caph- 
 tor.” Amos 9:7. 
 
 Egypt has played a noble part in the Provi- 
 dence of God through Melchizedek, Abraham, 
 Joseph, and Moses. Even the blessed Jesus is 
 said to be called from this land. “Out of Egypt 
 have I called my Son.” The Egyptians gave to 
 
SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 235 
 
 the world the first translation of the Hebrew 
 Bible, and it was for centuries the stronghold of 
 Christianity after the destruction of Jerusalem. 
 The best of the Christian Fathers were Egyp- 
 tians, and in the coming struggle, the great war, 
 which will begin about 1882, again Egypt will 
 become conspicuous with England and Prussia. 
 For the Prussians are the Assyrians as the Eng- 
 lish are the lost tribes of Israel. Bismark may 
 
 manoeuvre as he please, and be as pro- Russian 
 as Dr. Storrs, yet when the time comes he and 
 his people will fall in with the Providential pur- 
 pose, and become an ally with Israel-England ; 
 and timid and bankrupt Egypt will then come 
 forth to take her place once more among the 
 nations of the earth as an independent power. 
 Hear what the Prophet Isaiah says in the 19th 
 chapter : “And the Lord shall smite Egypt, He 
 shall smite and heal it, and they shall return 
 even to the Lord, and He shall be entreated of 
 them, and shall heal them. In that day shall 
 there be a highway out of Egypt to Assyria, and 
 the Assyrian shall come into Egypt and the 
 Egyptian into Assyria, and the Egyptians 
 shall serve with the Assyrians. In that day 
 shall Israel be the third with Egypt and with 
 Assyria, even a blessing in the midst of the land. 
 Whom the Lord of Hosts shall bless, saying, 
 Blessed be Egypt my people, and Assyria the 
 work of my hands, and Istael mine inheritance.” 
 “In that day ’ refers to this day, now at hand. 
 
236 
 
 SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 To this the great Pyramid is a witness. For in 
 the 19th and 20th verses of this chapter we read : 
 ‘ ‘ In that day shall there be an altar to the Lord 
 in the midst of the land of Egypt, and a pillar 
 at the border thereof to the Lord. And it shall 
 be for a sign and for a witness unto the Lord 
 of Hosts in the land of Egypt.” 
 
 The word translated pillar, is from the Hebrew 
 word Matzaybhah, and means a large structure 
 — some monument that is pre-eminent. The 
 Hebrew word Ammood is translated pillar 
 also, and corresponds to the English word pil- 
 lar much better. 
 
 The word altar , in Hebrew, means lion, carry- 
 ing with it the same meaning of pre-eminence. 
 And is not this Pyramid pre-eminent ? and is it 
 not the lion of monuments, pre-eminent as be- 
 ing the oldest, pre-eminent as being the highest, 
 pre-eminent as being the largest, pre-eminent in 
 location — being central to all the land surface 
 of the earth, pre-eminent in construction, unlike 
 any other buildings, except such as have been 
 modeled after it, pre-eminent in orientation, 
 that is, being exactly East, North, West and 
 South, 
 
 Perfect orientation men in past ages and 
 countries have tried to express in temples, 
 churches, observatories, and monuments, yet 
 none have succeeded so well as the Pyramid 
 builders. 
 
 The famous Uranibourg Observatory, built 
 
SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 237 
 
 by aid of the European governments, under the 
 skilful supervision of the learned Tycho Brahe, 
 was found to be five minutes of a degree askew 
 in its orientation when finished. 
 
 A few years ago our government determined 
 to have one point of perfect orientation, fixing 
 upon Mount Agamenticus in the State of Maine. 
 They, at a great cost, and time and labor, con- 
 cluded their work, and found they were in error 
 somewhere about the four hundredth part of a 
 second ; although they tried to solve the prob- 
 lem by three distinct processes, namely, differ- 
 ences of zenith distance, absolute zenith dis- 
 tances, and by transits in prime vertical. 
 
 How then came these ancient architects so 
 early in the world’s history and progress, to 
 build so skillfully ? How were they able some 
 four thousand years ago to find the poles, and 
 determine the latitude and longitude so pre- 
 cisely ? Answer ye godless scientists, and 
 tell ns how these monkey men were so skilled. 
 How did they know without your instruments 
 and instruction which parallel of latitude to 
 choose so as to be on that line which would 
 mark the half-way of the world’s surface be- 
 tween the equator and the poles ? 
 
 And why did they lay bare and make smooth 
 the lime stone table rock on which they built 
 close to its northern edge? Why press so 
 closely to the brink of the hill on the north side 
 when there was plenty of room on the south 
 side? 
 
238 
 
 SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 Truly this witness of God is against you. In 
 this building are “ signs and wonders ” even to 
 this day, and as surely also, are the eyes of Je- 
 hovah open upon all the ways of the children of 
 men. 
 
 Know ye not that the accumulated forces and 
 results of centuries have been bequeathed to the 
 present generation as a legal heritage for cul- 
 ture and profit. 
 
 Happily for us God has not left Himself with- 
 out witnesses. Long before God made bare His 
 arm through Moses, and wrought miracles to 
 convince Pharaoh and the Egyptians, He had 
 wrought one miracle, a miracle which would 
 cover the ages ; not be seen by a few only, or 
 last for a day, but to be seen by the millions and 
 last for centuries. 
 
 In this Pyramid we have a valuable inherit- 
 ance. Its finish, its beauty, 1 its magnitude, pro- 
 vokes our criticism and yet must command our 
 admiration. This Watchman on the walls of 
 time, this Sentinel in charge of the secrets and 
 treasures of the sires of long ago, this Prophet 
 in the wilderness in rugged garb, proclaiming 
 the will of heaven, as then made known, and 
 now manifest, this Daniel who can interpret for 
 us the future. This Mile-stone of the ages we 
 do revere. 
 
 By it we are enabled to adjust our chronologi- 
 cal dates, rectify history in some of its most im- 
 portant points, and j udge more correctly of the 
 
SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 239 
 
 attainments of our ancestors ; nay, more and 
 better, to form a truer estimate of ourselves and 
 discern the finger of God in the manipulations 
 of men, and an overruling Providence in the 
 rise and fall of nations. 
 
 These signs and wonders confirm God’ s word, 
 for they prove inspiration a fact ; inspiration of 
 a kind and in the very manner demanded by the 
 unbelieving scientists. Here is a building super- 
 human, and of course in part supernatural, like 
 the Bible. In this building the human and the 
 Divine blend. 
 
 If any deny this it remains with them to ac- 
 count for it, and show how a people so far back 
 in the world’s history could be so wise and 
 learned ; how they could embody so much of 
 the sciences. One thing is certain, if the Divine 
 had nothing to do with this building, then we 
 are left to the conclusion that man was much 
 superior to what the Darwinian theory admits. 
 If void of the Divine, then the development 
 theory is destroyed. If we admit the Divine, 
 then it follows that inspiration is a fact. 
 
 The building is there, and it was there in the 
 day of Egypt’s oldest historians. It has been 
 counted as one of the seven wonders of the world. 
 
 It did not embody the ideas of the Egyptians 
 in science, astronomy, meteorology or religion. 
 As their historians allow, it was built by for- 
 eigners which they hated. 
 
 Nothing idolatrous was carved on it, within 
 
240 
 
 SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 or without. It was a witness pure and clean. 
 The Egyptians proclaimed and believed the earth 
 to be square — this building proclaimed the earth 
 round. The builders beveled the face of the rock in 
 a ratio of eight inches to the mile — the very quan- 
 tity that science to-day admits to be the curvi- 
 ture of the earth — and accepts in surveying. It 
 was their knowledge of this act that kept the 
 building sound, without the cracking of a joint, 
 through centuries, though so high. The Egyp- 
 tians did not use the sacred Amma, or cubit, 
 which is about twenty-five of our inches. They 
 used a profane cubit — as Sir Isaac Newton shows. 
 
 This sacred cubit was a well, and easily estab- 
 lished proportion of the earth’ s diameter. The 
 very standard now used by the English govern- 
 ment in surveying. 
 
 The stones of the Pyramid were twelve feet 
 long, eight feet broad, and five deep, making 
 twenty -five total. The building itself was a five- 
 faced figure. The Egyptians hated five. No 
 wonder that Moses harnessed the Israelites in 
 fives as they left Egypt, or that he should divide 
 his Book into five parts. 
 
 No wonder that the queen’s chamber should 
 be on the twenty-fifth course of Masonry, and 
 the king’s chamber on the fiftieth course, which 
 is the year of jubilee, or deliverance. Which 
 year, as indicated in the Pyramid, is the year 
 1935. 
 
 The Egyptians calculated from the moon in 
 
SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 241 
 
 their chronology. But this building takes its 
 calculations from the sun circle. The Egyptian 
 year was 354 days, with an intercalary month of 
 thirty- three days added every three years. 
 
 The year embodied in the Pyramid was 365 
 days, live hours, forty-eight minutes, forty-seven 
 and seven-tenths seconds. If a person took a 
 rod of a cubit length, and measured one of the 
 base sides of the Pyramid, he would find this 
 twenty-live inch measure to be contained, as of- 
 ten as there are days in the year, with the same 
 fraction in inches, as the hours, minutes and 
 seconds. 
 
 Is it impious to ask how these builders knew 
 the solar year so completely 3 They knew the 
 sun’s circle of 448 years, which completes a 
 circle of time without any excess or deficiency. 
 This they ran into weights and measures as God’ s 
 religion does. 
 
 The Pyramid, having four sides, would divide 
 this circle into four parts, which makes 112 
 pounds or a hundred weight, or, if multiplied 
 by five, the faces of the Pyramid, 448 would give 
 2,240, or a ton. 
 
 In the descending and ascending passages, 
 a person must stoop to pass through them, but 
 when the grand gallery is reached, they can 
 stand upright, for this gallery enlarges seven 
 times the proportions of the other. The first 
 passages are only four feet high ; this is twenty- 
 eight. 
 
242 
 
 SIGNS AND WONDERS. 
 
 The first ascending passage is 1,542 inches in 
 length. The time, taking inches for years, from 
 the exodns of Israel from Egypt to Christ. 
 
 Christ brings enlarged liberty. He was sym- 
 bolized by the ton — the end of weight scale. 
 “ When the fullness of time was come, God sent 
 forth His Son.” 
 
 Again, thirty- three inches in this gallery is an 
 open sepulchre with fifty-six empty graves in 
 miniature, carved out, telling, again, by a strange 
 coincident, the life years of the Saviour and His 
 resurrection ; also, the number of those who 
 rose immediately after. For “the graves were 
 opened, and many bodies of the saints which 
 slept, arose and came out of the graves after His 
 resurrection.” — Matt, xxvii. 52. 
 
 Another remarkable feature is, that at the end 
 of this gallery, the wall bulges forward about 
 four inches, as if it were going to fall in. This 
 gallery, on the floor, is 1,882 inches ; on the 
 roof, 1,878 inches. This explains to us our very 
 times. The shadow of war— Russia and Englan d 
 appearing as if they would fight every day. 
 But they know not the counsels of God, nor His 
 sublime purpose. Surely, as the text declares, 
 “ Our God is great in council and mighty in 
 work ; and His eyes are open upon all the ways 
 of the sons of men.” More next Sunday even- 
 ing, God willing, about His own marvelous wit- 
 nesses. Let us praise and adore Him. 
 
^Iicali v* 7i 
 
 “And the remnant of Jacob shall be among the Gentiles in the midst 
 of many people as a Lion among the beasts of the forest , as a 
 Young Lion among the flocks of sheep : who , if he go through, 
 both treadeth down and teareth in pieces , and none can deliver " 
 
 ‘ * His glory is like the firstling of his bullock , and his horns like the 
 Horns of Unicorns .* with them he shall push the people 
 together to the ends of the EARTH,’ * 
 
 THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 Discourse , 1 9. 
 
 England’ s prophecy fulfilled in the Ber- 
 lin CONGRESS — THE HARP OF TARA THE HARP 
 OF ISRAEL — THE FUTURE EUROPEAN ALLI- 
 ANCES — ROYAL SUCCESSION OF THE HOUSE 
 
 OF ISRAEL. 
 
 Text— Ezekiel xxi, e Z7» 
 
 “ 1 will overturn , overturn, overturn it; and it shall be no more, 
 until He come whose right it is; and I will give it Him." 
 
 t HE closing of the famous European Con- 
 gress will now freely permit us to canvass 
 the work and results of the same, and to com- 
 
244 
 
 THE THKONE OF DAVID. 
 
 pare the sequences with the teachings of the 
 Prophets, and intentions of Providence. The 
 results of the Congress have taken the world by 
 surprise. The very fact that one should have 
 been held under the enforced conditions of the 
 crownless king, Disraeli, was a wonder in it- 
 self. But the wonder is not confined to the 
 meeting and work of the Congress, for outside 
 of, and in spite of the Congress, a treaty has 
 been made which converts wonder into amaze- 
 ment. Back in the middle of last May, Eng- 
 land and Turkey formed an alliance, offensive 
 and defensive. Nay more, for Turkey cedes to 
 England the fruitful and strategic island of 
 Cyprus. What a triangle of strongholds — Cy- 
 prus, Malta and Gibralter. Shades of Bona- 
 parte! Where is France these days? She is 
 renewing her strength, and is wisely standing 
 aside so as not to oppose Providence. In all 
 this there is nothing new or strange to the pro- 
 phetic student. For long ago it was written of 
 Israel that she should be a company of nations, 
 and possess the gates of her enemies. 
 
 It is not by might, nor power of human origin, 
 that these events must be j udged or that they come 
 to pass. But, surely, by the Spirit of God. ‘ ‘ There 
 is a spirit in man, and the inspiration of the Al- 
 mighty giveth it understanding. ’ ’ Here J ob gives 
 us the key to unlock the mysteries of the crown- 
 less king and his success. The apothegm of 
 Bonaparte is as false as he was unsuccessful, 
 
THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 245 
 
 namely : That Providence is always on the side 
 of the strongest battalions. In Israel, in time of 
 old, this was seldom true. In fact it was not true 
 in the experience and campaigns of Bonaparte. 
 The logic of such a faith has been the ruin of 
 lovely France more than once, and will be again. 
 For it must needs be that France break her alli- 
 ance with England, though now they are friends. 
 France in a few years will ally with the Beast, the 
 Roman Church, in its last struggle for rule and 
 supremacy. And she will join hands with anti- 
 Christ. France will repeat the follies of ’98. 
 She will again seek to dethrone Religion, 
 and enthrone Reason. Her Marats, Desmou- 
 lins, Herberts, Clootz’s and Robespierres are at 
 hand ready to overturn. And the church of her 
 choice is patiently waiting to re-enact the scenes 
 of blood and terror of St. Bartholomew. Her time 
 of opportunity will appear to have come in a few 
 years. Bismark and Kaiser William will be out 
 of the way, and Germany will languish for want 
 of two equal successors. And France will not 
 forget to pay back the debt of revenge she 
 owes to Germany, and seek to reclaim 
 her prestige in councils, and especially to 
 restore her lost influence over Egypt, Turkey, 
 and the Mediterranean. 
 
 Last week it would not have been so easy to see 
 how France and England were to become once 
 again enemies. This Cyprus wedge has cleft open 
 a little farther the dark and mysterious future. 
 
246 
 
 THE THEONE OE DAVID. 
 
 Last Monday we received the astounding tele- 
 gram of the treaty between England and Turkey. 
 It evidently was a surprise, we have no doubt, 
 even to Rev. Dr. Storrs and the New YorkWer- 
 ald, as well as to many others, who could see 
 nothing but defeat and shame for Israel Eng- 
 land. From Dr. Storrs we have not heard what 
 he now thinks of his child of promise, Russia. 
 From the Herald we did hear, for by the way the 
 Herald is one of our morning papers. By an 
 editorial of a column and a half the Herald 
 struggled nobly to wriggle out of the tight 
 corner in which its sympathies for Russia had 
 crowded it. We like and admire the Herald , 
 because of its tact and ingenuity in getting 
 news first from any part of the world. Still this 
 time she was behind time. Two years ago from 
 this pulpit we announced the exciting facts of 
 the past week. Last Sunday evening we closed 
 our discourse in these words: “Now, again, 
 England pledges herself a Continental power — 
 nay, more, an Asiatic power. She will come 
 forth from the congress the virtual ruler of Tur- 
 key, the owner of Palestine.” 
 
 If the Saxons be the ten lost tribes of Israel, 
 and most certainly they respond to all the fea- 
 ture that were to distinctly mark them when 
 found, as written in the bible, then the Eng- 
 lish throne is a continuation of David’ s throne, 
 and the seed on it must be the seed of David, 
 and the inference is clear, namely, that all the 
 
THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 247 
 
 blessings attaching by Holy promise to David’s 
 throne mnst belong to England. This is the key 
 that unravels and makes plain the marvelous 
 and sublime history of the English nation and 
 throne. We know many scout the idea of the 
 lost tribes ever being found, although over thirty 
 times God declares by the prophets that they 
 must return ; surely before they return they must 
 be found. God has not cast away His people 
 forever. No, no. He declares Israel to be His 
 inheritance , and that this people He had 
 formed for Himself. 
 
 The two tribes forming the Jews of to-day are 
 said by the best calculation to number about 
 nine millions. If, then, the two tribes number 
 nine millions, how many ought we to expect the 
 ten tribes to number? If the two tribes have 
 stood and survived the shock and persecution of 
 centuries when known,, and therefore open to 
 assault, is it not reasonable to suppose that 
 the ten tribes will be in existence, a numerous 
 and powerful people, for they have been hid, 
 and thus have they evaded the persecution that 
 a knowledge of their nationality would have en- 
 tailed upon them from the Gentile and Pagan 
 nations. 
 
 Some, indeed, persist in looking for God’s 
 chosen seed — His people, His inheritance, 
 among the bushmen of Africa, the Indians 
 of America ; indeed wherever they can find a 
 people mean, and few, and very low in the scale 
 
248 
 
 THE THRONE OE DAVID. 
 
 of civilization. They overlook the fact that 
 Israel, not the Jews, were to be the most 
 powerful and prolific people on the face of the 
 earth, to be as sands of the sea, as the stars 
 of heaven. Especially were these promises to 
 be true in the latter day — for then God prom- 
 ises to multiply upon them men, beasts, and the 
 fruits of the field. This is one of the signs of 
 the times, and it is a remarkable one. See our 
 harvest, see our cattle, and see the Saxon race 
 — doubling, at least, every forty years. No 
 other nation is doubling at that rate. Germany 
 comes the nearest, and both in Prussia and 
 Austria they only double every one hundred 
 years. In one hundred years from to-day the 
 Saxons will control the world for peace and 
 Christ. 
 
 To this end God is overturning, and will over- 
 turn until the whole world shall be federated 
 around one throne, and that throne is David’s — 
 the only throne God ever directly established, 
 and the only one He has promised perpetuity to. 
 God has a land — Palestine. He has a people — 
 Israel. He has a throne — David’ s, and for that 
 throne — He has a seed, just as the seed of Levi 
 was selected for Temple service. 
 
 This kingdom is the fifth kingdom, to be set 
 up in the latter days of those kings says Daniel. 
 The kingdom was never to be left unto other 
 people. It is typified by the stone cut out of 
 the mountain that is to fill the world. Why 
 
THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 249 
 
 then stand amazed at the cession of Cyprus to 
 England, if she be Israel. To her was promised 
 the isles of the sea, the coasts of the earth, 
 the waste and desolate places — the heathen and 
 uttermost parts of the earth, as a possession. 
 Already out of the fifty-one million square miles 
 which composes the earth, England, including 
 the United States, now owns about fourteen 
 millions, or say one-fourth. She bears rule over 
 one- third of the people of the earth ; she adds a 
 colony every four years on an average. At the 
 present rate it will not be long before the king- 
 doms of this world will be given to the saints of 
 the Most High. It is no marvel in the light and 
 instruction of prophecy that this throne and 
 people should be so stable and prosperous. 
 
 Turn your attention to the founding of this 
 throne of David. You will find the throne and 
 seed unconditionally federated, the place and 
 measure of prosperity conditioned on the obedi- 
 ence of the people and throne to God. “The 
 Lord hath sworn in truth unto David; He will not 
 turn from it ; of the fruit of tliy body will I set 
 upon thy throne.” — Psalm cxxxii, 11. Again, 
 “I have sworn unto David, thy seed I will 
 establish forever , and build up thy throne to 
 all generations.” — Psalm lxxxix, 3-4. This 
 promise is to all generations, not a part, nor 
 simply for sixty years. For the kingdom was 
 rent in twain when Rehoboam, the grandson of 
 David, began to reign. The throne of David 
 
250 
 
 THE THRONE OE DAVID. 
 
 would be about the poorest type of Christ’s 
 throne, and rule and reign, if we can only see 
 it in Palestine. There it was soon divided, very 
 corrupt. “If ye can break my covenant of the 
 day and night in their season, then may also 
 my covenant be broken with David my servant, 
 that he should not have a son to reign upon his 
 throne. * * * Thus saith the Lord: 
 
 if my covenant be not with day and night, and 
 if I have not appointed the ordinances of heaven 
 and earth, then will I cast away the seed of 
 Jacob and David my servant, so that I will not 
 take any of his seed to be rulers over the seed of 
 Abraham.” — Jeremiah xxxiii, 25-26. Let any- 
 body of sane mind read the seventh chapter of the 
 second book of Samuel, and they will see that 
 God promised to David that his house and king- 
 dom should be established forever, and that God 
 would set up the seed of David after him. "Well 
 might David exclaim when he sat before the 
 Lord, “ Who am I, O Lord God, and what is my 
 house, that thou hast brought me hitherto ? 
 And this was yet a small thing in thy sight, O, 
 Lord God ; but thou hast spoken also of thy 
 servant' s house for a great while to come." It 
 is a pity men will not take and interpret the 
 Bible by the rules of common sense. 
 
 David at this time was king over all the tribes 
 and was at peace, and settled, and prospered. 
 But God told him that “He would appoint a 
 place for my 'people Israel , and will plant them 
 
THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 251 
 
 that they may dwell in a place of their own and 
 move no more.” This promise was to Israel. If 
 the promises of the multitudinous seed were to 
 be fulfilled to Israel then it would be necessary to 
 find them another place, for Palestine wouldn’ t 
 hold them. So God has planted them. God 
 never promised to find the Jews another country; 
 Palestine is specially reserved for them. They 
 have been without country, king or government. 
 In the year 725 B. C. the Jews and Israelites 
 were separated, and since that time they have 
 never been united. But the day is coming, says 
 the prophet, when they shall dwell together and 
 appoint one head over them. The Israelites are 
 only to return to Palestine representively. Jer. 
 iii, 14. 
 
 When Nebuchadnezzar carried the Jews cap- 
 tive, he took the king Zedekiah with him, and 
 destroyed all his family, and all the real royal 
 seed of David. Zedekiah died in Babylon. He 
 placed upon the throne of David, Gedaliali. 
 Now Gedaliah was not of the seed royal ; but 
 God was displeased and permitted the crown to 
 go to others. Ezekiel was taken captive to 
 Babylon in the reign of Jelioiachin, the father 
 of Zedekiah. The prophecy of the text was 
 written in Babylon, and refers to Zedekiah, 
 whom Ezekiel calls the “wicked Prince of Is- 
 rael, whose day is come, iniquity shall have an 
 end. Thus saith the Lord God, remove the dia- 
 dem and take off the crown, this shall not be the 
 
252 
 
 THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 same ; exalt him that is low, and abase him that 
 is high. I will overturn, overturn, overturn it, 
 and it shall be no more until He comes whose 
 right it is ; and I will give it to Him.” 
 
 Now all this is plain if we keep in mind that 
 Zedekiah was the last prince of the house of 
 David that ever reigned in Palestine. God re- 
 moved the diadem. But in the course of time a 
 lawful heir of the seed of David shall appear, 
 and the throne and the seed will be established 
 again in Jerusalem. It is to this end Providence 
 is overturning Turkey to make way for this seed 
 royal. But where is this seed royal ? Answer : 
 It is on the English throne. .Listen carefully to 
 the following : 
 
 Jeremiah tells us that with him he had the 
 daughters of Zedekiah, who had by some means 
 escaped the destroying edicts of Nebuchadnez- 
 zar. Jer. xliii. 6. And from Jer. xliv. 14, we 
 learn that they visited Egypt, and from Jer. 
 xliv. 28, we learn that a small number escaped. 
 Now Jeremiah being the only prophet in Judah 
 at that time, had a right to take charge of the 
 royal seed. He could not stay in Egypt, nor in 
 Palestine, nor would he go to Babylon. Where 
 then, did the prophet go ? He no doubt took 
 ship with the Danites, and sailed for Cornwall, 
 in England, for this place called Tarshisli. We 
 learn from Ezekiel the ship of Dan traded in tin 
 and other things. History and tradition both 
 agree that there landed on the coast of Ireland 
 
THE THRONE OE DAVID. 
 
 253 
 
 in the north, a divine man and a princess. God 
 had promised to Jeremiah his life wherever he 
 went. “ But thy life will I give thee for a prey 
 in all places whither thou goest.” Jer. xlv. 5. 
 
 The North of Ireland had. been settled with 
 the tribe of Dan ; they at once understood who 
 their visitor was. They called him Olam Fodla, 
 meaning a divine man or teacher. The princess 
 was called Tea Tephi, the beautiful one from the 
 East. This princess was married to Heremon, 
 of Ulster, the king of Lothair Croffin, for such 
 was the name of the city of Tara. This word 
 Tara is Arat spelled backward. The Hebrew 
 read from right to left ; English, left to right. 
 Lothair Croffin was changed into Tara at the 
 time of the wedding. Tara means law. Thus 
 
 JACOB'S STONE. 
 
 began the seed of David to take root, and from 
 there it spread over all Ireland, then to Scot- 
 land, thence to England, and Jacob’s Stone in 
 Westminster Abbey, marks the journey of 
 
254 
 
 THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 I 
 
 David’ s throne, and has always kept with the 
 seed, and they have been always crowned on it. 
 Ezekiel’ s riddle is at once solved. The tender 
 twigs were Zedekiah’s daughters. One of these 
 twigs was planted by the great waters in a land 
 of traffic. Our Episcopalian friends intended 
 by their beautiful service to aid the members of 
 their communion to read in order, and through 
 the bible or a given portion of each chapter once 
 per year. But strange to say, this 17th chapter 
 of Ezekiel, they have left out both of the Old 
 and New Lectionary. It is itself a riddle. Why 
 this should so happen that the only two chap- 
 ters of the bible, left out or proscribed, are the 
 17th and 21st of Ezekiel ; surely blindness in 
 part has happened to Israel, and what we es- 
 teemed as accidental in the increased light of 
 Revelation, stands to view as the ordered pur- 
 poses of an all-seeing God. 
 
 The royal standard of England has nine lions 
 on it and a unicorn. Let any one set this stan- 
 dard before him as a map, the right hand will 
 represent east, the top north, left west, the 
 bottom south. The unicorn comes from the 
 east, it has a chain around its- neck. So the 
 tribe of Benjamin came that way, and, as Nor- 
 mans, were finally attached to the throne. The 
 big lion comes from the west, so it did from Ire- 
 land to Scotland and London. On the top we 
 have a crown, and on the top of this we have a 
 lion. On the first quarter are three lions, second 
 
THE THRONE OF DAVID. 255 
 
 quarter one, on the third a stringed harp with 
 an angel’ s head, and on the fourth three lions, 
 the total of lions nine, and a * unicorn. The fact 
 is this standard, had we time, teaches a world of 
 history, and with the Psalmist we may say : 
 “Thou hast given a banner to them that fear 
 thee ; that it may be displayed because of the 
 truth.” — Ps. ix, 14. f The geneology and descent 
 of Queen Victoria from Zedekiah we will furnish 
 you. This geneology has been gotten up by the 
 faithful and very persevering labors of Rev. F. 
 R. A. Glover, M. A., and Rev. A. B. Grimaldi, 
 M. A., two Episcopalian clergymen of England. 
 The chart is supposed to be as near perfect as 
 any such thing can be. If any of you find any 
 defect be kind enough and let me know. In the 
 following geneology those who reigned have K 
 prefixed — the dates after private names refer to 
 their birth and death, those after sovereigns’ 
 names to their accession and death. 
 
 ADAM TO VICTORIA. 
 
 GENERATIONS. 
 
 1. Adam (B. C. 4000 — 3070), Eve. 
 
 2. Seth (B. C. 3870—2978). 
 
 3. Enos (B. C. 3765—2860). 
 
 4. Cainan (B. C. 3675—2765). 
 
 5. Mahalaleel (B. C. 3605 — 2710). 
 
 6. Jared (B. C. 3540-2578). 
 
 7. Enoch (B. C. 3378—3013). 
 
 * t See illustration, page 243. 
 
256 
 
 THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 GENERATIONS. 
 
 8. Methuselah (B. C. 3318 — 2344). 
 
 9. Lamech (B. C. 3126—2344). 
 
 10. Noah (B. C. 2944 — 2006), Naamah. 
 
 11. Shem (B. C. 2442—2158). 
 
 12. Arphaxad (B. C. 2342 — 1904). 
 
 13. Salah (B. C. 2307—2126). 
 
 14. Heber (2277— 2187). 
 
 15. Peleg (B. C. 2243—2004). 
 
 16. Reu (B. C. 2213—2026). 
 
 17. Serng (B. C. 2181—2049). 
 
 18. Nahor (B. C. 2052—2003). 
 
 19. Terah (B. C. 2122 — 2083), Am theta. 
 
 20. Abraham (B. C. 1992 — 1817), Sarah. 
 
 21. Isaac (B. C. 1896 — 1716), Rebekah. 
 
 22. Jacob (B. C. 1837—1690), Leah. 
 
 23. Judah (b. B. C. 1753), Tamar. 
 
 24. Hezron. 
 
 25. Aram. 
 
 26. Aminadab. 
 
 27. Naashon. 
 
 28. Salmon. 
 
 29. Boaz (B. C. 1312), Ruth. 
 
 30. Obed. 
 
 31. Jesse. 
 
 KINGS OF ISRAEL. 
 
 32. K. David (B. C. 1085 — 1015). Batlisheba. 
 
 33. K. Solomon (B. C. 1038 — 975) Naamah. 
 
 34. K. Rehoboam (B. C. b. 1016, d. 958), 
 Maacah. 
 
THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 257 
 
 GENERATIONS. 
 
 35. K. Abijam (B. C. 958—955). 
 
 36. K. Asa (B. C. 955 — 914), Azubah. 
 
 37. K. Jehosliaphat (B. C. 914 — 889). 
 
 38. K. Jelioram (B. C. 889 — 885), Atlialiah. 
 
 39. K. Ahazia (B. C. 906 — 884), Zibiah. 
 
 40. K. Joash (B. C. 885 — 839), Jelioaddan. 
 
 41. K. Amaziah (B. C. b. 864 ; d. 810), Jecholiali. 
 
 42. K. Uzziah (B. C. b. 826, d. 758), Jerushali. 
 
 43. K. Jotham (B. C. b. 783, d. 742). 
 
 44. K. Ahaz (B. C. b. 787, d. 726), Abi. 
 
 45. K. Hezekiali (B. C. b. 751, d. 698) Heph- 
 zibah. 
 
 46. K. Manasseli (B. C. b. 710, d. 643) Meshul- 
 lemeth. 
 
 47. K. Amon (B. C. b. 621, d. 641), .Tedidali. 
 
 48. K. Josiali(B. C. b. 649, d. 610), Hamutah. 
 
 49. K. Zedekiali (B. C. 578 — 599). 
 
 KINGS OF IRELAND. 
 
 50. K. Heremon fl. (B. C. 580), Q. Tea Teplii. 
 She was Zedekiali’ s daughter. Reigned 15 years. 
 
 51. K. Irial Faidh (reigned 10 years). 
 
 52. K. Eithriall (reigned 20 years). 
 
 53. Follian. 
 
 54. K. Tighernmas (reigned 50 years). 
 
 55. Eanbotha. 
 
 56. Smiorgnil. 
 
 57. K. Fiachadh Labhriane (reigned 24 years). 
 
 58. K. Aongns Ollmuchaidh (reigned 27 
 years). 
 
258 
 
 THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 GENERATIONS. 
 
 59. Maoin. 
 
 60. K. Rotheachta (reigned 25 years). 
 
 61. Dein. 
 
 62. K. Siorna Saoghalach (reigned 21 years). 
 
 63. Oliolla Olcliaoin. 
 
 64. K. Giallchadh (reigned 9 years). 
 
 65. K. Aodhain Glas (reigned 20 years). 
 
 66. K. Simeon Breac (reigned 6 years). 
 
 67. K. Muireadacli Bolgrach (reigned 4 years). 
 
 68. K. Fiachadh Tolgrach (reigned 7 years). 
 
 69. K. Duach Laidhrach (reigned 10 years). 
 
 70. Eochaidh Buaigllcry. 
 
 71. K. Ugaine More the Great (reigned 30 
 years). 
 
 72. K. Cobhthach Caolbreag (reigned 30 
 years). 
 
 73. Meilage. 
 
 74. K. Jaran Gleofathach (reigned 7 years). 
 
 75. K. Conla Cruaidli Cealgach (reigned 4 
 years). 
 
 76. K. Oiliolla Caisfhiaclach (reigned 25 
 years). 
 
 77. K. Eochaidh Foltleathan (reigned 11 
 years). 
 
 78. K. Aongns Tuirmheach Teamharch (reign- 
 ed 30 years). 
 
 79. K. Eana Aighneach (reigned 28 years). 
 
 80. Labhra Luirc. 
 
 81. Blathuchta. 
 
 82. Easamhuin Eamhna. 
 
259 
 
 THE THRONE OE DAVID. 
 
 GENERATIONS. 
 
 88. Roighnein Ruadh. 
 
 84. Finlogha. 
 
 85. Fian. 
 
 86. K. Eodchaidh Feidhlioch (reigned 12 
 years). 
 
 87. Fineamhnas. 
 
 88. K. Lughaidh Riadhdearg. 
 
 89. K. Criomhthan Niadhnar (reigned 16 
 years). 
 
 90. Fearaidhacli Fion Feachtnnigh. 
 
 91. K. Fiachadh Fionoluidh (reigned 20 
 years). 
 
 92. K. Tnathal Teachtmar (reigned 30 years). 
 
 93. K. Conn Ceadchatliach (reigned 20 years). 
 
 94. K. Art Aonfhir (reigned 30 years). 
 
 95. K. Corine Usada (reigned 40 years). 
 
 96. K. Caibre Liffeachair (reigned 27 years). 
 
 97. K. Fiacliadh Sreabthnine (reigned 30 
 years). 
 
 98. K. Muireadhach Tireach(reigned 30 years). 
 
 99. K. Eochaidh Moigmeodliin (reigned 7 
 years). 
 
 100. K. Niall of the Nine Hostages. 
 
 101. Eogan. 
 
 102. K. Mnrireadhach. 
 
 103. Earca. 
 
 KINGS OF ARGYLESHIRE. 
 
 104. K. Feargus More Mac Earca (A. D. 487). 
 
 105. K. Dongard (d. 457). 
 
260 
 
 THE THRONE OE DAVID. 
 
 GENERATIONS. 
 
 106. K. Conran (cl. 535). 
 
 107. K. Aidan (d, 604). 
 
 108. K. Eugene IY. (d. 622). 
 
 109. K. Donald IY. (d. 650). 
 
 110. Dongard. 
 
 111. K. Eugene Y. (d. A. D. 692). 
 
 112. Findan. 
 
 113. K. Eugene YII. (d. A. D. 721), Spondan. 
 
 114. K. Etfinus (d. A. D. 761), Fergina. 
 
 115. K. Achaius (d. A. D. 819), Fergusia 
 
 116. K. Alpin (d. A. D. 834). 
 
 SOVEREIGNS OF SCOTLAND. 
 
 117. K. Kenneth II. (d. A. D. 854). 
 
 118. K. Constantin II. (d A. D. 774). 
 
 119. K. Donald YI. (d. A. D. 903). 
 
 120. K. Malcolm I. (d. A. D. 958). 
 
 121. K. Kenneth III. (d. A. D. 994). 
 
 122. K. Malcolm II. d. (A. D. 1083). 
 
 123. Beatrix m. Thane Albanach. 
 
 124. K. Dunkan I. (d. A. D. 1040). 
 
 125. K. Malcolm III. Canmore (A. D. 1055 — 
 1093), Margaret of England. 
 
 126. K. David I. (d. A. D. 1153), Maud of 
 Northumberland. 
 
 127. Prince Henry (d. A. D. 1152), Adama of 
 Surrey. 
 
 128. Earl David (d. A. D. 1219), Maud of 
 Chester. 
 
THE THRONE OE DAVID. 
 
 261 
 
 GENERATIONS. 
 
 129. Isobel m. Robert Bruce III. 
 
 130. Robert Bruce IY. m, Isobel of Gloucester. 
 
 131. Robert Bruce Y. m. Martha of Carrick. 
 
 132. K. Robert I. Bruce (A. D. 1306 — 1329), 
 Mary of Burke. 
 
 133. Margary Bruce m. Walter Stewart (I.) 
 
 134. K, Robert II. (d A. D. 1390), Euphemia 
 of Ross (d. A. D. 1^6). 
 
 135. K. Robert III. (d. A. D. 1406), Arabella 
 Drummond (d. A. D. 1401). 
 
 136. K. James I. (A. D. 1424—1437), Joan 
 Beaufort. 
 
 137. K. James II. (d. A. D. 1360), Margaret 
 of Gueldres (d. A. D. 1463). 
 
 138. K. James III. (d. A. D. 1488), Margaret 
 of Denmark (d. A. D. 1484). 
 
 139. K. James IY. (d. A. D. 1543), Margaret 
 of-England (d. A. D. 1539). 
 
 140. K. James Y. (d. A. D. 1542), Mary of 
 Lorraine (d. A. D. 1560). 
 
 141. Q. Mary (d. A. D). 1587, Lord Henry 
 Darnley. 
 
 SOVEREIGNS OF GREAT BRITAIN. 
 
 142. K. James YI. and I. (A. D. 1603 — 1625). 
 Ann of Denmark. 
 
 143. Prince Elizabeth (1596—1613), K. Fred- 
 erick of Bohemia. 
 
 144. Princess Sophia m. Duke Ernest of 
 Brunswick. 
 
262 
 
 THE THRONE OF DAVID. 
 
 GENERATIONS. 
 
 145. K. George I. (1698 — 1727), Sophia Doro- 
 thea Zelle (1667—1726). 
 
 146. K. George II. 1727—1760), Princess 
 Caroline of Anspach (1683 — 1737). 
 
 147. Prince Frederick of Wales (1707 — 1751), 
 Princess Augusta of Saxe-Gotha. 
 
 148. K. George III. (1760—1820), Princess 
 Sophia of Mecklenburgh Strelitz (1744 — 1818). 
 
 149. Duke Edward of Kent (1767 — 1820), 
 Princess Victoria of Leiningen. 
 
 150. Q. Victoria (b. 1819, cr. 1838), Prince 
 Albert of Saxe-Coburg. 
 
 Thus do we see how God has kept His word 
 to David, and with this view, English and 
 American history are at once understandable. 
 The future is assuring and grand. God will as- 
 suredly overturn till this throne once more is 
 planted in Jerusalem. 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK 
 
 Discourse, 20. 
 
 THE PROPHET'S COMMISSION — HIS LIFE — THE 
 TRIBES IN HIS DAY — LANDING OF JEREMIAH 
 IN IRELAND — WHAT IIE BROUGHT WITH HIM — 
 COLONIZATION OF IRELAND — JEREMIAH THE 
 FOUNDER OF THE ANCIENT IRISH GOVERN- 
 MENT AND RELIGION — TEA TEPHI AND IIERE- 
 MON — THE ANCIENT IRISH FLAG — THE HARP 
 AND LION — SEASON OF IRELAND’S HISTORI- 
 CAL PRESTIGE — CAUSES OF HER DECLINE — 
 ST. PATRICK A BENJAMINITE — HOW ROME DE- 
 STROYED JEREMIAH’S MEMORY AMONG THE 
 IRISH — DESTRUCTION OF TARA — ULSTER 
 NEVER CONQUERED — IRISH INDEPENDENCE — 
 ARK OF THE COVENANT — RUINS OF TARA. 
 
 Text— Jer. 1. 10. 
 
 11 See , I have this day set thee over the nations and over the king - 
 domsy to root out , and to pull down , and to destroy, and to 
 throw downy to build, and to plant S 
 
 f N these words we have set forth the Divine 
 commission given to the prophet Jeremiah. 
 Never before, or since, was such a commission 
 given to mortal man. It is not that Jeremiah 
 
264 
 
 JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 is constituted a prophet for his own people, or 
 over his own nation and country, but he was 
 divinely appointed and set over the nations and 
 kingdoms of the earth, with an authority “to root 
 out, pull down, destroy, and throw down.” 
 Surely he was rightly named, for the word Jere- 
 miah means the exalted, or appointed one of the 
 Lord. By common consent, the Jews gave him 
 the first place and name among the prophets. 
 Up to the time of the Babylonian captivity he 
 was second, Isaiah being first. But after the 
 captivity, on the re-arrangement of the holy 
 canon, his name was put first, and ever after he 
 was regarded and accepted as the patron saint 
 of Judea. He was born of a priestly family 
 about 641 B. C., in the priestly town of Ana- 
 thoth, which was situated a few miles north of 
 Jerusalem, in the territory of Benjamin. His 
 work and commission awaited, because they an- 
 tedated his birth, for he says, chapter i, 4., 
 “ Then the word of the Lord came unto me, say- 
 ing, before I formed thee in the belly I knew 
 thee ; and before thou earnest forth out of the 
 womb I sanctified thee, and I ordained thee a 
 prophet unto the nations .” Jeremiah’s life’s 
 work, extent and devotion, can only find a par- 
 allel in the majesty and compass of his commis- 
 sion. It is the extent of this commission that I 
 wish you would specially notice, for it is neither 
 tribal nor national in its limitations. He was 
 ordained a prophet unto the nations. Hear the 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 265 
 
 voice of his wailing, chapter xv. 10, “Woe is 
 me, my mother, that thou hast borne me a man 
 of strife and a man of contention to the whole 
 earth'' 
 
 Consistent with the vastness of this commis- 
 sion is the recorded fact that he was forbidden 
 to marry in his own land, for ‘ ‘ the word of the 
 Lord came untome, saying, Thou shalt not take 
 thee a wife, neither shalt thou have sons and 
 daughters in this place.” — Jeremiahxvi. 2. The 
 claims of a wife and cares of a family could only 
 have been harshly fitted on to such a work and 
 commission. Indeed, every peculiar fact in the 
 life of Jeremiah may be best accounted for by 
 taking into consideration the greatness of his 
 commission. To discard this is simply to invite 
 confusion, and yet, strange to say, many prefer 
 confusion rather than admit that he performed 
 the role assigned him of heaven. For this very 
 reason writers, even Jewish historians, are at a 
 loss to account for the latter half of the pro- 
 phet’ s life. They do not seem to know where 
 he spent his last days ; they know not the time, 
 manner, nor place of his death. And why, you 
 ask? We answer, because they selfishly and 
 persistently limited his life and labors to his 
 own land. They have not been willing to allow 
 that he was set as a prophet over nations and 
 kingdoms. Then again, they have been willing 
 to allow him to be a puller down and destroyer, 
 but not a builder and planter. To grant that he 
 
266 
 
 JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 was a builder and planter, would have obliged 
 them to have found the place of his building 
 and the objects of his planting. These they well 
 knew could not be found in Palestine, and they 
 were as loth as many are unwilling to-day, to 
 permit Jeremiah to leave his own land. A man 
 who would be equal to the Bible must be large- 
 hearted, generous and free, not fettered and 
 bound by the errors of youthful training, the 
 selfishness of sectarianism, the bigotry of ortho- 
 doxy or the indifference of infidelity, but seek 
 the truth, no matter from whence, or what it 
 upsets or overturns of preconceived ideas. The 
 command is, “Prove all things and hold fast 
 that which is good.” To hear some people talk 
 and lament, you would think that the command 
 was : Prove nothing, but hold hard on to all 
 you have got. 
 
 Try now, and reasonably and patiently follow 
 me while I trace the wanderings of Jeremiah to 
 old Ireland. You will be surprised to find how 
 intimate Irishology and theology are. 
 
 Ireland and the tribe of Dan have a peculiar 
 history, which history only can be made plain 
 by reference to the Bible. Ireland has had 
 much to undergo, yet of it God says, “To the 
 island He will repay — recompense ; so shall 
 they fear the name of the Lord from the west.” 
 
 Ireland’s first name was Scuite’s Land, or the 
 Island of the Wanderers. Her second name was 
 Scotia Major, and Scotland was Scotia Minor, 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 267 
 
 and England was Tarshish, and Dannoii and 
 Baratamac, or Land of Tin. Yar in-Eirin 
 means the land of the setting snn. Hibernia is 
 an Hebrew word, and means from beyond the 
 river or waters. 
 
 Two colonies settled Ireland ; the first, the 
 Phoenicians, who were the Philistines or ancient 
 Canaanites. The second settlers were the Tuath 
 de Danan, meaning the tribe of Dan. The words 
 are Hebrew, yet in Irish. For further informa- 
 tion, let any one read Pinnock’s Catechism on 
 Ireland. The Phoenicians were a sea- faring peo- 
 ple ; pressed by Israel, Egypt and Assyria, they 
 finally left Canaan, and settled Ireland. We 
 find nine-tenths of Irish historians agreeing on 
 this. Then, the monuments teach the same — 
 ancient inscriptions, one of which written was, 
 “We are Canaanites who have fled from Joshua, 
 the son of Nun, the robber.” The people who 
 show tourists the seven Churches of Grlenden- 
 lough, say they are Hitites and Hivites. Again, 
 ruins of Baal Temples, Cromlechs, Round Tow- 
 ers, go to confirm the same. Customs — Baal 
 
 fires, on May eve, in Irish Ninna-baal-tinne ; 
 funeral wakes, or cup of consolation, forbidden 
 to Israel when they sought to copy after the 
 Philistines. “Neither shall men give them the 
 cup of consolation to drink for father or mother.’ ’ 
 — Jer. xvi:7. The Irish language came from the 
 Phoenician, the alphabet of both being composed 
 of sixteen letters originally, the only alphabet 
 
268 
 
 JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 in the world so agreeing. From the Irish came 
 the Gaelic, Welsh, Cornwall, and the Manx 
 from them all. 
 
 The second settlement of Ireland is what puz- 
 zles historians of to-day — not the old historians, 
 for they, nine out of ten, admit that the For- 
 morians, Firbolgs and Tuath de Danans, were one 
 and the same people. They were a divine folk. 
 The Tribe of Dan was a sea-faring tribe, trad- 
 ing from Tyre to Tarshish for tin, and so became 
 acquainted with the British Isles, and during 
 Ahab’ s persecution many of them fled ; so of the 
 Simeonites who settled Wales. This shows us 
 why the north and south of Ireland should be 
 so distinct to this day in religion, enterprise and 
 general characteristics. When the tribe of Dan 
 finally left Palestine, they, with the other nine 
 tribes, went north, settling Denmark, as in the 
 north of Ireland, leaving their names on rivers, 
 hills, cities and things. 
 
 It is this that accounts for so many words of 
 an Hebrew orign being found in the Irish lan- 
 guage. General Valiancy lias compared thou- 
 sands, and finds them thus related to the He- 
 brew. Instance : Jobhan-Moran, Chief Justice ; 
 Rectaire, Judge ; Mur-Ollam, School of the 
 Prophets ; Ollam-Folla, Divine Teacher ; Mer- 
 gech, a Depository ; Tara, Law ; Tephi, Prince 
 of the East ; Lia-Fail, Stone of Destiny ; Eben 
 Gedoulah, precious stone. 
 
 If to Irish history we join Bible history, all is 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 269 
 
 plain. God promised David repeatedly that he 
 should always have His throne and on it his seed. 
 The permanence of David’ s throne makes it a 
 fit type of Christ’ s. Now, Jeremiah took charge 
 of Zedekiah’ s daughters when Nebuchadnezzar 
 took the Jews captive. He went to Egypt, then 
 
 escaped, God promising to keep him whitherso- 
 ever he went. So he disappears. No account 
 of his death in the Bible. He had charge of the 
 ark of the covenant, royal seed and Jacob’s pil- 
 low — the stone of Israel. Irish histories, some 
 twenty of which we find agree, say that about 
 585 B. C., a divine man landed in Ulster, having 
 with him the king’ s daughter, stone of destiny, 
 and ark and many other wonderful things. The 
 people of Ulster of Dan understood the old ad- 
 venturer. Jeremiah married Teplii, Zedekiah’ s 
 daughter, to Eoiacaid, who agreed to abandon 
 Baal worship and build a school for the prophets. 
 So he did. He then assumed the title of Here- 
 mon of Tara, which was changed from Lothair 
 Croffin into Tara. From Tephi comes our God- 
 dess of Liberty, on old coins, sitting on a lion. 
 Now, at Tara, Jeremiah buried the ark of the 
 covenant, tables of law, etc., and instituted the 
 nine-arch degree of Masonry, to keep in mind 
 its hiding-place— so all may understand (Jer. 
 iii. 16) : “And it shall come to pass, when ye be 
 multiplied and increased in the land, in those 
 days, saith the Lord : they shall say no more 
 the ark of the covenant of the Lord ; neither 
 
270 JEKEMIAH AND ST. PATEtCK. 
 
 shall it come to mind ; neither shall they re- 
 member it ; neither shall they visit it ; neither 
 shall that be done any more.” This means that 
 when the ark is found the ceremony will end ; 
 for the ark has to be found and go before the 
 Jews when they return to their own land. Jere- 
 miah was the first Grand Master. He, too, is 
 the real St. Patrick — simply the Patriarchal 
 Saint, which became St. Patriarch, then St. 
 Patrick. The Roman Church introduced St. 
 Patrick to offset the St. Patriarch. 
 
 Jeremiah well knew where the tribes of Israel 
 were in his day. He knew that Judah, Levi and 
 Benjamin, were in Babylon, filling in the seventy 
 years of captivity, and the small remnant that 
 Nebuchadnezzar left of them in Judah, were 
 scattered hither and thither. The nine tribes, 
 or Israel, were settled in Central Asia ; and 
 were spreading northward and westward. This 
 he knew, as easily as Peter did centuries after, 
 when he wrote his epistle to the brethren, scat- 
 tered abroad in Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia 
 and Asia ; or as James, who dedicated his epis- 
 tle to the twelve tribes which were scattered 
 abroad ; or as the Blessed Master, commissioned 
 and sent His disciples after the lost sheep of the 
 house of Israel. The place and locality of the 
 nine tribes were known to the Jewish nation in 
 the time of Josephus, the historian, for he 
 speaks of them, and gives a fraternal letter 
 which the house of Judah sent unto the house 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 271 
 
 of Israel. You are to keep in mind that it is 
 after this the tribes of Israel are to be lost. All 
 prophecies after 700 B. C., up to this, our dajq 
 and till about 1882, A. D., that had reference to 
 Israel, plainly mark out the dwelling-place of 
 these tribes, and yet these prophecies not be- 
 ing understood, till these latter days, Israel was 
 as actually lost as if there had been no such 
 prophecies. These prophecies were first sent 
 north, then west, and then to the isles of the 
 sea. The law of the gospel of Jesus would be 
 sent to these tribes ; till then the “ isles had to 
 wait for the law.” In due time this law was 
 carried to them by the missionary tribe of Ben- 
 jamin. This very thing and time the prophet 
 had foretold, for he says: “Wherefore glorify 
 ye the Lord by the urim ; the name of the Lord 
 God of Israel in the islands of the western sea.” 
 How true, indeed “the isles saw it, and feared.” 
 Jeremiah knew that the tribe of Dan were a sea- 
 faring people, and in their trading they had be- 
 come acquainted with northern Europe and the 
 British Isles. During the persecutions of Ahab 
 thousands of them had left Palestine, settling 
 Denmark — this word Denmark means the circle 
 of Dan. In course of time they crossed the sea 
 and took possession of the north of Ireland, 
 settling the province of Ulster. The tribe of 
 Simeon, that had ever cast its lot with Dan, left 
 Palestine and settled Wales. Read the pro- 
 phetic benedictions of the patriarch Jacob, in 
 
272 
 
 JEREMTAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 the light of these historical facts, and they will 
 stand out in sunlight brightness. “Dan shall 
 judge his people as one of the tribes of Israel.'’ 
 In his oneness , all alone, he shall go out first, 
 mark out and prepare the way of the other 
 tribes ; and the royal seed, the ruling power, 
 shall hide itself in him. “Dan shall be a ser- 
 pent by the way ; an adder in the path that 
 biteth the horses’ heels so that his rider shall 
 fall backward.” Yes, Dan will be hid among 
 the Gentiles. He will bite them, sting them, 
 frustrating their purposes. Then exclaims Ja- 
 cob : “I have waited for thy salvation, oh 
 
 Lord.” Dan did wait, until the prophet Jere- 
 miah landed in his midst with Tea TepM, the 
 daughter of Zedekiah, the royal seed, with the 
 ark of the covenant, the tables of the law, the 
 urim and thummim, which would enable Dan 
 to judge his people, with the stone of Jacob, 
 the pillar witness, which is now in the royal 
 chair in Westminster abbey ; and also with the 
 standard of Judah. Thus the prophet, who was 
 the rightful custodian of all these things, care- 
 fully cared for the same, leaving them in charge 
 of Dan. All but the stone have been concealed 
 till the latter day. For on this stone have been 
 crowned all the Kings and Queens of David’s 
 line. 
 
 Now just here we must take up history — espec- 
 ially Irish history — for in this matter and at 
 this very point, you will find profane and sacred 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 273 
 
 histories agreeing. One will beautifully explain 
 the other ; nor can anybody understand Irish 
 history unless they get the key from sacred hist- 
 ory. To take this key later writers have been ^ 
 unwilling, and, therefore, they have been unable 
 to solve the problem embodied in this race and 
 nation. No people on the face of the earth have 
 been less understood and more misrepresented. 
 The real allophyllians of Ireland, that is, the 
 first native settlers, are unknown. The present 
 inhabitants are not autochthonal, no more than 
 we are the first settlers of this country. On 
 one point all old historians are agreed, 
 namely, that Ireland has been settled by two 
 distinct colonies of people ; and from these 
 two colonies come the present Irish race. 
 These two colonies were distinct in features, 
 manners, customs, enterprise and religion, and 
 after all these centuries have passed away these 
 differences are discernableinsome degree, espec- 
 ially so in enterprise and religion. And though, 
 of course, in these latter years they have become 
 considerably mixed, yet an appeal on either 
 of these points will mark out the Danite from 
 the Phoenician. From the loud boasting of the 
 Phoenician Irishman in Ireland, when speaking 
 of America, you would think that he would pluck 
 out his eyes and give’ them for a gift if need be. 
 Well, a few years ago, Chicago was bitterly 
 scourged with a fire. The need and distress thus 
 caused appealed to the nations of the earth for 
 
274 
 
 JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 help. The response was grand and glorious. 
 Even hateful old John Bull did well. But what 
 did Ireland do ? Take two of her leading cities 
 as an example ; one in the north, the other in the 
 south. Belfast in the north, of the tribe of Dan ; 
 Dublin in the south, of the Phoenicians. Belfast 
 sent $36,000 ; Dublin, $2,000. Why this differ- 
 ence % We answer, forsooth, the people of Bel- 
 fast are Danites ; they of Dublin are Phoenicians. 
 
 The Phoenicians, or Philistines, were the anci- 
 ent Canaanites. They took early possession of 
 Ireland. On this point the old, as well as the 
 new historians, generally agree. But there was 
 another early settlement in the north of Ireland, 
 whom the historians called Tuath de Danan , 
 which simply means the folks of the tribe of 
 Dan. They introduced into the Irish language 
 hundreds of Hebrew words, with many customs 
 and legends of the Hebrews. They were very 
 distinct in their enterprise and religion from the 
 other settlers. About the year 580 B. C. there 
 appeared before this people a strange man, 
 whom the historians call Ollam-Folla , which 
 means a divine teacher ; the name or title is in 
 Hebrew. This man, whoever he was, soon 
 wielded great power in “their midst. What he 
 commanded they seemed ready to do. He very 
 soon inaugurated wonderful reforms. He gave 
 them a parliament ; made them give up their 
 idolatrous customs. He founded a college to 
 train students to teach and preach his religion. 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 275 
 
 It was called Mur-Ollam, school of the divine. 
 Here again the name is Hebrew, although in 
 Irish. This wonderful man had with him a fair 
 young princess, whose name in Hebrew-Irish 
 was Tea Tepid, which means the beautiful one 
 from the East. This lovely princess was married 
 to the governor of Ulster, Heremon. He resided 
 in the city of Lothair Croffin. In the agreement 
 of the marriage, among many things, he was to 
 accept Iier religion, give her joint authority, and 
 build the Mur-Ollam, or college, and sustain it. 
 Also to change the name of his city from Lothair 
 Croffin to Tara , which means law ; to adopt her 
 standard or banner emblem, the harp and lion, 
 and to be crowned on the wonderful stone called 
 in Irish-Hebrew Lia-Fail , which means stone of 
 destiny, sometimes called Eben Gedoulah , the 
 precious stone. From this Tea Tephi we get our 
 female goddess of liberty, who on old coins is 
 seated upon a lion with the Davidian harp in her 
 hand. 
 
 Our text tells us that Jeremiah was to plant 
 and build up. Here he planted, and here he did 
 build. He planted and built a throne, a college 
 and a religion. Turn to Ezekiel, 17th chapter, 
 and read the famous riddle. Tea Tephi is the 
 tender twig that was cropped off from the high 
 cedar, King Zedekiali, and planted among the 
 merchants by great waters on the mountain of 
 Israel. She was the tender one that was to take 
 root downward. To Jeremiah the Lord said, 
 
276 
 
 JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 “Verily it shall be well with thy remnant.’’ 
 Nay, more, He told him that He would give him 
 his life for a prey whithersoever he went. And 
 in 2d Kings xix. 30, we read : “And the rem- 
 nant that is escaped of the house of Judah shall 
 yet again take root downward and bear fruit up- 
 ward. For out of Jerusalem shall go forth a 
 remnant, and they that escape out of Mount 
 Zion ; the zeal of the Lord of hosts shall do this.” 
 And Ezekiel, in his captivity, sent forth a 
 prophecy referring to the wicked prince, Zede- 
 kiah, saying of his throne in the name of Jeho- 
 vah : “ I will overturn, overturn, overturn it, 
 and it shall be no more until he comes whose 
 right it is, and I will give it him.” So was this 
 throne overturned, and was never after estab- 
 lished in Jerusalem. You will notice that there 
 are three overturnings, and as scriptural lan- 
 guage is emphatic and not superfluous or tauto- 
 logical, these overturnings mean something. 
 Turn to history, and you will find this throne 
 has been turned over just three times — first, 
 from Jerusalem to Ireland ; second, through 
 King Fergus to Scotland, and third, through 
 King James, from Scotland to England. This 
 throne can never be turned over again, for Jeru- 
 salem will be incorporated into the British em- 
 pire. The throne has turned over till it got 
 home again ; hence, as sure as we live, Palestine 
 will go into the hands of England. The throne, 
 religion and education established by the Pro- 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 277 
 
 pliet, have ever kept together. This is the secret 
 of Ireland’s prestige and marvelous pre-eminence 
 in centuries past. The college of Armach could 
 boast of 7,000 students at a time. Missionaries 
 went forth from Ireland through all Europe, 
 teaching Christianity and founding schools. 
 Few men can compare to Virgilus, Erigina, 
 Columbanus and Columba. In olden times she 
 was known as the “Isle of the Saints.” The 
 day of Ireland’s weakness and distress came to 
 her when she permitted her religion to be cor- 
 rupted and controlled by foreigners ; and by 
 these same Italian intriguers she is now impov- 
 erished and enslaved. But for this the throne 
 might have remained with her to-day, and Eng- 
 land and Scotland have been under her. But 
 when a nation loses her religion she loses the 
 right arm of power, and the ability to preserve 
 freedom. 
 
 Jeremiah was the patron-saint for Ireland for 
 a long time. Simeon the Welsh had, and have 
 David ; and as surely as the Welsh have kept 
 their saint, so surely ought Ireland. St. Patrick 
 is looked upon by many as a mythical person. 
 I believe, however, that he was a veritable man. 
 The best authorities make out that he was born 
 at Bonavena, in ancient Gaul, near what is now 
 called Bolougne, some time about 387 A. D. 
 He is reported as having died March 17th, 465, 
 in the county Down. His father’s name was 
 Calpurnius. Young Calpurnius, or St. Patrick, 
 
278 
 
 JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 as lie was afterward called, had a hard life of it 
 in youth. I believe him to have been a Ben- 
 jaminite, a Christian ; for the Benjaminites be- 
 gan to fill in that part of France about that 
 period. This tribe were by nature missionaries. 
 This prompted him to desire to redeem his 
 brethren in Ireland. In Ulster he began his 
 labors. From this same tribe others had visited 
 Ireland. History mentions four who preceded 
 St. Patrick. The name of St. Paul, by many, 
 is connected with a visit to Ireland. It is very 
 easy to see how Jeremiah, the patron- saint of 
 Judah, would be installed in such a relation 
 with the Danites after his death. He was the 
 real sainted patriarch of Ireland. And by a 
 crafty design of Rome young Calpurnius was 
 created sainted patriarch, or St. Patrick, and by 
 this means Rome linked the greater part of the 
 Irish nation on to herself. Anybody honest and 
 familiar with history, knows that St. Patrick 
 was a Christian, and in no sense of the word a 
 Roman Catholic. The fact is, Rome began early 
 to covet Ireland. Once they got possession, it 
 was necessary for them to destroy the influence 
 of Jeremiah. This they did, in part, by substitut- 
 ing the name of St. Patrick in the place of the 
 prophet’s ; and more, they then set to work to 
 destroy even the old and famous capital city of 
 Tara. In 565 St. Ruadham, along with a posse 
 of bishops and chiefs of the south of Ireland, 
 cursed the city, so that neither King nor Queen 
 
JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 27 !) 
 
 might ever rule or reign therein again. They 
 forced the government, monarchy and people, to 
 abandon the place. Prom thence Tara was 
 deserted, and the harp sounded no more through 
 Tara’s halls. The city thus cursed crumbled to 
 ruins, and remains to this day buried, awaiting 
 a glorious resurrection. Rome caught her prize 
 at last ; but neither Rome nor any other power 
 ever enslaved or conquered Ulster. Beyond the 
 pale — that is, the dividing line, running from the 
 Boyne to the Shannon — Rome never got, nor 
 never will. Irishmen clamor for independence, 
 to be free from England, and wonder why they 
 are not. The reason is that God cannot trust 
 liberty to them ; for a people that yoke them- 
 selves to a foreigner, and give themselves over to 
 be governed in spiritual matters, would make a 
 poor effort if trusted with their temporal gov- 
 ernment. We all know that if Ireland had been 
 free she would not long have remained so, for 
 body, as well as soul, she would have committed 
 to the Italians. Why Irish Catholics should ask 
 for freedom when they so voluntarily bind them- 
 selves to a foreigner, I fail to see. As the Prot- 
 estants of the north have asked, and had 
 granted, spiritual freedom in the severance of 
 church and state, so let the men of the south 
 ask and demand, and stop not short of free- 
 dom from Rome. A free religion is the parent 
 of a free state, and a free state of free school. 
 A people who are not wise enough to take care 
 
280 
 
 JEREMIAH AND ST. PATRICK. 
 
 of their own religion, are very poorly prepared 
 to be the guardians of liberties. My belief is 
 that Ireland ought to be free. She ought to 
 be an independent province, with responsible 
 government, as other English provinces. And 
 once she becomes free religiously, it will not 
 be long before she will be free politically. 
 Substitute Jeremiah for St. Patrick, and the Lord 
 Jesus for the pope, then the day of freedom will 
 not long tarry. 
 
A NEW AND REVISED CATALOGUE OF WORKS 
 
 ON THE IDENTIFICATION OF THE 
 
 ANGLO-SAXONS 
 
 WITH THE 
 
 Lost Ten Tribes of Israel, 
 
 ALSO, 
 
 WORK? ON THE QREAT PYRAMID, 
 
 AND 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS BOOKS AND TRACTS, 
 
 PUBLISHED AND FOR SALE BY # 
 
 JAMES HUGGINS , No. 372 Pearl Street , New York. 
 
 WORKS BY EDWARD HINE. 
 
 Forty-Seven Identifications of tlie Anglo-Saxons, with the Lost 
 Ten Tribes of Israel, founded upon 500 Scripture proofs. By Edward 
 Hine. 20c. 
 
 Flashes of Light. Part second of Forty-seven Identifications of the 
 Anglo-Saxons with the Lost House of Israel, giving Three Chapters on 
 Weights and Measures. 20c. 
 
 Oxford Wrong. Part third of Identifications, and Edward Hine’s re- 
 ply to Canon Rawlinson, showing that the Anglo-Saxons entirely agree 
 with the Bible accounts of Lost Israel, in Language, Physical Type, 
 Religious Opinions, Manners, Customs, etc. 15c. 
 
 England’s Coining Glories. Fourth part of the Identifications of 
 the Anglo-Saxons with Lost Israel, containing the Glory of the Great 
 Pyramid. By Prof. C. Piazzi Smyth, F. R. S. S. By Edward Hine. 20c. 
 
 Anglo-Saxon Riddle, or the Riddle of our Israelitish Origin. Present 
 Grandeur and Future Greatness ; also its Solution. By Edward Hine, 7c. 
 
 Or the FIVE PAMPHLETS bound in ONE VOLUME, $1.25; gilt, $1.75. 
 
 Cui Bono } or the Political, Social, and Religious Uses of the Identifica- 
 tions of Anglo-Saxons, with Israel. By Edward Hine. 20c. 
 
PERIODICALS. 
 
 Lite From the Dead. By Edward Hine. Monthly parts, 15c. $1.50 
 per year. Vols. 1 to 5, cloth, $1.75; gilt edges, $2.00 each. 
 
 The Nation’s Glory Leader* By Edward Hine. Weekly, $2.50 per 
 year; quarterly parts, 50c. Vols. 1 to 6, $1. 50, cloth ; gilt, $1.75 each. 
 
 The Banner of Israel* By Philo-Israel. Weekly, $2.50 per year; 
 Monthly parts, $2.25 per year. 
 
 The Standard of Israel. By Grimaldi. Per year, $1.50; Monthly, 20c. 
 
 ‘♦Our Best,” By Thos. Wilson, $1.00 per year. Subscribers by mail, 
 $1.25 per year. Bound Vols. of “Our Rest,” for 1878 and 1879, price $1.75 
 per Vol. 
 
 WORKS BY VARIOUS WRITERS. 
 
 The Lost Teh Tribes, and 1882* By Rev. Joseph Wild, I). D. 
 Price $1.00 ; post, $1.20. 
 
 Manasseli and the United States. An Essay delivered by the 
 Rev. Joseph Wild, D. D., in the Union Congregational Church, Brook- 
 lyn, N. Y. New Edition, with engraving of Great Seal of U. S. Price, 
 post paid, 6c. 
 
 A Resume of the Scriptural Argument, Proving the Identity 
 of the Anglo-Saxon Race with the Lost Ten Tribes. By Philo-Israel, 5c. 
 
 Hine’s Leaflets* Nos. 1, 2 and 3, per 100, 50c. 
 
 Anglo-Israel Leaflets. 1, 2 and 3 ; per 100, 50c. 
 
 Bristol Leaflets on the Identification* lto4; per 100, 50c. 
 
 Arc the English People the Ten Lost Tribes } By Philo- 
 Israel. 15c. * 
 
 The Clifton Chronicle, Letters with Introduction. Objections 
 raised by Opponents, and Replies Thereto. By Philo-Israel. 15c. 
 
 The History of the House of Israel. How they were Lost and 
 How they were Found. By Philo-Israel. 25c. 
 
 Israel in Britain. By C. M. and Philo-Israel. 15c. 
 
 The New Old Story. By Philo-Israel ; for children ; cloth, 25c. 
 
 Beanlah, or Eden Restored. In parts ; 20c. each ; set of eight maps to 
 illustrate Beaulah. 65c. 
 
 Shear jashub, or Britain’s Coming Ordeal. By Watchman. 65c. 
 
 Anglo-1 srael. A reply to the Rev. Prof. Campbell. By Wm, Grieg, 
 Montreal. 25c. 
 
 The lsraelitish Origin of the Anglo-Saxons* By T. C. 
 
 Balmer. $2.50. 
 
 The Bestiny of Russia and Future Movements. With 
 
 colored map of Europe and Asia. Cloth ; price 75c., post-paid. 
 
 Light Colored Maps. By G. D. Wilson. In which are exhibited the 
 positions of the Tribes upon their return to Palestine. The boundaries 
 of the land, giving a map of what they were, and what they are to be, 
 the physical changes made, and to be made, the site and tha. plan of the 
 future Temple, etc. 75c. 
 
Our Israelitisli Origin. By John Wilson. $2.00. New and en- 
 larged edition. $3.00. 
 
 Title-Deeds of tlie Holy Land. By John Wilson. $2.00. 
 
 Tlie Mission of Elijah. By John Wilson. $2.00. 
 
 The Covenant ; or, Jacob’s Heritage. By F. C. Danvers, Bound, $2.00. 
 
 Israel Discovered in tlie Anglo-Saxons and other Kin- 
 dred Protestant Nations. By Rev. H. Newton, B. A. 20c. 
 Cloth, 50c. 
 
 Israel ; or, The Ten Tribes Identified with the Anglo-Saxons and other 
 Branches of the Teutonic Race. By Rev. F. A. R. Glover, M. A. 35c. 
 
 The Anglo-Israel Post Dag ; or, “ How Arthur Came to see it.” 
 By Bishop Titcomb. New edition. 60c. 
 
 Is it not Reasonable ? A Dialogue on the Anglo-Israel Controversy. 
 By Bishop Titcomb. 10c. 
 
 Links in the Chain of Evidence. By J. Leyland Fielden. 80c.; 
 gilt edges, $1.00. 
 
 The Israelites found in tlie Anglo-Saxons. The Ten Tribes 
 traced from the lands of their captivity to their occupation of the Isles 
 of the Sea. By William Carpenter. 80c.; gilt edges, $1.25. 
 
 Diblical Testimony of the Present and Future of Israel. 
 By the Rev. J. G. Tipper, M. A. 3c.; per 100, $2.00. 
 
 Eost Israel. Where are they to be found ? An inquiry. By H. L. 20c. 
 
 Scripture Guide, in a Search after the Ten Tribes ; or, the 
 Whole House of Israel. By M. M. M. 10c. 
 
 Pamphlet on the Apocalypse. By T. W. Greenwell. 35c. 
 
 Queen Victoria’s Royal Descent from King David the 
 Psalmist. New edition, revised and corrected. By .the Rev. A. B. 
 Grimaldi, A. M. 3c.; per 100, $2.00. 
 
 WORKS ON THE GREAT PYRAMID. 
 
 The Pillar of Witness. A Scriptural View of the Great Pyramid. 65c. 
 
 Philitis ; or, Solution of the Mystery which for four thousand years has 
 shrouded the Great Pyramid in Egypt. By Charles Casey. 75c. 
 
 Our Inheritance in the Great Pyramid. New edition. By 
 Piazzi Smyth, Astronomer-Royal for Scotland. $5.00. 
 
 Eife and Work at the Great Pyramid in 1S65. Illustrated 
 by 36 fine plates. $17.00. By Piazzi Smyth, Astronomer-Royal, of 
 Scotland. 
 
 The Great Pyramid. By Philo-Israel. 15c. 
 
 Miracle in Stone ; or, The Great Pyramid. By Joseph A. Seiss, D. 
 D. $1.25. 
 
 A Supplement to the Miracle in Stone. This is an invaluable 
 addition to the previous work. By Dr. Seiss. 30c. 
 
 The Scientific and Religions Discoveries of the Great 
 Pyramid. By W. H. Wilson. 25c. 
 
The Death, Resurrection and Ascension of the Wit- 
 nesses Prophesying in Sackcloth. By. T. W. Greenwell, 
 Esq. 40c. 
 
 Prophetic Thoughts. By B. W. Tracy. 12c. 
 
 The Pyramid and the Bible* By a Clergyman. $1.00. 
 
 Papers on the Great Pyramid. By John Vincent. $1.25. 
 
 Facts and Bates* By Alex. MacKay. Second edition. $1.25. 
 
 ANGLO-ISRAEL MUSIC. 
 
 Return of Israel to Palestine. An Anthem. By J. W. M. 
 
 Young. 50c. 
 
 Kohler’s Musical Star. Parts. 35c. 
 
 Israel in England* Song of Myriam. 50c. 
 
 Eastward Ho ! Words and Music. By Myriam. 25c. 
 
 Israel’s Jubilee ; or 1882. Cloth, 50c.; gilt, 75c. 
 
 The National March into India and up to Zion. By 
 
 Myriam. 35c. 
 
 New Israelitish Anthem. By Thackway. Inscribed to Edward 
 Hine. 65c. 
 
 BOOKS AND TRACTS. 
 
 The Atonement. By G. W. Samson, D. D. Bound, $1.00. 
 
 Baptist Succession. A Historical Discourse. By G. W. Samson, 
 D. D. 20c. 
 
 How to Use the Bible* By J. H. Brooks. 46 pages. 15c. An ex- 
 cellent tract for circulation in these days of skepticism. 
 
 The First New Testament Church. Is just the thing to put into 
 the hands of young converts. It is wholly Scriptural, and in a small 
 space gives the Church Order, according to the New Testament. On 
 fine paper, 75c. per 100. Plain, 50c. 
 
 Only Believe. The design of this tract is to turn the inquirer’s 
 thoughts from his “FEELING” to faith in Christ, and give him rest, in 
 the Word. 75c. per 100. Plain, 50c. 
 
 Workers and Drones. Is for both young converts and old. It sets 
 forth the responsibilities of Church membership, which are too little 
 considered by those entering our Churches to-day. 75c. per 100. 
 Plain, 50c. 
 
 Three - Button Gloves and Tobacco. By Latimer Ridley. 
 
 60c. per 100. 
 
 THE TRADE SUPPLIED AT A DISCOUNT. 
 
 This catalogue will be revised and enlarged as the new Books and 
 Pamphlets are published. All other works will be obtained at the earliest 
 possible moment, ,by addressing a postal card to 
 
 JAMES HUGGINS, Printer and Publisher, 
 
 372 Pearl Street, New York* 
 

 
 
 

 
 
 
 
/